Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
1 of 59

Audacity Plugins

Loading...

realtime effects

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

AI plugins

Loading...

Nyquist Plugins

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Analyzers

Loading...

Loading...

Contributing

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Additional resources

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Effect Plugins

Basics

Generator Plugins

Various generator-type Nyquist plugins. Licensed under GPL v2 unless otherwise noted.

Tutorials

Creating your own Nyquist Plugins

Weighted curves

A-weighted curve

A-weighting is a commonly used curve defined in the International standard IEC 61672:2003. It was originally developed for measuring low level noise in audio equipment.

1KB
A-weighting.xml
Open

EQ curves

Audacity custom themes

Audacity supports custom themes in the form of ImageCache.png files.

Installation instructions can be found here:

Audacity themes forum

Themes created by the Audacity community

Creating custom themes

Instructions on creating your own custom theme can be found here:

External scripts

External scripts don't run within Audacity itself. Instead, they communicate with it using mod-script-pipe.

Further information can be found here:

vinyl2digital

For batch processing of vinyls

EQ XML to TXT converter

Convert older EQ presets to use in current Audacity

Download and installation

First, download the plugin below:

Then install the plugin in Audacity via Tools -> Nyquist Plugin Installer and restart Audacity. Detailed steps are available at

Stereo Tracks Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief introduction to using stereo tracks in Nyquist programming.

If a sound from an Audacity stereo track was given to Nyquist, the *TRACK* variable contains an array of sounds. Because all Nyquist "snd-..." low-level functions only can process mono signals, to use such a function, the *TRACK* array first must be split into single mono signals and afterwards be re-combined into an array before it is given back to Audacity.

In Sal, one could write:

Or in LISP, one could write:

  • (arrayp *track*) - tests if '*track*' is an array

Delay Basics

This page explains how to use Nyquist to add a feedback delay effect in Audacity.

Note: All [comments] and [explanations] are written in square brackets, so they cannot be confused with (Lisp code).

To add a feedback delay effect to an Audacity track with Nyquist, the easiest way is to use the Nyquist "feedback-delay" function:

(feedback-delay sound delay feedback)

The "feedback-delay" function applies feedback delay to sound. The delay must be a number (in seconds). The sample rate is the maximum from sound and feedback (if feedback is also a sound). The amount of feedback should be less than 1 to avoid an exponential increase in amplitude. Also since output is truncated at the stop time of

Pitch and Tempo

MuseFX PitchFix

An easy to use pitch correction/snapping/autotune effect. Part of the pack.

Details

See the pack for installation instructions.

(vector ... ) - re-combines the two mono signals into a stereo signal. A "vector" is an one-dimensional array
  • (aref *track* 0) - the left stereo channel [the 0-th slot of the array]

  • (aref *track* 1) - the right stereo channel [the 1-st slot of the array]

  • Important: The Nyquist interface within Audacity can handle a maximum of two channels simultaneously [Audacity stereo tracks]. If in Audacity more than one audio track were selected, each of the selected tracks will be given sequentially, one after the other, with a maximum of two channels simultaneously [stereo] to Nyquist for processing. It is not possible with Nyquist in Audacity e.g. to copy audio signals from one Audacity track into another track.

    multichan-expand

    In the "nyquist.lsp" file in the Audacity "nyquist" sub-directory, there is a function "multichan-expand" defined, which simplifies the handling of multi-channel sounds [e.g. stereo tracks]:

    (multichan-expand function &rest arguments)

    So the "arrayp" constuct from above can also be written:

    This may look a bit more cryptic at first, but it can help to avoid long-winded audio processing functions.

    if arrayp(*track*) then
     return vector(snd-function(*track*[0]), snd-function(*track*[1]))
    else
     return snd-function(*track*)
    sound
    , you may want to append some silence to
    sound
    to give the filter time to decay.

    Example:

    1. First either load a sound file into Audacity or record some.

    2. Now click Tools -> Nyquist Prompt. A window with a text field will appear where you can type in:

    Do not forget to type the parens. The parens are part of the Lisp language Nyquist is based on. Without the parens the Nyquist Lisp interpreter will not be able to understand your code

    See Prompt Basics for more info about the prompt.

    After clicking "OK" in the "Nyquist Prompt" window the "feedback-delay" function will take the Audacity sound and return a output sound with a feedback delay of 0.7s throughout the sound. The result of the last computation of the Nyquist code always gets automatically returned to Audacity.

    The ''*TRACK*''' variable is the Audacity "sound" [the selected part of the Audacity track]. Nyquist in Audacity always understands ''*TRACK*'' as the Audacity sound variable.

    Try "feedback-delay" with longer or shorter delay times as well as different sounds for feedback. Nyquist provides many more functions to generate sounds besides the simple "sine" function. Look at Functions: Sound Synthesis for the complete list of these functions.

    ;;"(sine 440)" generates a sinusoidal sound wave at 440Hz to be used as the feedback 
    (feedback-delay *track* 0.7 (sine 440)) 
    (if (arrayp *track*)
        (vector
            (snd-function (aref *track* 0))   ; left stereo channel
            (snd-function (aref *track* 1)))  ; right stereo channel
        (snd-function *track*))               ; mono signal
     return multichan-expand(quote(snd-function), *track*) ;; in SAL
     (multichan-expand #'snd-function *track*) ;; in LISP
    Using the converter

    Once installed, the converter appears in Tools -> EQ XML to TXT Converter.

    Screenshot

    To use it,

    1. Select the target EQ effect. Curves to be imported can be either for Filter Curve EQ effect or Graphic EQ effect but not both.

    2. Select your source XML file.

    3. (optional) select what should happen if the file exists already

    4. Click OK.

    The TXT file now is in the same location as the source XML file.

    You now can import the TXT file via Filter Curve EQ or Graphic EQ -> Presets and settings -> Import...

    6KB
    EQ xml to txt.ny
    Open
    Downlaod link
    https://support.audacityteam.org/basics/customizing-audacity/installing-plugins#installing-nyquist-plugins
    Has modes optimized for male/female voices and more, and can snap to major, minor and even more rare scales (eg Lydian).

    MAutoPitch

    Automatic vocal tuning effect, part of the MFreeFXBundle pack

    Details

    MAutoPitch is a simple but great sounding automatic tuning and pitch correction plugin designed for vocals and other monophonic instruments. Besides making the audio more in-tune, MAutoPitch also provides creative features such as formant shift and stereo-expansion.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

    • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

    • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

    • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

    • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

    • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

    See the for installation instructions.

    See also

    • Nyquist Time, Pitch and Tempo effects

    Muse FX

    Audacity Plugins

    This site features download links to various plugins for Audacity, which can be used to extend Audacity's functionality to better match your workflow.

    On this site you can find download links for equalizer plugins, filter plugins, delay and reverb plugins, and more. If you'd like to download many plugins at once, you also can try entire plugin suites.

    All plugins in the realtime effects section can be used instantly and non-destructively from the effects panel in Audacity.

    This means that you can change the effect settings while playing, and come back to your settings after doing many other things - without the need to undo anything, or to wait for the effect to be applied to the track.

    Further information about using realtime effects can be found here:

    Installing plugins

    When you install plugins, they're automatically enabled the next time you restart Audacity. Alternatively, you can also locate and enable them via Effect -> Plugin Manager -> Rescan Plugins. Further instructions can be found here:

    Popular plugins

    • , a plugin to check if an audio book complies with the ACX guidelines

    • , an effects library from Audacity's sister project.

    • , a library to import and export various media formats such as M4A, WMA and MP4.

    Contributing to this site

    If you want to add your own plugin, or one that you found on the web, read the .

    Plugin formats supported by Audacity

    Nyquist plugins

    Audacity has built-in support for Nyquist effects on all operating systems. You can download additional Nyquist plugins, or create your own using the . Nyquist code can be conveniently tested using "" under the Effect menu.

    LV2 plugins

    Audacity has built-in support for plugins, which are an extensible successor of LADSPA effects. LV2 plugins are mostly built for Linux, but Audacity supports LV2 on all operating systems. To install LV2 plugins, place them in the then use the Plugin Manager to enable the new plugins as in the plugin installation instructions.

    VST plugins

    Audacity can load VST effects (but not VST instruments) on all operating systems.

    VST3 plugins

    Starting with Audacity 3.2, VST3 effects are also supported on all operating systems.

    Audio Unit plugins

    On Mac OS X only, you can add plugins to the .

    LADSPA plugins

    LADSPA is superseded by LV2. These plugins are mostly built for Linux.

    Other sources

    This site is only meant as a starting point for effects. There are many more plugins, particularly VST3 ones, available on various vendor sites, directories and online stores. Some of them are listed below:

    • : ,

    • : ,

    Noise Generators

    Harmonic Noise

    Generates approximately harmonic tones by mixing narrow bands of noise

    2KB
    harmonicnoise.ny
    Open
    Download link
    938KB
    harmonic_noise.wav
    Open
    Harmonic noise audio file
    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Generates approximately harmonic tones by mixing narrow bands of noise. For each note in the MIDI note list an n-partial tone is produced. Each partial of each tone is actually a narrow band of noise centered at the ideal harmonic frequency. The center frequency of each band is harmonically related to the fundamental and the amplitude decreases inversely with the harmonic number.

    Parameters:

    1. MIDI Note List: [c2 c3 ef4 g4 bf4 c5] - MIDI notes may be specified either as integers or using the Nyquist constants 'g3' for third octave g, 'bf4' for fourth octave b flat, 'gs2' for second octave g sharp and so on.

    2. Number of Harmonics: [1 - 32, default 8] - that is, the number of partials for each note generated

    3. Duration: [1 - 30 seconds, default 10]

    Narrowband Noise

    Narrowband Noise generates noise within a specified frequency range by ring-modulating a sine wave with low-pass filtered noise. The effect is like band-pass filtered noise.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton (after "Noise Band" by Steven Jones).

    Narrowband Noise generates noise within a specified frequency range by ring-modulating a sine wave with low-pass filtered noise. The effect is like band-pass filtered noise.

    Parameters:

    1. Center Frequency (Hz): [10 to 10000 Hz, default 440]

    Plugin Suites

    Families of plugins by the same authors

    Muse FX

    A collection of essential effects. Contains a Chorus, Compressor, De-esser, Delay, Master, Noise Gate, Pitch Fix, Reverb, Rotary, and two EQ effects.

    MuseFX is a free and expanding collection of high quality plugins for Audacity, MuseScore 4 and any VST3 compatible host. MuseFX brings the tools you need to elevate your mix to a higher level.

    Available for all platforms

    GVST

    A set of simple VST effects, most known for the GSnap (auto-tune) effect.

    Available for Windows and macOS

    MFreeFXBundle

    A collection of 37 effects in categories like Analysis, Saturation & distortion, Dynamics, Equalization, Mastering, Mixing, Pitch and others.

    ToneBoosters

    Powerful plugins for any type of audio mixing: eq, dynamics, reverb, and more.

    Details

    "Demo" mode is fully functional except for preset saving. You can use Audacity's preset system instead.

    What is Included:

    • Barricade 4 : Limiter

    • BitJuggler : Sampler / Processor

    Kilohearts Essentials

    Kilohearts Essentials is free collection of 30+ plugins.

    Available for Windows only

    Reaplugs

    A selection of some effects found in Reaper.

    Intel OpenVINO

    Music separation, remix and generation, noise suppression, and transscription

    Available for macOS

    MacOS already ships with a range of Audio Unit effects which you can try out

    Available for Linux

    swh Plugins

    A set of LADSPA effects. They can be found in most Linux repositories.

    Calf Studio Gear

    An LV2 plugin suite featuring a wide array of plugins for audio mixing and mastering. As of version 0.90.0 there are 47 plugins in the suite.

    Note: The virtual instruments included are not supported in Audacity.

    The Calf plugins can be found in the repositories of most Linux distributions, additionally, compilation instructions can be found here:

    AI plugins

    Intel OpenVINO

    A set of AI-enabled effects, generators, and analyzers. These AI features run 100% locally on your PC 💻 -- no internet connection necessary! OpenVINO™ is used to run AI models on supported accelerators found on the user's system such as CPU, GPU, and NPU.

    • Music Separation🎵 -- Separate a mono or stereo track into individual stems -- Drums, Bass, Vocals, & Other Instruments.

    • 🧹 -- Removes background noise from an audio sample.

    • 🎶 -- Generates music from a text prompt or continues an existing song

    • 🎤 -- Uses to generate a label track containing the transcription or translation for a given selection of spoken audio or vocals.

    NVIDIA Broadcast

    A virtual device that sits between your microphone and Audacity and other programs which allows you to use an AI denoiser.

    Caution: NVIDIA Broadcast only works on Windows machines with a NVIDIA RTX GPU.

    Further, it only works on spoken word content; musical content is treated as noise and filtered out.

    Details

    Copyright © 2022 NVIDIA Corporation

    Requires NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2060, Quadro RTX 3000, TITAN RTX or higher

    Full setup guide:

    Technically, NVIDIA Broadcast isn't a plugin but a virtual device. You will find it in Audacity's audio settings as an input. It does not show up in the Plugin Manager.

    Generator Utilities

    Nyquist Generate Prompt

    Nyquist Generate Prompt makes it easy for Nyquist developers to test their code for "Generate" plugins in one step.

    2KB
    generate.ny
    Open
    Download link
    Details

    Authors: Steve Daulton, Edgar Franke, Steven Jones and

    Nyquist Generate Prompt makes it easy for Nyquist developers to test their code for "Generate" plugins in one step, unlike the Nyquist Prompt built into Audacity under the Effect menu, which requires several steps including pre-loading audio to test. Simply type your Nyquist generate code into the edit fields, then Left Click, TAB or SHIFT + TAB from one edit line to the next or previous line.

    For example:

    The first line generates 10 seconds of white noise and assigns it to the variable "mysound". The second line applies a low-pass filter sweeping down from 5 kHz to 100 Hz over a period of 10 seconds to "mysound".

    Tuning fork

    A software tuning fork, with a table giving C notes and their equivalent MIDI note numbers near the top of the screen.

    Details

    Author:

    A software tuning fork, with a table giving C notes and their equivalent MIDI note numbers near the top of the screen.

    Parameters:

    1. Tone duration: [0 - 300 seconds, default = 120]

    The *SCRATCH* Symbol Tutorial

    This page provides a brief introduction to using the *SCRATCH* symbol in Nyquist programming.

    *SCRATCH* is a global symbol, specific to Nyquist in Audacity, which is not deleted in-between plugin runs. It provides a way for information to survive from one invocation of a plugin to the next. However, you should not rely on the "value" of *SCRATCH* beyond a single invocation of a plugin as it could be overwritten by another plugin. It is better to use property lists of *SCRATCH*. That way, you get a whole name space rather than a single variable name, and with careful naming of the property keys, name collisions can be avoided.

    To pass data from plugin "effectX-partA" to "effectX-partB":

    1. Assign a property name based on the effect name, e.g.: 'EFFECTX [or in SAL, which does not support the single-quote notation of LISP, write QUOTE(EFFECTX). ]

    2. "effectX-partA" should delete any old property value:

    exec remprop(quote(*SCRATCH*), quote(effectx)) ;; in SAL
    (remprop '*SCRATCH* 'effectx) ;; in LISP

    3. "effectX-partA" should compute a new property value v and save it:

     exec putprop(quote(*SCRATCH*), v, quote(effectx)) ;; in SAL
     (putprop '*SCRATCH* v 'effectx) ;; in LISP

    4. "effectX-partB" should access the property using:

     set v = get(quote(*SCRATCH*), quote(effectx)) ;; in SAL
     (get '*SCRATCH* 'effectx) ;; in LISP

    5. When "effectX-partB" finishes, it should remove the property:

    But there may be cases where you do some analysis and want to use the analysis data multiple times. You might even have multiple analysis plugins operating on different inputs to collect data to feed into a plugin with multiple inputs. In this case, which might be quite common, you should not call REMPROP(), but this has the problem of leaving data on the *SCRATCH* property list indefinitely.

    In cases where *SCRATCH* data is not deleted immediately after use, and where there is the potential to leave large amounts of memory there, there should be another effect, e.g. "effectX-partCleanup", that simply calls:

    allowing the user to explicitly free up any data stored on the 'EFFECTX property. It would be reasonable to omit the "effectX-partCleanup" effect if the data stored on the property list has a maximum size of, say, 10KB. The problem we want to avoid is properties with unbounded size getting left in the heap until Audacity is restarted.

    Sequencer Effects

    Audio Selection Sequencer 2

    You can turn any short piece of imported, recorded or generated audio into a (repeated) sequence of notes based on chosen tempo, beats per sequence and semitone values. Any sound can be used.

    13KB
    seq2.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Details

    Author:

    Developed from the previous sequencers 1a and 1b (these can't be recommended due to the interface being too tall, and distortion problems). You can turn any short piece of imported, recorded or generated audio into a (repeated) sequence of notes based on chosen tempo, beats per sequence and semitone values. Any sound can be used (a guitar pluck or bell sound, cat meow, someone saying "hello", in fact - any sound). Comes with an 8-note default sequence already programmed in. Can also pan stereo audio, and transpose successive sequences. To generate a rest, use r, n, (), or a blank svp input line.

    Parameters:

    1. Tempo: [beats per minute (default 210), beats per sequence (default 8), starting offset (beats) (default 0)]

    2. Pan stereo selection: [0 = no 1=yes (default)]

    3. Timing randomization: [0 - 100 plus or minus percent, default 0]

    Dynamics Processing

    Muse FX Compress

    An easy to use compressor effect. Part of the pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    Sequence Generators

    Rndtone

    Generates random sine waves.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Adding plugins to this site

    If you'd like to contribute first make a gitbook account and then go to to get access to the Plugin space. From there, editing .

    Alternatively, you can also make a pull request to the on Github.

    Requirements for Plugins

    Distortion Effects

    Harmonic Enhancer

    Adds high frequency harmonics to brighten very dull recordings that don't respond to .

    Details

    Author: Jvo Studer

    Developing your own plugins and scripts

    Plugins

    Audacity supports the following formats:

    • Nyquist (Lisp or SAL) Audacity's built-in scripting format. Allows for easy generation of UI elements and already is tuned to Audacity's needs. Note that this plugin format is not supported as realtime effects. Documentation:

    Independent Stereo Volume Basics

    This page explains how to use Nyquist to change the volume of left and right stereo channels independently.

    As discussed previously, the audio data <sound>from an Audacity track is passed to Nyquist in a variable '*track*'. If the track is mono (just one channel) then the <sound> is simply the value given to the variable '*track*'. However, for a stereo track there are two sounds, and these are passed to Nyquist as two elements of an array. The name of the array is '*track*'.

    To access a specific element of an array we use the command.

    As a stereo track has 2 channels, the array '*track*' has two elements which are numbered 0 and 1. the 0th element is the audio data from the left channel and the other element contains the audio data from the right channel.

    Band Width: [1 - 1000 Hz, default 2] - depending on the width of this noise band, the result can sound very noisy or distinctly tonal with a heavy chorusing effect.
  • Odd Harmonics Only: [0 = all harmonics (default), 1 = odd-numbered harmonics only]

  • Bandwidth (Hz): [1 to 10000 Hz, default 50]

  • Amplitude (0 - 1): [0 to 1, default 0.8]

  • Duration (minutes): [0 to 20 minutes, default 0]

  • Duration (seconds): [0 to 60 seconds, default 30]

  • Stereo Output: [No / Yes, default No]

  • To generate true stereo noise (left and right channels different), a stereo track must be selected and the Stereo Output control must be set to "Yes". As with all Nyquist generator plugins, if a track is not selected, Audacity will create a mono track and attempt to place the generated sound into that track. If Stereo Output is set to yes and a stereo track is not selected the plugin will return the error message: "Nyquist returned too many audio channels."

    2KB
    Noiseband.ny
    Open
    Download link
    431KB
    narrowband_noise.wav
    Open
    Narrowband noise audio file

    Constant or fade out: [0=constant volume or 1=fade out, default = constant]

  • MIDI or frequency: [0=MIDI 1=frequency, default = MIDI] - choose whether to generate tone with reference to a MIDI note number or a frequency. Note: Middle C = MIDI note 60, A above Middle C (440 Hz) = MIDI note 69.

  • MIDI note: [16 - 127, default = 69] - You can use non-integer values here (such as 60.75)

  • Frequency: [20 - 20000 Hz, default = 440]

  • David R.Sky
     (setq mysound (noise 10))
     (lp mysound (pwl 0 5000 10 100 10))
    904B
    tuning.ny
    Open
    Download link
    141KB
    tuning_fork.wav
    Open
    Tuning fork audio sample
    David R.Sky
    Number of repeated randomized sequences:
    [0 - 8, default 0]
  • Overall transpose value: [(default 0), then for successive measures (default 0 0 5 5 0 0 -5 -5)]

  • Sequences to generate: [1 - 96, default 4]

  • 1st Semitone, volume, pan value[s]: [default (0 1 0) (4 .5 .2) (7 .5 .8) (2 1 .5)]

  • 2nd SVP value[s]: [default (12 .5 .8) (7 .5 .2) (4 1 1) r]

  • 3rd, 4th. 5th and 6th SVP value[s]: [filled in by user]

  • David R.Sky
    35KB
    sequencer1.mp3
    Open
    Download example audio file
    49KB
    sequencer2.mp3
    Open
    Download example audio file
    57KB
    sequencer3.mp3
    Open
    Download example audio file

    VST3 (C++) The industry standard for plugins. Widely supported across Audacity, Musescore and most DAWs. Documentation: https://steinbergmedia.github.io/vst3_doc/vstsdk/index.html

  • LV2 (C, C++, other C-compatible languages) The Linux plugin standard. Widely supported across open source software. Documentation: https://lv2plug.in/book/

  • Vamp (C++, Python) An easy-to-develop-for framework for audio analyzers. Documentation: https://www.vamp-plugins.org/develop.html

  • Additionally, LADSPA, VST2.4 and Audio Units are supported. LADSPA and VST2.4 are the predecessor to LV2 and VST3, respectively, and thus fairly outdated. Audio Units are only available on macOS.

    Further, Audacity has modules, which allow extending Audacity beyond just editing audio. It is somewhat experimental and not yet documented.

    Scripts

    Audacity supports the following scripting formats:

    • mod-script-pipe (Python, Perl) A module that exposes a named pipe to which commands can be sent. Documentation: https://manual.audacityteam.org/man/scripting.html

    • Macros You can use Audacity's macros feature to chain effects and actions together. This can be exported as a file. Documentation: https://manual.audacityteam.org/man/macros.html

    If you have found a macro or script which you find universally applicable, you can share it in the scripts section.

    Creating your own Nyquist Plugins
    pack
    Generates random sine waves. The generated tones have random frequencies, attack and decay times.

    Parameters:

    1. Duration: [1 - 30 seconds, default 20]

    2. Density: [1 - 100 generated tones, default 60]

    3. Floor: [20 - 1000 Hz, default 300] - Lowest frequency of tones

    4. Ceiling: [20 - 1000 Hz, default 600] - Highest frequency of tones

    SQ1 Generator Sequencer

    Algorithmic generator sequencer number 1.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Algorithmic generator sequencer number 1. Note also the Audio Selection Sequencer 2 on the Effect Plugins page which sequences pre-existing audio samples. The sq1 sequencer generates complex sequences of tones by using the sum of three square-wave low frequency oscillators to frequency-modulate two oscillators. The oscillators output one of four waves (sine, tri, square and saw) and may be frequency adjusted relative to each other. The wave tables are not band-limited so aliasing will result for sufficiently high frequencies. There is also an overall three-stage amplitude envelope.

    Parameters:

    1. Center: [0 - 10000 Hz, default 440] - the unmodulated carrier frequency

    2. Detune: [0.25 - 4.00, default 1.01] - the frequency of oscillator 2 relative to oscillator 1

    3. Wave: [0=sine, 1=tri (default), 2=square, 3=saw]. Wave shape for both oscillators

    4. Attack: [0 - 10 seconds, default 1]

    5. Sustain: [0 - 10 seconds, default 1]

    6. Decay: [0 - 10 seconds, default 1]

    7. f1: Frequency of LFO 1

    8. a1: Amplitude of LFO 1 - LFO amplitudes are calibrated in Hz indicating the corresponding frequency shift in the audio oscillators.

    9. f2: Frequency of LFO 2

    10. a2: Amplitude of LFO 2

    11. f3: Frequency of LFO 3

    12. a3: Amplitude of LFO 3

    Note that the three LFOs are interchangeable.

    2KB
    rndtone.ny
    Open
    Download link
    234KB
    rndtone.wav
    Open
    2KB
    sq1.ny
    Open
    Download link
    141KB
    sq1_generator_sequencer.wav
    Open
    SQ1 Generator Sequencer

    Adds high frequency harmonics to brighten very dull recordings that don't respond to Equalization. On already good recordings, you can add a little extra "sparkle" or "air". The harmonics are generated by soft-clipping the high frequency band as in a diode limiter, then recombining this signal with the original.

    Parameters:

    1. Enhancer Crossover Frequency: [2000 to 4500 Hz - default=3200] - lower this for very dull sources, or increase it to add only very slight or subtle high frequency harmonics.

    2. Enhancer Drive: [-10 to 10 dB - default = 0] - increase this to generate more harmonics and vice versa.

    3. Harmonic Generator Mode: [Even order,Odd order - default = Even] - generates even harmonics or odd harmonics. Even harmonics tend to be less harsh.

    4. Enhancer Noise Gate Threshold: [-40 -16 dB - default = -28] - increase this to prevent adding un-necessary noise in quieter recordings.

    5. Enhancer Mix Level: [-26 to +6 dB - default = -10] - how much of the generated harmonics are mixed into the original audio.

    6. Output: [Mix (Normal),Effect Only,Effect Level - default = Mix] - the two "effect" modes let you see and hear the generated harmonics on their own. Use "Effect Level" specifically to test if the Enhancer Drive level is set correctly. Edit > Undo and run Harmonic Enhancer in Mix (Normal) mode to apply the effect.

    Tape Saturation Limiter

    A tape saturation simulation effect.

    Details

    Author: Jvo Studer

    A tape saturation simulation effect. When used as intended this plugin enhances the apparent loudness of an audio track, adding just a little controlled distortion, similar to the effect of recording on a tape-based recorder with a "hot" signal. It is based on a soft clipping limiter but also "shapes" the high frequency response. The effect is not calibrated for precise modelling of a real tape recorder, but nevertheless should be capable of producing a similar tonal character.

    1. Saturation threshold: [-6 to -1 dB. Default = -3 dB]. The level at which the soft clipping begins.

    2. Limiting ratio: [1 (soft) to 4 (hard). Default 2]. The "hardness" of the clipping. High values will tend to create a more harsh sound.

    3. High freq. saturation crossover: [2000 to 9000 Hz. Default = 4500 Hz)] The crossover frequency where high frequency signals are limited earlier than low frequency signals.

    4. High freq. saturation reduction: [-8 to -1 dB. Default = -5 dB] Sets by what amount the limiting of high frequency signals exceeds that of low frequency signals. The more negative this setting, the more that high frequencies will be shaped.

    5. Auto make-up gain: [(choice) Off or On. Default = Off] Applies amplification after processing to make up for the lowering of the peak level produced by the effect.

    It is recommended to Normalize the audio track to 0 dB before applying this effect so that the Saturation threshold can be conveniently set to a predictable level.

    Equalization
    3KB
    Enhancer.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    3KB
    Tapesat.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
     exec remprop(quote(*SCRATCH*), quote(effectx)) ;; in SAL
     (remprop '*SCRATCH* 'effectx) ;; in LISP
     exec remprop(quote(*SCRATCH*), quote(effectx)) ;; in SAL
     (remprop '*SCRATCH* 'effectx) ;; in LISP

    To access the audio data from the left channel we can use:

    To access the audio data from the right channel we can use:

    As described in the previous tutorial we can amplify a sound using the (scale) function. For a mono track if we want to halve the amplitude of the sound we simply type

    If we use this instruction on a stereo track the function is applied to each element of '*track*' in turn, so both channels are amplified to half of their original amplitude. However if we want to access the channels individually then we also need to know how to send two different sounds back to the same track in Audacity.

    To send two different sounds to a stereo track in Audacity we must create an array with two elements. The first element will contain the <sound>{=html} for the left channel and the second element will contain the sound for the right channel. The easiest way to do this is to use the vector function.

    <left channel>and <right channel> will be the sounds that we are sending from Nyquist.

    To try this out we will amplify the left channel only of a stereo track.

    1. Open a short stereo track.

    2. From the Effect menu select "Nyquist Prompt" and enter the following code:

    Notice that the two elements are within the ellipses of the "vector" function.

    The 0th element in this array is the original left channel (aref *track* 0) that has been scaled [amplified] by 2. This will be the new left channel. The next element in this array is the original right channel (aref *track* 1) which is sent back unaltered as the new right channel.

    Instead of using the function (scale) we could use the function mult. This is virtually identical to using the function scale except that we do not need to specify the multiplication factor first. (mult 2.0 *track*) is identical to (mult *track* 2.0).

    For our second example we will amplify the left channel to half of its original amplitude and the right channel to double its original amplitude:

    (aref)
    (aref *track* 0)
    (aref *track* 1)
    (scale 0.5 *track*)
    (vector <left channel> <right channel>)
    (vector
       (scale 2.0 (aref *track* 0))
       (aref *track* 1)
    )
    (vector
       (mult (aref *track* 0) 0.5)
       (mult (aref *track* 1) 2.0))
  • Compressor 4 : Dynamics processor

  • Dual VCF : non-linear filters

  • Enhancer : preset filter eq

  • Equalizer 4: Digital remasterd Anolog dynamic eq

  • Flowtones : synthesizer

  • GonioMeter : Stereo Image Analyzer

  • MBC : Multiband Compression and saturation

  • Morphit : Headphones correction and personalization

  • ReelBus 4 : Magnetic tape recording, echo and flanger simulator

  • Reverb 4 : Lush reverberation and shimmer

  • Sibalance 4 : Spectral de-esser and harshness remover

  • Spectogram : Insightful time and frequency visualization

  • VoicePitcher 4 : Vocal doubling, pitch shifting and freezing effect

  • MuseFX can be downloaded from the "Effects" tab in the Muse Hub

    MuseFX Master

    An easy to use mastering plugin. Part of the Muse FX pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    ReaFIR

    A multi-purpose dynamics processor, can be used for EQ, compressor, gate and noise reduction purposes. Part of ReaPlugs.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information from the vendor:

    • FFT based dynamics processor

    • Supports FFT sizes of 128-32768

    • Useful in/out frequency response display

    • Supports defining response curves both using any number of points, or freehand mouse

    • EQ - can be used as a linear phase mastering EQ, or as a super-effective surgical EQ

    • Compressor - can compress at a fixed ratio with a per-band threshold

    • Gate - can gate with per-band threshold

    • Subtract - can build noise profiles and subtract noise from the signal

    MCompressor

    A powerful compressor with custom processing shape, part of the MFreeFXBundle pack

    Details

    MCompressor provides refined compression. It features an adjustable compression shape, giving you the power to create dynamic sound effects, and a range of up-sampling options for a crystal clear sound.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

    • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

    • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channelds surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

    • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

    • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

    See the for installation instructions.

    ReaXcomp

    A multi-band compressor effect, part of ReaPlugs.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information From the vendor:

    • Unlimited band compressor

    • Great metering per band

    • Fantastic sounding filters

    • Solo current band mode

    • Tons of controls per band (ratio, threshold, knee, attack, release, makeup, program dependent release, feedback detector, RMS size)

    • Adjusting bands in graph is easy (modifiers to change ratio, gain, etc)

    See also

    • Nyquist Dynamics Processing effects

    • Nyquist Amplify, Mix and Pan Effects

    Muse FX
    Plugins must work in the current version of Audacity.
  • Paid plugins are not allowed at this point.

  • Requirements for Entries

    Generally, a plugin entry should look like this:

    ###################################################

    Name of Plugin

    A short description of what the plugin is good for.

    Details

    Additional info, such as developer name, license and copyright info, a short "how to use" section or link to the documentation page, or a screenshot of the plugin - preferably of it working withing Audacity.

    [screenshot, if applicable]

    #####################################################

    Note: When editing through pull requests on Github, note that Gitbook uses additional formatting tags than available in standard-markdown, so your preview might not match what'll be shown to users eventually.

    https://www.audacityteam.org/gitbook-plugins
    works the same as described in the user guides section
    plugins branch on audacity support

    Pitch and Tempo plugins

    Delay and Reverb plugins

    Distortion plugins

    Dynamics Processing plugins

    Filter plugins

    Equalizer plugins

    Modulation plugins

    Noise Removal and Repair plugins

    Plugin Suites

    Recommended: MuseFX

    AI plugins

    MuseFX
    FFmpeg
    contributing instructions
    Nyquist programming language
    Nyquist Prompt
    LV2
    system LV2 location
    Audio Unit
    system plugin directories
    Hitsquad
    Windows
    Mac
    KVR Audio
    Windows
    Mac
    plugins4free
    Noise Suppression
    Music Generation and continuation
    Whisper Transcription
    whisper.cpp
    https://www.nvidia.com/en-gb/geforce/guides/broadcast-app-setup-guide/

    Loudness compliance checks

    Mastering loudness for various streaming services

    Various streaming platforms and other institutions expect content to have a certain range for peaks, RMS, LUFS, noise floor or a combination of the aforementioned. These plugins provide the relevant checks for the platforms in question.

    Service
    ACX-Check.ny

    ACX, Audible

    amazon.ny

    Amazon Music, Alexa

    apple.ny

    Apple Music

    Details

    Authors: Will McCown, Steve Daulton, Philip Collier

    Original ACX plugin by Will McCown. Modifications for services other than ACX by Philip Collier.

    Displayed Results

    • Peak level Maximum peak level in the selection

    Volume Basics

    This page explains how to use Nyquist to change the volume of Audacity tracks in different ways.

    Note: All [comments] and [explanations] are written in square brackets, so they cannot be confused with (Lisp code).

    LISP vs SAL

    SAL is a new alternative syntax to LISP. Although Nyquist is based on the LISP programming language, you can write almost any Nyquist program in SAL. Most people prefer SAL syntax to LISP syntax because SAL is a bit more like popular programming languages that include Java, C, and Python.

    You can specify which one you're using with the respective :

    You can only use one or the other in your script.

    Changing the Volume of an Audacity Track

    To change the volume of an Audacity track with Nyquist, the easiest way is to use the Nyquist function:

    scale(number, sound)

    The "scale" function multiplies the amplitude [volume] of the "sound" by the given "number". A number of 0.5 will make the sound become only half as loud as before, while a number of 2 will make the sound become double as loud as before.

    Example:

    See for an explanation how the Nyquist prompt works.

    • To run this example in the Nyquist Prompt, ensure that "Use legacy (version 3) syntax" is not selected.

    • For more information about the *track* keyword, refer to the

    1. Create an audio track with some audio [eg a short recording]

    2. Now click Tools > Nyquist Prompt. A window with a text field will appear where you can type in:

    Important: Do not forget to type the parentheses. The parentheses are part of the Lisp language Nyquist is based on. Without the parentheses the Nyquist Lisp interpreter will not be able to understand your code.

    Important: Do not forget to type the parens and comma. These are part of the SAL language.

    After clicking "OK" in the "Nyquist Prompt" window the "scale" function will take the Audacity sound and return a "scaled-down" sound with half the volume to Audacity. The result of the last computation of the Nyquist code always gets automatically returned to Audacity.

    If you try "scale" with big numbers you will notice that you can return sounds with volumes taller than the Audacity track which will sound very distorted if you play them afterwards in Audacity. So an important lesson to learn is that Nyquist gives you the freedom to do whatever you want but it's now on you to take care that the result will still sound good afterwards.

    An alternative command for amplifying a sound is the command.

    MULT may be used with numbers, sounds or multi-channel sounds. When using MULT with a sound and a number, each sample value in the selected sound is multiplied by the number, which is essentially the same as using the SCALE command.

    Modulation

    MuseFX Chorus

    An easy to use chorus effect. Part of the Muse FX pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    MuseFX Rotary

    An easy to use Rotary/Leslie effect. Part of the pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    Valhalla Space Modulator

    A modulator with 11 different algorithms.

    Details

    © 2022 VALHALLA DSP, LLC.

    COMPATIBILITY:

    • WINDOWS: WINDOWS 7/8/10

    • PLUGIN FORMATS: 64-BIT VST2.4/VST3/AAX

    MRingModulator

    Classic two oscillators ring-modulation effect, part of the pack

    Details

    MRingModulator performs classic ring-modulation effects using one or two oscillators. With a clean interface that gives easy access to more advanced controls like our adjustable phase difference and shape features, including editable custom waveforms and harmonics.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    See also

    • Nyquist

    Special Effect Generators

    Binaural Tones with Surf 2

    A sine tone of one constant frequency is generated in the left channel of a stereo track, and a series of changing tones of slightly different frequencies are generated in the right.

    Details

    RMS level The RMS level of the selected audio.

  • Noise floor The RMS level of the quietest 500 milliseconds in the selection

  • Warnings: (These are only displayed when applicable.)

  • Limitations

    • These tools provide useful guidance, but they do not guarantee that the services in question will reject or modify the uploaded sounds anyway. This particularly goes for ACX, which has additional quality standards not measured by this tool.

    • The Noise Floor measurement is taken from the quietest half second of audio found in the selection. If one part of the selection is quieter than the rest, you will get a false value. Also note that ACX requires a very quiet noise floor to be present.

    • Minimum selection length is 1/2 second.

    • Maximum selection length is about 2.14 billion samples (13.5 hours at a sample rate of 44100 Hz)

    Also beware that some noise sources are worse than others, and noise such as the 1000 Hz whine found in some USB audio interfaces may result in an ACX rejection even though it is below the -60 dBFS noise floor requirement.

    Club Play

    Deezer

    Netflix

    (Podcasts)

    Sony related

    Soundcloud

    Spotify

    Spotify

    Tidal

    YouTube

    clubplay.ny
    deezer.ny
    netflix.ny
    PodCheck.ny
    sony.ny
    soundcloud.ny
    spotify.ny
    spotify-loud.ny
    tidal.ny
    youtube.ny
    Author: David R.Sky

    A sine tone of one constant frequency is generated in the left channel of a stereo track, and a series of changing tones of slightly different frequencies are generated in the right. The differences between the left- and right-channel frequencies are termed "beat frequencies". In addition, a stereo "surf" noise is generated based on pink noise. This is a lower-frequency "rushing" sound compared with "hissing" white noise.

    Parameters:

    1. Left channel tone frequency: [50 - 1000 Hz, default 100].

    2. Beat frequency [Hz], duration [minutes], time to change to next beat frequency [minutes]: There are six of these edit fields in which you may enter up to three indicated values, separated by a space. The first of these edit fields has default values of 17.5 0.25 0.25 and must contain some non-zero value for duration. If you enter only a single value into any of the subsequent fields, the duration of that beat frequency will be zero. If you leave any of these edit fields blank they will be ignored. In the sixth field you may enter a final beat frequency and duration of that frequency.

    3. Adjust total time: [1 - 60 minutes, default = 0 (no adjustment)].

    4. Fade-in and fade-out times: [0 - 120 seconds, default 10]

    5. Stereo surf frequency: [0 - 2 Hz, default 0.1] - If this setting is above zero, the surf sound will be panned back and forth somewhere between the left and right audio channels at the specified frequency, how far depending on the sixth variable:

    6. Stereo surf spread: [0 - 100 percent, default 80] - The larger this number, the further the surf sound will move away from the center pan position (0% results in the surf sound remaining in the center).

    7. Tone to surf volume ratio: [0 - 100 percent, default 70] - adjusts the relative volume of the tones and surf sound. 0 = no tone (only surf) and 100 = no surf (only tone).

    Surf-LFO

    An LFO surf generator.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    LFO Surf generator. A signal whose frequency is generally below the human ear's ability to hear as a tone, usually 20 cycles per second [Hz]. Generates mono or stereo surf which sweeps between a lower and upper filter frequency. Stereo surf also sweeps back-and-forth somewhere between the left and right audio channels. To generate stereo surf, first open a new stereo track in Audacity

    Parameters:

    1. Mono or stereo surf: [1=mono 2=stereo] Mono surf is heard only in the center between the two speakers, or in the middle of your head when wearing headphones. Stereo surf sweeps back-and-forth somewhere between the two audio channels, depending on the next setting, Stereo Spread.

    2. Stereo spread: [stereo only: percent]The larger this value, the more widely the stereo surf will move back-and-forth between the left and right audio channels. When this value is above zero, the deeper section of the surf sweep will be heard more in the left channel; below zero, the deeper section of the surf sweep will be heard more in the right channel.

    3. Fade-in and fade-out times: [seconds]To smoothly fade in and fade out the volume at the start and end of the surf.

    4. Surf duration: [minutes] (up to 60)

    5. Surf type: [0=white noise 1=pink noise]White noise is more of a "hissing" sound, whereas pink noise is a lower "rushing" sound. Technically, white noise is "equal energy per frequency", whereas pink noise is "equal energy per octave"

    6. Surf sweep frequency: [Hz]Sets how slow or fast the surf sweeps between the lower and upper filter frequencies, and the left and right channels [for stereo surf].

    7. Lower filter frequency: [Hz] 8. Upper filter frequency: [Hz] Both the above determine how low and how high the low-pass filter sweeps the surf noise.

    9. Bass frequency to boost: [Hz]You can boost the volume of frequencies of the surf sound below this setting, to get a deeper-sounding surf. Somewhat equivalent to the bass knob on your stereo.

    10. Bass boost : [dB]Sets how much to boost the above bass frequency. 0 dB means no boost, 6 dB means double the amplitude of the bass frequency, and so on.\

    Surf-Oxy

    A surf generator inspired by Jean-Michel Jarre's album Oxygene.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Jean-Michel Jarre put out a hauntingly beautiful electronic album in 1976, Oxygene. One section of this album had a repeating surf sound: a sweep from the right to the left audio channel, a pause, and then a deep crash in the right channel. After another pause, this cycle repeated many times. Very relaxing to listen to. This sound generator plugin emulates that surf cycle, in either mono or stereo.

    Start a new session of Audacity. To generate stereo surf, first open a blank stereo track

    Parameters:

    1. Surf output: [1=mono 2=stereo]To generate mono or stereo Oxygene surf.

    2. Stereo spread: [stereo only - percent]If you've chosen to generate stereo Oxygene surf, this setting will determine how widely the surf sweeps away from the center pan position. From +100 percent to -100 percent. Positive values make the sweep section go from the right to the left, with the crash in the right. Negative values reverse this pattern.

    3. Fade-in and fade-out times: [seconds]Time to fade in and fade out the volume at the start and end of the surf, if you wish.

    4. **Number of Oxygene surf cycles:**How many Oxygene surf cycles to generate.

    5. Surf type: [0=white noise 1=pink noise]White noise is a higher-frequency "hissing", whereas pink noise is a lower-frequency "rushing" sound.

    6. Sweep starting filter frequency: [Hz]

    7. Sweep ending filter frequency: [Hz]The above two parameters set the starting and ending frequencies for the low-pass filter to sweep the sweep portion of Oxygene surf. A low-pass filter allows frequencies below a certain value to pass, while frequencies above that value are attenuated, or reduced in volume.

    8. Sweep duration: [seconds]This sets how slow or fast the sweep portion of Oxygene surf takes.

    9. Post-sweep silence duration: [seconds]Duration of the silence after the sweep.

    10. Crash filter frequency: [Hz]The low-pass filter frequency of the crash.

    11. Crash bass frequency boost: [dB]How much to increase the volume of the above filter frequency and below. 0 dB means no boost, 6 dB means double the amplitude of this bass frequency, and so on.

    12. Post-crash silence duration: [seconds]How much silence before the Oxygene surf cycle repeats.

    16KB
    bitone2.ny
    Open
    Download link
    678KB
    bitone2.wav
    Open
    Binaural tones with Surf 2 audio file
    7KB
    surf-lfo.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1MB
    surf-lfo.wav
    Open
    Surf (LFO) audio file
    9KB
    surf-oxy.ny
    Open
    Download link
    986KB
    surf-oxy.wav
    Open
    Surf (Oxygene) audio file
    codetype header
    SCALE
    Prompt Basics
    Plugin Reference
    MULT
    (scale number sound)
    ;codetype lisp
    ;codetype sal
    (scale 0.5 *track*)
    return scale(0.5, *track*)
    (mult *track* 0.5)
    return mult(*track*, 0.5)

    MAC: OSX 10.8/10.9/10.10/10.11, MACOS 10.12/10.13/10.14/10.15, MACOS 11 BIG SUR

  • PLUGIN FORMATS: 64-BIT VST2.4/VST3/AAX/AU

  • \

    Information from the vendor: https://valhalladsp.com/shop/modulation/valhalla-space-modulator/

    Earth Shattering Kaboom.

    ValhallaSpaceModulator is our take on flanging.

    Eleven algorithms allow you to get through-zero flanging, barberpole flanging, detuning, doubling, strange echoes, reverbs, and all sorts of effects that defy description.

    Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    Modulation Effects
    Muse FX
    MFreeFXBundle
    pack

    Distortion

    MBitFun

    A distortion tool, part of the MFreeFXBundle pack

    Details

    MBitFun is a serious tool for extreme distortion lovers. It converts the audio into limited fixed-point precision form, from a 1 single bit up to 16 bits per sample, and lets you access each bit, applying several operations.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

    • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

    See the for installation instructions.

    MFreqShifter

    A frequency shifter plugin, part of the pack

    Details

    MFreqShifter is an extremely versatile frequency shifter. Unlike pitch-shifters it doesn't keep harmonic relationships and can provide everything from mild stereo expansion to complete sonic destruction.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    MSaturator

    A tube-like saturation effect, part of the pack

    Details

    MSaturator performs smooth saturation in a definitive tube-like way improving the clarity of the resulting sound. Its excellent sound quality makes it flexible enough to double as a distortion module for guitars and other instruments.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    MWaveFolder

    An analog-inspired distortion effect, part of the pack

    Details

    MWaveFolder is an analog-inspired distortion module with a unique character ranging from mild harmonic enhancement to complete sound destruction.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    MWaveShaper

    A wave-shaping effect, part of the pack

    Details

    MWaveShaper goes beyond a traditional wave-shaping plugin. Unlike the conventional approach of providing a few predefined patterns, MWaveShaper lets you construct your own shape creating a much greater range and control over your sound.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    See also

    • Nyquist

    Instrument Sound Generators

    Fire and Explosion sounds

    Emulates a Korg MS-10 synthesizer patch.

    5KB
    Firex.ny
    Open
    Download link
    141KB
    fire_explosion.wav
    Open
    Fire and explosions audio file
    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Emulates a Korg MS-10 synthesizer patch.

    Parameters:

    1. Audio type: [0=fire 1=explosion, default=1]

    2. Sound duration: [0.1 to 60 seconds, default=3]

    3. Attack time: [0 to 500 milliseconds, default=50]

    4. Explosion decay time:

    KLSTRBAS

    KLSTRBAS (for "cluster bass") generates dense sounds by combining several waveforms with a fixed frequency ratio between them.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    KLSTRBAS (for "cluster bass") generates dense sounds by combining several waveforms with a fixed frequency ratio between them. Early Roland drum machines created cymbal sound in part by combining multiple square waves with non-integral frequency ratios. The combined signal was then high-pass filtered to produce a very dense cluster of high frequency harmonics. The genesis of KLSTRBAS was a failed attempt to create cymbal sounds using this technique.

    Parameters:

    1. MIDI key: [0 - 127, default 45]

    Pluck (Hz)

    Pluck generates a synthesized pluck tone with abrupt or gradual fade-out.

    Details

    Author: and Steve Daulton.

    Pluck generates a synthesized pluck tone with abrupt or gradual fade-out. The sound is the same as the that is shipped with Audacity, except that the pitch of the note is determined by entering a frequency in Hz (cycles per second) rather than a MIDI note.

    Parameters:

    1. Pluck frequency (Hz): [10 to 10000, default 261.626] The default frequency is equivalent to MIDI note 60.

    Risset Bell

    Simulates a realistic bell tone based on the pioneering work of Jean Claude Risset.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Simulates a realistic bell tone based on the pioneering work of Jean Claude Risset. This plugin is an adaptation of a demonstration lisp file by Pedro Jose Morales contained in the standard Nyquist distribution.

    Parameters:

    1. MIDI key: [0 - 127, default 72]

    Prompt Basics

    This page explains how to use the Audacity Nyquist Prompt to test-run Nyquist code snippets.

    Setting up

    The Audacity Nyquist prompt appears in Audacity's "Tools" menu.

    For testing generate-type commands in Nyquist, you can use the Generate Prompt plugin instead.

    Load a Sound File

    Sound files are imported into Audacity via: File > Import > Audio or the shortcut CTRL + SHIFT + I.

    If you have no pre-existing sound files to work with, you can create your own mono or stereo tracks via the Audacity "Generate" menu.

    The Nyquist Prompt

    Select the track(s) and click Tools > Nyquist Prompt.

    The Nyquist Prompt appears like this:

    Hello, world!

    Simply enter the code below and press Apply to receive a "hello world" prompt:

    The programming language used above is Lisp. The Nyquist prompt automatically assumes you're using Lisp if the first character is an (. If it isn't, the prompt assumes you are writing SAL, which is more similar to C-like syntax. If you prefer SAL, a "hello world" program looks like this:

    The Nyquist Debugger

    The prompt also comes with a debug button. It shows you various warnings and non-fatal errors after the program finished. For example, if you forget the quotation marks around "hello world", just hitting apply will just do nothing, whereas hitting debug will tell you where you went wrong:

    Basic Nyquist Commands

    The current Nyquist manual is here: .

    A useful index of Nyquist commands is here:

    Audacity uses the *TRACK* variable to reference the current audio file/selection. Thus, you can use basic commands such as mult or sum with *track* and the Nyquist prompt will replace the file/selection with the result (or as Audacity calls it, "returned audio").

    Note: Prior to version 4 syntax, the vaiable S was used instead of *TRACK*. You may encounter this in some old plugins or old documentation. The old syntax is obsolete and should not be used in new code

    Simple Examples

    Note: These examples are focused upon using Audacity to manipulate digital signals (clearly Audacity is better suited to audio, but features such as Nyquist can open many other uses). For those interested, the signal used is an from a remote control.

    Applying a DC offset to a signal

    Type the following into the Nyquist Prompt (using LISP syntax): (sum *track* 1) ``Or type the following equivalent SAL command: return *track* + 1

    The whole signal has now moved up to above zero.

    Modulating with a carrier frequency

    To multiply a signal with a generated carrier signal, you can use the following commands:

    The (hzosc 19000) produces 19kHz sine wave carrier.

    The (osc-pulse 19000 0) produces 19kHz square wave carrier (note the 0 is the bias or 50/50 duty cycle, -1 to 1 = 0%-100% pulse-width ). Applying the 19kHz square wave carrier obtains this result.

    The top and bottoms of the signal can then be clipped using the Hard Limiter option from the effects menu (0dB limit and Wet level 1) if required.

    The above examples show how you can use the many Nyquist commands to perform basic signal processing without using scripts.

    Note: Unfortunately, this isn't the end of the road for this sample; it is near, but the curved "head/tail" of the signal causes a problem for the digital signal being produced [and it was also upside-down, too...]. This will hopefully form the basis of some more complex examples, since I shall need to use Nyquist to:

    1. Find the zero crossing points

    2. Then only apply the carrier frequency to those regions above zero. Or find another suitable command...

    Property List Tutorial

    Variables and Property Lists

    In general terms, a variable is a symbol which contains a value. The symbol can be any valid name, and its value may be changed (hence "variable"). In Nyquist, the value may be of any data type (for example, a number, a character, or even a sound) and may be changed from one data type to another. Unlike some programming languages, variables do not need to be declared before use - they can just be set, and then they exist.

    In addition to the value of the variable, one or more "properties" may also be attached to the symbol. Each "property" has a name and a value. The properties are known collectively as the symbol's "property list".

    Setting the value of a symbol "binds" the value to the symbol. A symbol that has no value (not even "nil") is said to be "unbound".

    In addition to the value of a symbol, we can also attach properties. This is a way of associating a list of items, each with their own value, to a single variable. Each item is called a key or indicator, and we can give each key a value. This list of items is called a "property list" (or plist for short).

    To get the value of a property, we use the GET command.

    When getting the value of a property, we do NOT want to evaluate either the variable (symbol) or the key symbol, so we must "quote" both symbols to prevent evaluation.

    Examples

    The following examples may be run in the .

    For a full list of global properties, see the .

    *TRACK* NAME Property

    When the type of a plugin is process or analyze, Audacity sets the value of *TRACK* to the currently selected audio, and sets a lists of properties related to that track. The plugin processes one track at a time in sequence, and the *TRACK* variable is set each time for the track that is being processed.

    The value of *TRACK* provides direct access to the selected audio, and its property list provides access to other properties of the track. The NAME property provides the name of the Audacity track that is currently being processed. To access the value of the NAME property, we use the command.

    The GET command returns the value of the property (the name of the track), which may be assigned to another variable and used elsewhere in the code. For example, to print a pretty message:

    Although we can change the value of the NAME property (using ), doing so will NOT change the name of the Audacity track. The value of the NAME property is only a copy of the track name, created by Audacity when the plugin runs. If required, the name of the track could be changed using the scripting command . More generally, modifying a *TRACK* property does not modify the track.

    See also in the XLisp manual.

    *TRACK* CLIPS Property

    This property contains a list of start and end times of each audio clip in the track. This property is more likely to find uses in than in standard Nyquist plugins. Note that this property refers to the entire selected track, and not only the selected portion of the track.

    *TRACK* CLIPS data for mono tracks

    For mono tracks, the CLIPS property is a list, containing a two element list for each clip in the selected track. A mono track with two audio clips will look like ((s1 e1)(s2 e2)) where s1 and s2 to are the start times of the two clips, and e1 and e2 are the end times.

    This code snippet will print the start and end times of the first audio clip in a mono track:

    It is important to remember that Nyquist sees the start of the current selection as "time=zero". Thus if we wish to actual track times in Nyquist, we must offset the times by the start time of the current selection. We can create a point label at time=0 with (list (list 0 0 "")), but this is relative to the start of the current selection. If we want to create a label at time=zero as shown in the regardless of where the selection starts, then we must offset the label times by the start time of the selection.

    Fortunately it is easy to find the absolute start time of the selection by using "START" property of the *SELECTION* variable: (get '*selection* 'start). We can create a label at an absolute time (relative to Audacity's Timeline) like this:

    We can now put this all together and create a label for each audio clip in the selected track:

    *TRACK* CLIPS data for stereo tracks

    Just as stereo sounds are represented as an array of sounds, so the track "clip" data for stereo tracks is an array of lists (one list per channel). A stereo track with two audio clips in each channel will look like: #(((s1 e1)(s2 e2))((s3 e3)(s4 e3))) where s1 to s4 to are the start times, and e1 to e4 are the end times.

    This code snippet will print the start and end times of the first audio clip in the left channel of a stereo track:

    In a similar manner to the mono example, we can create a label for each clip in a stereo track:

    Filters

    Filterjam

    A multiband resonant filter.

    Details

    © 2011-2022 AudioThing Ltd.

    Noise Removal and Repair

    MuseFX Noise Gate

    A noise gate. Part of the pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    vinyl2digitalPyPI
    Project page
    Using themes | Audacity Supportsupport.audacityteam.org
    Audacity 3 themesAudacity Forum
    Creating custom themes | Audacity Devaudacity.gitbook.io
    [0 to 500 milliseconds, default=500]
  • Decay down to this level: [1 to 100 %, default=30]

  • Cutoff frequency: [100 to 10000 Hz, default=3800]

  • Filter quality: [Q: 1 to 20, default=10]

  • Bass boost frequency: [10 to 1000 Hz, default=300]

  • Bass boost: [0 to 60 dB, default=30]

  • Clipping amount: [0 to 99 %, default=55]

  • Decay: [0 - 30 whole seconds, default 2]

  • Fractional Decay: [0 - 99 hundredths of a second, default 0] - synth kick drum sounds can be produced by setting Decay time to zero and fractional decay to a low value.

  • Density: [1 - 6, default 4] - Sets the number of component waveforms, defined as four times the density value. Higher densities produce a deeper flange effect but can also cause the sound to go out of tune.

  • Detune: [0 - 99, default 0] {these two parameters affect the relative

  • Flange: [0 - 4, default 2] frequencies of the component waveforms}

  • Wave table: [0=sine 1=tri 2=sqr 3=saw (default}] - type of component waveform. These are not band limited so aliasing may result if either MIDI key or generated frequencies are too high.

  • Technical note: The frequency of each component is determined by the MIDI key number and the detune and flange parameters. Specifically the nth component has a frequency of: p * (1 + d/100 + g)^n where: p is the fundamental frequency determined by the key number, d is the detune amount 0 <= d <= 99, and g is derived by the flange parameter (g = 1/(10^(4-f)) for flange value f)

    Fade-out type [abrupt or gradual, default "abrupt"] Determines how rapidly the pluck sound decays.

  • Duration [seconds]: Specifies the length of the pluck sound. The default is 1.0 second.

  • A table showing the relationship between note names, MIDI note numbers, and frequency (A440 standard tuning) is available HERE.

    Decay: [0 - 30 seconds, default 10]

  • Fractional Decay: [0 - 99 hundredths of a second, default 0]

  • 2KB
    klstrbas.ny
    Open
    Download link
    94KB
    KLSTRBAS.wav
    Open
    Cluster bass audio file
    1KB
    Pluck-hz.ny
    Open
    Download link
    47KB
    pluck_hz.wav
    Open
    Pluck (Hz) audio file
    David R.Sky
    Pluck effect
    2KB
    rbell.ny
    Open
    Download link
    469KB
    risset_bell.wav
    Open
    Risset bell audio file

    Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    pack
    Distortion Effects
    MFreeFXBundle
    MFreeFXBundle
    MFreeFXBundle
    MFreeFXBundle
    Example Domainexample.org
    Download page
    Nyquist Reference Manual
    Nyquist Language reference
    infra red (IR) sample
    Nyquist prompt example
    Original signal before command
    Resulting signal
    resulting waveform
    Nyquist Prompt
    Plugin reference
    GET
    PUTPROP
    SetTrackStatus
    Property List Functions
    Nyquist Macros
    Timeline
    (print "hello world")
    return "hello world"
    ;Lisp input: (print hello world)
    error: unbound variable - HELLO
    if continued: try evaluating symbol again
    1> 
    
    ;Sal input: retun hello world
    >>> parse error: Syntax error.
    >>> in NIL, line 1, col 14.
    
    return hello world 
                 ^
    (mult *track* (hzosc 19000))  ; Lisp
    return *track* * hzosc(19000) ; Sal
    (mult *track* (osc-pulse 19000 0)) ; Lisp
    return *track* * osc-pulse(19000, 0) ; Sal
    LISP
    (get 'varaiable-name 'property-name)
    SAL
    set v = get(quote(varaiable-name ), quote(property-name))
    ;codetype lisp
    (get '*TRACK* 'NAME)
    
    ;codetype sal
    return get(quote(*TRACK*), quote(NAME))
    ;codetype lisp
    (setf track-name (get '*TRACK* 'NAME))
    (format nil "The name of the current track is ~s." track-name)
    (setf track-clips (get '*track* 'clips))
    (print (first track-clips))
    (setf label-time 10) ;the absolute time for the label is at the 10 second mark
    (setf offset (get '*selection* 'start))
    (list (list (- label-time offset)(- label-time offset) ""))
    ;type analyze
    (setf track-clips (get '*track* 'clips))
    (setf start (get '*selection* 'start))
    
    (let (labels) ;initialise "labels" variable with NIL value.
      (dolist (c track-clips labels)
        (setf label
          (list (- (first c) start)
                (- (second c) start)
                ""))
        (push label labels)))
    (setf track-clips (get '*track* 'clips))
    (setf left-channel (aref track-clips 0)) ; the list of clips in the left channel
    (print (first left-channel))
    ;type analyze
    (setf track-clips (get '*track* 'clips))
    (setf start (get '*selection* 'start))
    (setf labels ())  ;an empty list
    
    (defun add-labels (data text)
      (dolist (c data)
        (setf label
          (list (- (first c) start)
                (- (second c) start)
                text))
        (push label labels)))
    
    (multichan-expand #'add-labels track-clips #("Left" "Right"))
    labels ;Reurn labels
    Homepage: https://www.audiothing.net/effects/filterjam/

    Description from the vendor:

    Filterjam is a multi-band resonant filter delivering weird ringmod-like filtered sounds. The input signal is divided into 4 bands that are then summed or multiplied together according to the selected mode. Filterjam can be very harsh or gentle, it can add brightness or depth to synth sounds, but it can also completely mangle acoustic sources.

    Specifications

    • Multi-Band Resonant Filter

    • Oversample up to 16x

    • Lightweight on CPU

    • Preset system with randomizer

    System Requirements

    Windows 7, 8, 10 2GHz CPU, 4 GB RAM VST2, VST3, AAX, CLAP (64-bit)

    OS X 10.9 – macOS 12 2GHz CPU, 4 GB RAM VST2, VST3, AU, AAX, CLAP (64-bit) Universal 2 Binary

    TAL-Filter-2

    A host-synced filter module

    Details

    Description from the vendor

    • Different modulation types: LP 12dB, BP 12dB, HP 12dB, Pan, Volume

    • Super clean SVF filter with diode clipper in the feedback path. Capable of self oscillation.

    • Easy to use spline editor.

    • Stereo offset for modulation when in filter mode.

    • Host sync with different sync options (normal, dotted...)

    • Trigger button sets the modulation position to the start without lose host sync. Can be automated.

    • Legacy Mode: Just for backward compatibility. Please don't use if you create something new.

    • File based presets.

    • MIDI NoteOn trigger option.

    Filterstep

    A modern motion filter plugin

    Details

    Description from the vendor

    • Generate Filter Grooves in real-time

    • Syncs to Host tempo

    • Wet/Dry mix control

    • MIDI Controllable

    • Infinity Mode

    • Quick Load presets

    • Instant/Tap Bypass for live performance

    • Quantization settings

    • Motion selector

    • Customizable Sequence Range

    MBandPass

    A filter with slopes up to 120dB/oct, part of the MFreeFXBundle pack

    Details
    • Advanced GUI

    • Synchronization to host tempo

    • Adjustable oscillator shape technology

    • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

    • Safety limiter

    • Modulators

    • Multiparameters

    • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

    • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

    • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

    • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

    See the for download page.

    MComb

    A multi-comb filter, part of the MFreeFXBundle pack

    Details
    • Advanced GUI

    • Sinc interpolation

    • Adjustable up-sampling 1x - 1024x

    • Adjustable oscillator shape technology

    • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

    • Safety limiter

    • Modulators

    • Multiparameters

    • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

    • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

    • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

    • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

    See the for download page.

    See also

    • Nyquist Filters and EQ effects

    A noise gate keeps noise in quiet parts out while not affecting the audio you want at all.

    MuseFX De-Ess

    An easy to use de-esser. Part of the Muse FX pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    Has presets for female and male voices, harshness, sibilance, steel guitar and strings rosin.

    ReaFIR

    A multi-purpose dynamics processor, can be used for EQ, compressor, gate and noise reduction purposes. Part of ReaPlugs.

    Hint: ReaFIR in Subtract mode can be used to remove noise.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information from the vendor:

    • FFT based dynamics processor

    • Supports FFT sizes of 128-32768

    • Useful in/out frequency response display

    • Supports defining response curves both using any number of points, or freehand mouse

    • EQ - can be used as a linear phase mastering EQ, or as a super-effective surgical EQ

    • Compressor - can compress at a fixed ratio with a per-band threshold

    • Gate - can gate with per-band threshold

    • Subtract - can build noise profiles and subtract noise from the signal

    ReaGate

    A noise gate effect, part of ReaPlugs.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information From the vendor:

    • Ultra-configurable gate

    • Sidechain filters, sidechain input

    • Lookahead for pre-open

    • Hold control

    • Hysteresis control

    • Variable RMS size

    • Can send MIDI events on gate open/close

    • Wet/dry mix, noise mix (can add noise when gate is open)

    RNNoise suppression for voice

    Removes most sounds that aren't speech.

    This plugin only works with a 48000Hz sample rate. You can change the project sample rate in Audio Setup -> Audio Settings.

    NVIDIA Broadcast

    A virtual device that sits between your microphone and Audacity and other programs which allows you to use an AI denoiser.

    Caution: NVIDIA Broadcast only works on Windows machines with a NVIDIA RTX GPU.

    Further, it only works on spoken word content; musical content is treated as noise and filtered out.

    Details

    Copyright © 2022 NVIDIA Corporation

    Requires NVIDIA GeForce RTX 2060, Quadro RTX 3000, TITAN RTX or higher

    Full setup guide: https://www.nvidia.com/en-gb/geforce/guides/broadcast-app-setup-guide/

    Technically, NVIDIA Broadcast isn't a plugin but a virtual device. You will find it in Audacity's audio settings as an input. It does not show up in the Plugin Manager.

    See also

    • Dynamics Processing - Dynamics processors can often be used for noise reduction purposes

    Muse FX
    NVIDIA Broadcast: The Ultimate AI-Powered Voice and Video AppNVIDIA
    Download page
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    Demos & Downloads - Valhalla DSPValhalla DSP
    Download page

    Tone Generators

    Buzz tone generator

    Generates a nasal-sounding tone composed of the base frequency plus n-1 harmonics.

    2KB
    buzz.ny
    Open
    Download link
    29KB
    buzz1.mp3
    Open
    Buzz Tone audio file
    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Generates a nasal-sounding tone composed of the base frequency plus n-1 harmonics. If for example you choose a frequency of 100 Hz with n=4 harmonics, this plugin will generate a tone comprised of 100, 200, 300 and 400 Hz, of equal amplitude. (The more harmonics, the more nasal and high-pitched the tone sounds.)

    Parameters:

    1. Frequency or MIDI number: [0=frequency, 1=MIDI (default)]

    2. Frequency: [20 - 5000 Hz, default 110]

    3. MIDI note number: [16 - 127, default 45]

    4. Number of harmonics:

    DTMF Tones (random)

    Touch Tones (also known as DTMF or Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones) are the tones made by key pads on telephones. Each tone is comprised of two separate tones at different pitch, hence "dual tone".

    Details

    Authors: David R.Sky, Dominic Mazzoni, Roger Dannenberg, W. Borgert

    Touch Tones (also known as DTMF or Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones) are the tones made by key pads on telephones. Each tone is comprised of two separate tones at different pitch, hence "dual tone".

    Parameters:

    1. Number of DTMF Tones: [1 - 120, default 20]

    DTMF Tones

    Touch Tones (also known as DTMF or Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones) are the tones made by key pads on telephones. Each tone is comprised of two separate tones at different pitch, hence "dual tone".

    Details

    Authors: David R.Sky, Dominic Mazzoni, Roger Dannenberg, W. Borgert

    Touch Tones (also known as DTMF or Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones) are the tones made by key pads on telephones. Each tone is comprised of two separate tones at different pitch, hence "dual tone".

    Type in your telephone number, or an 'alphabetized' number such as "1800audacity". Includes the US Military's A, B, C and D tones to the right of the regular number keypad.

    Parameters:

    HQ-Tone

    HQ-Tone is a high quality (no alias) tone generator. This plugin is typically faster than Audacity's built-in "Square - no alias" generator, particularly for low frequencies, and provides more waveform choices.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    HQ-Tone is a high quality (no alias) tone generator.

    Like the Square (no alias) option in Audacity's built-in generator, the waveforms generated by this plugin produce bandwidth limited waveforms to avoid distortion. This plugin is typically faster than Audacity's built-in "Square - no alias" generator, particularly for low frequencies, and provides more waveform choices:

    Parameters:

    PWM

    Generates a modulated pulse tone.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Generates a modulated pulse tone.

    Parameters:

    1. MIDI key: [0 - 127, default 60]

    Analysis plugins

    Plugin Suites

    Vamp Plugin Pack

    A plugin collection for various Vamp Analyzers. The plugins included are all open source software developed and published by various different authors and institutions:

    • BBC

    • Carl Bussey

    • Chris Cannam

    • Jamie Bullock

    Download page:

    Individual Analyzers

    ACX Check

    This analyzer was developed as an aid for audiobook producers. It displays a number of useful statistics about the selected audio, and compares them to the specifications published by (an Amazon.com subsidiary).

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    Based on a plugin by Will McCown.

    Displayed Results

    • Peak level Maximum peak level in the selection

    MAAT GON

    A Goniometer, also known as XY-Oscilloscope or Phase Scope.

    Note: Requires registration. This Analyzer can be found in the Effects category.

    Details

    ©2020 MAAT Incorporated, All rights reserved.

    Information from the vendor:

    This “phase scope” plug–in quickly conveys global trends and troubles, with a visual out–of–phase warning built in. Plus, an optional autogain feature insures that you’ll see an understandable display with a very wide range of input amplitudes.

    Usable metering is essential for any engineer, and GŌN’s options are equally practical, with a notable absence of controls. Unlike an oscilloscope which takes up room on your producer’s desk or meter bridge, GŌN’s lack of any knobs or switches means its straightforward user interface contains only a single button, the preference’s gear icon at upper right. Control over gain, focus, “phosphor” color, drawing style and persistence are all there in the preferences, and everything can be saved as a personal preset.

    All of GŌN’s functionality is wrapped in an information-rich yet visually unobtrusive user interface that occupies only a small slice of screen real estate. Likewise, the plugin is very "light weight" demanding an absolute minimum of CPU resources so it won´t slow down your host. As a bonus to everyone in the audio community, we’re giving you this free and rather useful plug-in. Thanks for visiting, and we hope to see more of you in the future!

    Peak Finder rft

    Either places a single label at the first instance of a peak volume, or multiple labels at all the instances of that peak.

    Details

    Author: Edgar-rft.

    Parameters

    1. Place labels at: [Choice: first peak only, all equally loud peaks (default)] The default setting will create labels for all peaks at the maximum absolute amplitude. "Absolute" amplitude disregards whether the value is positive or negative, so peaks may be up or down.

    Pitch Detect

    This plugin attempts to detect and display the musical pitch and frequency of the selected note. In most cases the default settings will work best. The other options are provided to handle special cases such as analyzing synthetic signals that are outside of the usual musical range.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    By default, the plugin detects the pitch by analyzing the first 0.2 seconds of the selection. In most cases this should work well. If required the analyzed section can be set to the first part of the selection ranging from the first 10th of a second (0.1 seconds) up to one second.

    Parameters

    1. Frequency range: [Choice: 20-1000 Hz, 100-2000 Hz, 1 kHz-10 kHz. Default 100-2000 Hz] In most cases the default should be used as most musical pitches are in the range 100 to 2000 Hz.

    Other sources

    Additional Vamp Plugins can be found on

    ACX Check
    Using master effects & realtime effects | Audacity Supportsupport.audacityteam.org
    Installing plugins | Audacity Supportsupport.audacityteam.org
    GVST - Downloadswww.gvst.co.uk
    Download page
    Kilohearts Essentials - Over 30 FREE Effects PluginsKilohearts
    Download page (requires registration)
    MuseHubMuseHub
    Download Muse hub
    Calf Studio Gear - GNU/Linux Audio Plug-Inscalf-studio-gear.org
    MFreeFXBundle | MeldaProductionwww.meldaproduction.com
    Download page
    Releases · intel/openvino-plugins-ai-audacityGitHub
    Download page
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    http://plugin.org.ukplugin.org.uk
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Releases · intel/openvino-plugins-ai-audacityGitHub
    Download page
    NVIDIA Broadcast: The Ultimate AI-Powered Voice and Video AppNVIDIA
    Download page
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    [1 - 60, default 12]
  • Buzz tone duration: [0.1 - 120 seconds, default 5.0]

  • Volume: [1 - 100 percent, default 95]

  • Include military tones A-D: [0 = no (default), 1 = yes]

  • Option to include silent intervals: [0 = no (default), 1 = yes]

  • Volume: [0.001 - 1.000, default 0.3]

  • Tone length [0.001 - 1.000 seconds, default 0.1]

  • High to low tone ratio: (or twist) [0 - 4 dB, default 0] - "Twist" is the volume ratio between the higher-pitched and lower-pitched tones in any given tone. So a twist value of 0 dB means the higher-pitched tone is no louder than the lower-pitched tone. A twist value of 4 dB means the higher-pitched tone is 4 dB louder than the lower-pitched tone.

  • Post silence duration: [0 - 1 seconds, default 0.1]

  • Tone string:
    [1800audacity (default)]
  • Tone duration: [1 - 1000 milliseconds, default 100]

  • Silence duration after tone: [0 - 1000 milliseconds, default 100]

  • Twist: [0 - 4 dB, default 0] - "Twist" is the volume ratio between the higher-pitched and lower-pitched tones in any given tone. So a twist value of 0 dB means the higher-pitched tone is no louder than the lower-pitched tone. A twist value of 4 dB means the higher-pitched tone is 4 dB louder than the lower-pitched tone.

  • Volume: [1 - 100 percent, default 80]

  • Waveform: [Choice: Sine, Square, Triangle, Sawtooth, Inverse sawtooth (default: Square]
  • Frequency (Hz): [20 - 10000 Hz, default 440 Hz] - the frequency of the generated waveform.

  • Amplitude (0 to 1): [0 to 1, default 0.8] - The amplitude of the generated waveform. Note that due to technical limitations, the actual waveform may be very slightly different from the requested amplitude. However, the amplitude can be expected to be very close to the specified level (within about 0.001 dB).

  • Duration: [must be greater than zero] - Time units may be selected by clicking the downward pointing arrow on the right side of the control.

  • Phase (-180 to 180): [-180 to +180 degrees] - The starting phase of the waveform. Rising across zero is taken to mean a phase of 0 degrees for all waveforms.

  • Smoothing: [Choice: Yes / No (default: Yes)] - Waveforms that have near instantaneous rise or fall times have noticeable ripple. When this option is enabled, additional damping is applied to smooth out the ripples, producing a cleaner looking waveform, at the expense of slightly reduced high frequency harmonics.

  • Cents: [0 - 99 cents, default 0] - Detune amount
  • Duration: [1 - 30000 milliseconds, default 10000]

  • Mod Rate: [1 - 100, default 1] - number of modulation cycles

  • Mod Depth: [-100 - +100 percent, default 90]

  • Mod Wave: [0 = tri (default), 1 = up sawtooth, 2 = down sawtooth] - waveform of tone

  • Width: [0 - 100 percent, default 0] - fixed pulse width

  • Amplitude: [0 - 100 percent, default 100]

  • If the sum of the fixed width and the instantaneous modulation amount is outside the interval [0 - 99], the output will go to full off or full on.

    2KB
    dtmfrand.ny
    Open
    Download link
    750KB
    dtmf_tones_random.wav
    Open
    DTMF tones random audio file
    3KB
    Dtmf.ny
    Open
    Download link
    750KB
    dtmf_tones.wav
    Open
    DTMF Tones audio file
    5KB
    HQ-Tone.ny
    Open
    Download link
    938KB
    hq-tone.wav
    Open
    HQ-Tone example audio file
    Tone
    aliasing
    1KB
    pwm.ny
    Open
    Download link
    938KB
    pwm.wav
    Open
    PWM example audio file
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo

    Marsyas Plugins

  • Matthias Mauch

  • Paul Brossier

  • Queen Mary, University of London

  • Simon Dixon and Chris Cannam

  • University of Alicante

  • RMS level The RMS level of the selected audio.

  • Noise floor The RMS level of the quietest 500 milliseconds in the selection

  • Warnings: (These are only displayed when applicable.)

    • Warning: ACX require 44100 Hz sample rate.

    • Warning: ACX require running time no longer than 120 minutes

    • Noise floor: -inf dB Warning (too low - Dead silence sounds unnatural.) ACX require constant, low level "room tone" rather than an unnaturally silent background noise level.

  • Limitations

    • This tool is intended only as an aid in achieving ACX acceptance. Even straight passes from this tool is NO guarantee of ACX acceptance.

    • The Noise Floor measurement is taken from the quietest half second of audio found in the selection. If one part of the selection is quieter than the rest, you will get a false value.

    • Minimum selection length is 1/2 second.

    • Maximum selection length is about 2.14 billion samples (13.5 hours at a sample rate of 44100 Hz)

    Also beware that some noise sources are worse than others, and noise such as the 1000 Hz whine that often happens in USB audio interfaces may result in an ACX rejection even though it is below the -60 dBFS noise floor requirement.

    \

    Minimum Distance: [samples]: [1 to 1000, (default 100)] The minimum distance between labels (in samples). If audio is clipped there may be many samples in succession at the maximum amplitude. This setting avoids labeling every successive sample by setting a minimum distance between labels.

    Limitations

    • This effect can be very slow on long selections.

    • If the audio is clipped and "Place labels at: all equally loud peaks" is selected, there may be an extremely large number of labels created. The "Minimum Distance" setting is useful to reduce the number of labels.

    • Peaks that appear to be at the maximum amplitude will not be labeled unless they are exactly at the maximum amplitude.

    Analyse first (seconds): [0.1 to 1. Default 0.2] At the default setting the first 0.2 seconds of the selection will be analyzed.

    Limitations

    This plugin is intended to detect single notes - you may get strange results if you try to analyze chords.

    Extremely high frequencies may not be detected very accurately, especially if the sample rate is not very high. The plugin will often detect very high frequencies better if the sample rate is 96000 Hz rather than 44100 Hz.

    The plugin should usually be able to detect pitches of single notes to within a few percent of the actual frequency. Don't expect the frequency in Hz to be exact..

    Advanced usage tips

    • For detecting very low frequencies (less than a few hundred Hz) the plugin should be set to the low frequency range (20 to 1000 Hz).

    • For detecting very high frequencies (several kHz) the plugin should be set to the high frequency range (1 kHz to 10 kHz).

    • For measuring synthesized tones and other electronic signals, the most accurate measure of frequency in Audacity is to use "Plot Spectrum" and set the "Size" setting to a high value.

    ACX
    4KB
    ACX-Check.ny
    Open
    Download
    2KB
    Peakfinder-rft.ny
    Open
    Download
    4KB
    Pitch-detect.ny
    Open
    Download
    https://www.vamp-plugins.org/download.html
    pack
    pack
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    ToneBoosters | Audio Plug-inswww.toneboosters.com
    Download page
    Logo
    Logo

    Delay and Reverb

    MuseFX Delay

    An easy to use, versatile delay effect, part of the Muse FX pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    MuseFX Reverb

    An easy to use, versatile reverb effect, part of the pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    ReaDelay

    A multi-tap delay effect, part of ReaPlugs.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information From the vendor:

    • Multi-tap delay, no practical limit on tap count

    • Up to 10 second delay per tap

    MConvolutionEZ

    An easy-to-use highly optimized convolution reverb, part of the pack

    Details

    MConvolutionEZ is an easy-to-use highly optimized convolution reverb. Comes with lots of impulse responses for rooms, halls, plates, guitar cabinets, effects.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    MCharmVerb

    A Lush algorithmic reverb effect, , part of the pack

    Details

    MCharmVerb is a great sounding lush algorithmic reverb based on the MTurboReverb engine.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing.

    OrilRiver

    A free algorithmic stereo reverb

    Details
    • 12 early reflections variations

    • 5 reverb tail variations

    TAL-Reverb-4

    A plate reverb with a vintage 80's character

    Details

    Information from the developer website:

    • Modulated vintage reverb sound.

    • Very diffuse sound.

    U-he Protoverb

    A natural sounding reverb based on the concept of a room simulator

    Details

    Information from the developer website:

    Protoverb is an experimental room simulator reverb. Most algorithmic reverbs try to avoid resonances or model the reflections of sound from a room’s walls. Protoverb does the opposite. It builds up as many room resonances as possible, modelling the body of air in the room. No need to modulate or colour the signal. The result is a very natural sounding reverberation with interesting characteristics:

    Notes held for a longer time tend to build up resonance, as if the air takes a while to get excited Multiple instruments remain distinct, without disappearing in a wash When you play a short melody, the room seems to repeat a ghost echo of that melody These properties are found in churches and large halls, but are rarely in conventional algorithmic reverbs.

    To achieve this, Protoverb works with many parallel, serial and networked delays. With such a structure, no mathematical formula can make it sound right, it is down to trial and error (and luck) using random values. Protoverb generates random delay line lengths, networks and feedback strategies.

    Voxengo OldSkoolVerb

    OldSkoolVerb offers you a comprehensive set of parameters permitting you to achieve various reverbs ranging from plate reverb to room reverb to hall reverb sound.

    Details

    Information from the developer website:

    • Plate, room, and hall reverbs

    • 5 reverb modes

    Valhalla Supermassive

    ValhallaSupermassive lets you create massive reverbs, harmonic echoes and space sounds

    Details

    Information from the developer website:

    ValhallaSupermassive is based around feedback delay networks. The individual delays can have up to 2 second of delay time, with user control over the delay lengths, the feedback, how the delays mix with each other, and the modulation rate and depth of the delays. The sonic results range from choruses and flangers, to echoes that fade in and out over time, to massive lush reverbs, and onwards to weird spatial effects that have to be heard to be believed.

    See also

    • Nyquist effects

    Equalizers

    MuseFX Simple EQ

    An easy to use yet powerful EQ. Part of the Muse FX pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    MuseFX ProEQ

    An easy to use 4-band EQ. Part of the pack.

    Details

    See the pack for installation instructions.

    ReaEQ

    An unlimited band IIR based equalizer effect, part of ReaPlugs.

    Details

    Copyright (C) 2006-2016, Cockos Incorporated VST PlugIn Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH

    Information From the vendor:

    • Unlimited band IIR based equalizer

    • Support for any number of many types of filters (shelfs, bands, LPF, HPF, notch, bandpass, allpass)

    Voxengo Marvel GEQ

    A 16-band linear-phase graphic equalizer with multi-channel operation support

    Details

    Information from the vendor

    • 16-band graphic equalizing

    • Freehand drawing mode

    Red Rock Sound EQ302

    A 32-band equalizer offering -12 dB to +12 dB gain in 1/3 octave steps from 16 Hz to 20 kHz

    Details

    Information from the vendor

    • 32-band graphic equalizer

    • Selectable -12 to +12 dB or -6 to +6 dB gain

    Red Rock Sound EQ560

    A 10-band graphic equalizer emulating the 1967 EQ560 hardware

    Details

    Copyright © 2012–2022 Red Rock Sound

    Information from the vendor

    • 10 bands of proprietary equalization.

    • Familiar graphics operation on one octave centers.

    MEqualizer

    6-band equalizer with analyzer, part of the pack

    Details

    MConvolutionEZ is an extremely easy-to-use and powerful 6-band equalizer. It also provides an advanced visualization including a spectrum analyzer and sonogram.

    • Advanced GUI

    • Compare multiple settings: A to H Switching and A to D Morphing

    RS-W2395C Free Neo Classic Baxandall EQ

    The W2395c is a classic Baxandall EQ combined with a powerful and beautiful sounding mid band

    Details

    Vendor description

    See also

    • Nyquist effects

    Scripting - Audacity Manualmanual.audacityteam.org
    Logo

    Modulation Effects

    Dual Tape Decks

    Simulates two tape decks playing identical tapes, but out of synchronization with each other.

    Details

    Author:

    Widgets Reference

    A is an element of a graphical user interface (), such as a button or slider, which facilitates user interaction. Audacity supplies a number of widget types for Nyquist plugins, which are ultimately derived from the toolkit. Fortunately, Nyquist plugin developers are largely spared from the complexities of WxWidgets, and can simply select which widgets they need by adding the appropriate "header" to the top of the plugin script.

    The layout of a Nyquist plugin GUI is a simple list of widgets, one above the other.

    Slider Widget

    Slider widgets are supported in all Audacity Nyquist plugin versions.

    Logo
  • Tap lengths can be in time (s/ms) or quarter notes

  • Feedback, LPF/HPF, resolution reduction per tap

  • Stereo width per tap

  • Volume/pan per tap

  • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • Automatic gain compensation (AGC)

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channels surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    3-band equalizer for the wet signal
  • Sample Rate: from 44100 to 192000 Hz.

  • Lots of presets

  • Fast build up time, also with long reverb sounds.

  • Works on almost every audio material.

  • Easy to use.

  • Only stereo channels supported.

  • Reverb mode editor

  • Stereo processing

  • 64-bit floating point processing

  • Preset manager

  • Undo/redo history

  • A/B comparisons

  • Contextual hint messages

  • All sample rates support

  • Zero processing latency

  • User interface color schemes

  • Resizable user interface

  • Retina and HighDPI support

  • Delay and Reverb
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    Muse FX
    MFreeFXBundle
    MFreeFXBundle
  • Frequency response and phase response display

  • Display of approximate note+octave for frequencies

  • Per-band bypass control

  • Full-view of graph optional for precise editing

  • Mouse modifiers/mousewheel usable for editing bandwidth of points in graph

  • Linear-phase equalizing

  • +/- 12 dB gain range per band

  • Stereo and multi-channel processing

  • Internal channel routing

  • Channel grouping

  • Mid/side processing

  • 64-bit floating point processing

  • Preset manager

  • Undo/redo history

  • A/B comparisons

  • Integrated low-cut filter

  • Adjustable input gain

  • 12 dB of boost/cut per band.

  • Proportional Q narrows filter Q at extremes.

  • IN/OUT switch — allows the user to bypass the Graphic Eq for before/after comparisons.

  • 9 filter types for each band with quick adjustment

  • Powerful spectrum analyzer and sonogram

  • Unique visualisation engine with classic meters and time graphs

  • MIDI controllers with MIDI learn

  • M/S, single channel, up to 8 channelds surround and up to 64 channels ambisonics processing

  • Extremely fast, optimized for newest AVX2 and AVX512 capable processors

  • Supports VST, VST3, AU and AAX interfaces on Windows and macOS

  • See the pack for installation instructions.

    1950 Meets 2019

    The W2395c is a classic Baxandall EQ combined with a powerful and beautiful sounding mid band. As a solitary or complementary equalizer with that special something, its particular tone and slightly interactive bands let your tracks stand out big time. In close cooperation with its creator, analog mastermind Roger Schult, we are delighted to offer this amazing plugin completely for free.

    Control and Shape

    The W2395c excels in controlling the midrange within the context of broad tonal shaping of bass and treble. The high shelf is great for carving out percussive sounds as well as opening or darkening instruments and voices. The partnering low band provides a precise and solid grip on the sub frequencies, while the mids manage the balancing act between natural and beefy with stunning ease.

    Straight yet Flexible

    Operating the W2395c is as straight forward as it gets, and still the few controls provide great flexibility. The low band can be switched from 80 to 110 Hz, the highs from 2 to 5 kHz, and the semi-parametric mids offer 3 different Q factors to choose from. The drive control is a plugin-exclusive extra for adding some nice grit to its supernaturally natural tone character.

    Freely yours

    With its super intuitive controls and musically interacting curves, the W2395c is a special and unique gem in the world of equalizers. It enhances anything from very dynamic sources like vocals or drums to harsh cymbals or dull sounding guitars and synths – and it does an excellent job on the mix buss as well. A truly exciting EQ experience is waiting for you… right now, all free.

    Filters and EQ
    REAPER | ReaPlugswww.reaper.fm
    Download page
    Muse FX
    MFreeFXBundle

    Simulates two tape decks playing identical tapes, but out of synchronization with each other. Written to produce an effect I heard in the late 1970s: I recorded then played identical audio on two mono tape decks. There was an amazing "whooshing" effect as one tape deck "caught up" with and passed what the other tape deck was playing. This plugin allows the "whooshing" to go back and forth. Different effects are made using mono-sounding vs. "true" stereo audio.

    The plugin can produce some interesting stereo effects, though note that due to the greater "cross-talk" of speakers, listening in speakers and headphones will sound different. Stereo flanger-like effects can be made by (for example) applying dualtapedecks.ny to audio, applying Stereo Butterfly (static) with a spread value of zero (sounds mono after applying), then applying dualtapedecks.ny a second time with the same settings as the first time. This plugin will work on mono audio as well, but the only effect will be rising and falling changes in pitch and tempo.

    Parameters:

    1. LFO frequency: [Hz, 0.001 to 25.000]

    2. Starting phase: [degrees, -180 to +180, default 0]

    3. Phase difference: [degrees, 0 to 360, default 180]

    4. Depth: [0.001 to 2.000] - The larger depth is, the more pronounced the pitch and tempo shift become until there is a noticeable warble.

    Flanger (linear)

    Unlike a regular flanger (which cycles up and down repeatedly), this plugin creates a single high-frequency flange, and you can set the position of that high-frequency point, anywhere between the start and end of the selection and beyond.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Unlike a regular flanger (which cycles up and down repeatedly), this plugin creates a single high-frequency flange, and you can set the position of that high-frequency point, anywhere between the start and end of the selection and beyond. The plugin works by mixing the original selected audio with a slightly shrunk (shorter) version of itself.

    Works on mono and stereo audio.

    Parameters:

    1. High frequency flange position: [percent, - 100 to + 200, default 0] - the position in the signal where the high frequency portion of the flange is heard. If set to 0%, the high frequency will be at the start of the selection; at 50% in the exact middle; at 100%, at the end. If you set this value below 0% or above 100%, you won't hear the highest flange frequency peak but will hear a falling or rising flange effect, as if the peak lay outside the start or end of the selection.

    2. Time decrease: [milliseconds, - 0.1 to 200, default 5.0] - how much the length of the original selection is decreased.

    3. Wet level: [percent, 1 to 99, default 50] - the 'wet' signal is the shortened signal, and the wet level is how much (in percent) to mix with the dry (unaltered) audio.

    4. Wet: inverted or positive: [0=inverted, 1=positive, default positive]

    Isochronic modulator

    A variable tremolo plugin customized with controls for length and fade in/out speed of each pulse.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A variable tremolo plugin customized with controls for length and fade in/out speed of each pulse. The modulation frequency (speed) and depth transform gradually from the initial settings to the final settings. A modified square wave is used as the modulation waveform.

    The effect is typically applied to a single tone to create isochronic tones. The author supplies the plugin only as a demonstration of audio processing without endorsing or claiming any relevance to the theory or practice of brainwave entrainment.

    Parameters:

    1. Pulse Width: [percent, 0 - 100, default 40] - How long each pulse will be "on". Higher values will make the sound "on" for longer. 50% gives a "square pulse" where the sound will be on for half the time.

    2. Fade Time: [percent, 0 - 100, default 15] - adjusts the fade in and fade out speed of the pulse. Higher values produce a more gradual fade in and out of the pulses. At 100% the fade in/out times will be half of the pulse width. At 0% there will be no fade.

    3. Initial Modulation Frequency: [Hz, 1 - 20, default 7.0]

    4. Final Modulation Frequency: [Hz, 1 - 20, default 2.0]

    5. Initial Modulation Depth: [percent, 0 - 100, default 100]

    6. Final Modulation Depth: [percent, 0 - 100, default 100]

    Random Amplitude Modulation

    Similar to Random Panning, this time playing around with the volume knob.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Similar to Random Panning, this time playing around with the volume knob. Because of the way the random signal is generated, the lower the maximum speed is, the higher the depth factor must be to produce a similar depth of amplitude changes.

    Parameters:

    1. Max amp sweep speed: [0.01 - 20.0 Hz, default 0.5] - maximum speed of the random amplitude changes

    2. Amp sweep depth factor: [1 - 300, default 80] - how extreme the random amplitude changes are

    Random Pitch Modulation

    Randomly modulates the pitch of your audio.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Randomly modulates the pitch of your audio. As with other randomly-controlled effects, the the lower the maximum speed is, the higher the depth factor must be to produce a similar depth of random changes. This effect works on mono and stereo audio. In stereo, each channel has different random pitch modulation applied. "Max pitch mod depth" can be explained thus: at higher warping depth settings, pitch mod depth should be made higher, otherwise there will be momentary periods without pitch changes. With lower warping depth settings this does not happen, and the effect can be re-applied repeatedly to give further random pitch changes.

    Parameters:

    1. Warping depth: [0.001 - 2.000, default 0.100] - controls the number of pitch changes that occur

    2. Max sweep speed: [0.01 - 20.0 Hz, default 0.50] - maximum speed of the random pitch changes, higher values increase "warbling" effect

    3. Sweep depth factor: [1 - 300, default 80] - how far

    4. Max pitch mod depth: [0.01 - 3.00, default 0.50]

    Ring Modulator

    A ring modulator is a tremolo effect, but instead of using an LFO to amplitude modulate audio, an audio signal is used.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    A ring modulator is a tremolo effect, but instead of using an LFO to amplitude modulate audio, an audio signal is used. The result is a combination of the sum of and the difference between the two input signal frequencies e.g., two sine waves of 440 Hz and 660 Hz produce a result of 220 Hz (difference) and 1100 Hz (sum).

    This plugin also allows use of triangle, sawtooth and pulse waveforms, so the results are the sums and differences between the harmonics of the modulating signal and harmonics of the signal being modulated.

    Parameters:

    1. Modulation frequency: [Hz, 20 to 5000, default 500]

    2. Amount: [percent, 0 to 100, default 100]

    3. Waveform: [0=sine, 1=triangle, 2=sawtooth, 3=pulse, default sine]

    4. Pulse bias: [percent, -100 to +100, default 0] - if the pulse waveform is selected, bias is the pulse width. The default 0 gives a "square" wave. Lower values give a narrower positive signal, higher values a wider positive signal.

    Variable Tremolo

    This plugin produces a "Tremolo" effect in which the frequency and depth of the tremolo varies from an initial setting to a final setting.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This plugin produces a "Tremolo" effect in which the frequency and depth of the tremolo varies from an initial setting to a final setting. The effect makes the loudness "wobble" and you can set the speed of the wobble and the amount that it wobbles for both the start of the selection and the end of the selection.

    Parameters:

    1. Tremolo Shape: [sine,triangle,sawtooth,inverse sawtooth,square. default = "sine"]

      1. Sine: The volume rises and falls smoothly up and down.

      2. Triangle: The volume alternates between rising at a constant rate and falling at a constant rate.

      3. Sawtooth: The volume rises abruptly but falls gradually.

      4. Inverse Sawtooth: The volume rises gradually but falls abruptly.

    2. Starting Phase: [0 to 360 degrees, default = 90] - This sets the starting point for the tremolo cycle. At 90 degrees the tremolo starts at the higher level. At 0 degrees the tremolo starts at the lower level.

    3. Initial Tremolo Frequency: [1 to 20 Hz - default = 4] - The speed of the tremolo effect at the start of the selection.

    4. Final Tremolo Frequency: [1 to 20 Hz - default = 12] - The speed of the tremolo effect at the end of the selection.

    5. Initial Tremolo Amount: [0 to 100 % - default = 40] - How much the initial volume varies as a percentage of the original level.

    6. Final Tremolo Amount: [0 to 100 % - default = 40] - How much the final volume varies as a percentage of the original level.

    Vibrato

    This effect applies vibrato (a regular pulsating change of pitch) to the selected audio.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This effect applies vibrato (a regular pulsating change of pitch) to the selected audio. The speed at which the sound pulsates can be varied over time by selecting an initial speed and a final speed. The vibrato speed will smoothly transition from the initial speed to the final speed. For a constant speed vibrato, set the Initial and Final speed settings to the same value.

    The depth of the vibrato (amount of pitch variance) can varied over time by setting initial, mid point and final depth values. The vibrato depth begins at the initial value and smoothly transitions to the mid-point value, then to the final value. The time at which the mid-point depth is achieved can be adjusted. When "Mid point position" is set to 50%, the mid-point depth is reached half way through the selection. Smaller "Mid point position" values shift the mid-point earlier, so that the transition in depth from "Initial" to "Mid point" occurs more quickly, and the transition from "Mid point" to "Final" occurs more slowly. Similarly, larger values shift the mid-point later.

    The maximum vibrato depth (100%) is equivalent to a pitch deviation of +/- 1 whole tones. At 50%, the deviation is +/- 1 semitone.

    Parameters:

    1. Initial speed: [0 to 10, default 1] The initial vibrato speed (wobbles per second).

    2. Final speed: [0 to 10, default 5] The vibrato speed at the end of the selection.

    3. Initial depth: [0 to 100%, default 10%] The amount of pitch variance at the start of the selection.

    This plugin is intended for use on short selections. Due to cumulative rounding errors, the sound quality will gradually deteriorate on long selections, so it is recommended to apply the effect to selections that are less than 1 minute.

    1KB
    dualtapedecks.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    3KB
    Flangerl.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    1KB
    Isomod.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    823B
    Randomamp.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    1KB
    randompitch.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    2KB
    Ringmod.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    2KB
    Vari-tremolo.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    2KB
    Vibrato.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the slider.

    • variable-type : [keyword] A "number" type, either int, float or real*:

      • int : integer [FIXNUM, an XLISP whole number]

      • float (or real*) : floating point [FLONUM, an XLISP number supporting decimal places]

    • text-right : [string] Text that will appear to the right of the slider.

    • initial-value : [int / float] Variable value [and slider position] at the first start of the plugin.

    • minimum : [int / float] Numeric variable value when the slider is moved to the left border.

    • maximum : [int / float] Numeric variable value when the slider is moved to the right border.

    The variable value [the slider position] can be referenced by the variable name in the plugin code.

    A text input box to the left of the slider allows the user to type in a value via the keyboard. As of Audacity 2.1.1, input values are validated to only allow input between minimum and maximum values.

    • The "real" keyword is deprecated. New plugins should use "float" as the variable type for floating point input.

    Numeric Text Widget

    example of numeric text

    The numeric text widget was introduced in Audacity 2.1.2.

    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the text box.

    • variable-type : [keyword] A "number" type, either "int-text" or "float-text":

      • int-text : Integer [FIXNUM, an XLISP whole number]

      • float-text : Floating point [FLONUM, an XLISP number supporting decimal places]

    • text-right : [string] Text that will appear to the right of the text box.

    • initial-value : [int / float] Variable value at the first start of the plugin.

    • minimum : [int / float / NIL] Numeric minimum variable value that will pass validation.

    • maximum : [int / float / NIL] Numeric maximum variable value that will pass validation.

    Minimum and maximum may be numeric values or "NIL". The minimum / maximum is not defined when set as "NIL" and is limited only by the numeric limit for the number type. The valid range for numbers depends on the computer platform. Typically the limits for integers are -2147483648 to 2147483647. The limits for floating point numbers are very large.

    Examples of undefined minimum / maximum:

    String Widget (text input)

    example of a text input

    The text input widget ("string widget") is supported in plugins version 2 or above.

    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the text input field.

    • variable-type : [keyword] Declares a "string" input type widget.

    • text-right : [string] Text that will appear to the right of the text input field.

    • default-string : [string] The string will appear inside the text field.

    The text typed in by the user in the text field of the plugin window can be referred as a string variable from within the plugin code. All string characters are valid, though care must be taken with escape characters if the string is to be evaluated.

    Examples how to use the text input widget can be found in the source code of the Apropos Plugin.

    Multiple-Choice Widget

    example of multiple choice input

    The multiple choice input widget is supported in plugins version 3 or above.

    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the multiple-choice list.

    • variable-type : [keyword] Declares a "Multiple-Choice" type widget.

    • string-1,... : [string] For every string an entry in a list to choose from will be produced.

    • initial-value : the number of the list entry that will be displayed as the default choice at the first start of the plugin.

    The list entries string-1, string-2, etc. are comma separated and internally represented by integer numbers. The first, top-most list entry string-1 will be represented by the number 0. The list entry chosen by the user can be determined by the integer value of the variable from within the plugin code.

    An example of the 'choice' widget can be found sample-data-export.ny

    Time Widget

    Introduced in Audacity 2.3.0.

    example of time input
    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the time control.

    • time : [keyword] A "time" widget.

    • text-right : [string] Text that will appear to the right of the time control.

    • initial-value : [int / float] Default value. Number (float or integer) in seconds.

    • minimum : [number] Minimum numeric value (float or integer) in seconds.

    • maximum : [number] Maximum numeric value (float or integer) in seconds.

    Minimum and maximum may be numeric values or "NIL". The minimum / maximum is not defined when set as "NIL" and is limited to a range of 0 and the maximum supported by the current widget view.

    This widget is to input durations. The value set is converted to seconds and assigned as the value of the widget variable.

    Example taken from the Pluck effect:

    In this example:

    • variable name is "dur",

    • text-left is "Duration (60s max)",

    • text-right is "" (empty string).

    • initial-value is 1 second.

    • minimum is 0.0 seconds.

    • maximum is 60 seconds.

    File-Button Widget

    example of file buttons

    The File Button Widget requires Audacity 2.3.0 or later.

    • variable-name : [symbol] A Lisp symbol.

    • text-left : [string] Text that will appear to the left of the file button widget.

    • variable-type : [keyword] Declares a "File-button" type widget.

    • button text : [string] Text that appears on the button.

    • default-file-path : [string] The default file path.

    • wildcard-filters : [string] File types to show in file browser (based on file extensions).

    • flags : [string] Option flags, based on ).

    Text Widget

    example of text

    The text widget was introduced in Audacity 2.3.0. Although not actually a "control", it shares similar syntax to all other Nyquist plugin widgets:

    This widget adds a line of text (the "string") to the plugin GUI.

    Best practice: While it may seem convenient to add text to an interface to explain how the plugin should be used, this widget should be used sparingly. Text descriptions should not be used as a substitute for good design. Plugin developers should also be aware that it is not currently possible to provide localization (translations) of text in any widgets in third party plugins.

    Widget
    GUI
    WxWidgets
    example of a slider
    Logo

    Time, Pitch and Tempo

    Change Speed by Semitones

    Similar to the effect, this effect changes the speed of the selected audio, thus changing both the tempo and pitch.

    Details

    Macro Tutorial

    Nyquist-Macros are a special kind of Nyquist plugin that instruct Audacity to perform tasks using Audacity's scripting interface.

    To use this feature effectively, it is necessary to use the correct commands and syntax, and also understand that when Nyquist is used in this way, Nyquist is not allowed, or able, to modify the project. Nyquist-Macros may instruct Audacity to modify the project, but unlike ''ordinary'' Nyquist plugins, Nyquist cannot itself modify the project.

    Nyquist-Macros are potentially far more powerful than normal in that they may make use of logic, loops and conditionally executing code, rather than only running through a simple list. They can also accept user input via the usual , and most other features of Nyquist plugins.

    About This Tutorial

    Nyquist Macros are a fairly advanced topic, so this tutorial is aimed at users with an intermediate to advanced level of experience with Nyquist programming.

    TAL Software GmbHtal-filter
    Download page
    PLUGINS4FREEPLUGINS4FREE
    Download page
    FILTERSTEP by Audiomodern™ | The Creative Motion FilterAudiomodern
    Download page
     ;control variable-name "text-left" variable-type "text-right" initial-value minimum maximum
     ;control variable-name "text-left" variable-type "text-right" initial-value minimum maximum
     ;control pos "Positive Integer" int-text "text-right" initial-value 0 nil
     ;control neg "Negative Integer" int-text "text-right" initial-value nil 0
     ;control num "Any number" float-text "text-right" initial-value nil nil
     ;control variable-name "text-left" string "text-right" "default-string"
     ;control variable-name "text-left" choice "string-1,string-2,..." initial-value
     ;control variable-name "text-left" time "text-right" initial-value minimum maximum
     ;control dur "Duration (60s max)" time "" 1 0.0 60
     ;control variable-name "text-left" file "button-text" "default-file-path" "wildcard-filters" "flags"
     ;control text "string"

    Square: The volume jumps abruptly between higher and lower levels.

    Mid point depth: [0 to 100%, default 100%] The amount of pitch variance at the mid-point.
  • Final depth: [0 to 100%, default 0%] The amount of pitch variance at the end of the selection.

  • Mid point position: [0 to 100%, default 30%] How far through the selection that the mid-point depth is reached.

  • Logo
    wxWidgets File Dialog Styles
    Author: Steve Daulton

    Similar to the Change Speed effect, this effect changes the speed of the selected audio, thus changing both the tempo and pitch. Possible uses include slowing down music to aid transcription, where the amount of pitch change is known.

    Parameters:

    1. Semitones change: [-24 to +24 semitones]

    Extract Audio

    Extracts audio from a selected area without using a mouse or cursor keys.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Extracts audio from a selected area without using a mouse or cursor keys. Audacity has a Selection Toolbar providing a screen-reader friendly display of selection start time and duration which you could use for similar purpose, this plugin provides a solution. It also has an easy option to extract a percentage of the selected audio. For example, selecting 50% "start percent" and 100% "end percent" will leave you with only the last half of your selection.

    Parameters:

    1. Time or percent?

    2. Start time: [seconds, maximum 600]

    3. End time: [seconds, maximum 600]

    4. Start percent:

    5. End percent:

    Insert Silence

    This effect inserts silence at the start of the audio selection.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This effect inserts silence at the start of the audio selection. The length of inserted silence is equal to the length of the selection. This effect may be useful in situations where it is necessary to insert a lot of silences because Audacity (2.0.1 and later) allow keyboard shortcuts to be set for effects (see: https://manual.audacityteam.org/o/man/keyboard_preferences.html#change)

    This effect has no controls.

    Regular Interval Audio Splitter

    Splits audio into desired number of segments by inserting silences of specified duration (up to 10.0 seconds).

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Previously called "Audio chunker". Splits audio into desired number of segments by inserting silences of specified duration (up to 10.0 seconds). You can also specify fade-in and fade-out lengths for each segment. By setting number of segments to ' 1 ' you can use audio splitter to apply a specified fade-in and fade-out to a single length of audio in one action.

    Parameters:

    1. Number of audio segments: [1 to 120, default 10]

    2. Silence duration between segments [seconds]: [0.01 to 10, default 1]

    3. Fade-in/fade-out length [milliseconds; 0 = no fade]: [0 to 500, default 20]

    Sliding Speed Change

    A speed change effect in which the initial and final speed may be set independently.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A speed change effect in which the initial and final speed may be set independently. Like Audacity's Change Speed effect, this effect changes both the tempo and pitch of the audio.

    Accessibility: This effect may be useful as an accessible alternative to Audacity's Time Tracks.

    Parameters:

    1. Initial speed (0.1 to 10 x): [0.1 to 10, default 1.0] Sets the initial speed.

    2. Final speed (0.1 to 10 x): [0.1 to 10, default 1.0] Sets the final speed.

    The speed controls set the initial and final speed as a multiple of the original speed. A setting of 1.0 means 1x the original speed, in other words, unchanged. 2x speed is double speed. 0.5x speed is half speed. The speed changes linearly between the 'Initial' and 'Final' settings.

    Tempo Change

    Caution: This plugin only works as intended on a sample rate of 44100Hz

    This plugin allows you to change tempo making it faster or slower

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    For those who are confused by Audacity's "Change Speed" effect where to make the tempo twice as slow you apply a -50% change and to make it twice as fast apply a 100% change, try this plugin. Its default settings multiply the tempo by 0.5, making the tempo twice as slow (dividing by 2.0 has the same effect). To make the tempo twice as fast, simply multiply by 2.0 (or divide by 0.5). The default setting (the opposite of Audacity's "Change Speed" default) might be handy for example to return tapes dubbed at 2x speed to normal speed.

    Parameters:

    1. Tempo change factor: [0.1 to 8.0, default 0.5]

    2. Multiply or divide: [0=multiply (default), 1=divide] - multiplies or divides by the tempo change number.

    Time Shifter

    A plugin for performing the same task as the Time Shift Tool in Audacity, without using a mouse.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    A plugin for performing the same task as the Time Shift Tool in Audacity, without using a mouse. The effect works thus: if the shift value is positive, silence is inserted before the selection. If the shift value is negative, audio is removed from the start of the selection. If your selected track is mono, set the value in the left/mono edit field, if your track is stereo, set the values in both the left/mono and right channel shift value fields. Setting slightly different values in both fields when you have a stereo track can be used for special effect.

    Note that positive shifts can lead to the audio being truncated at the right edge when shifting a stereo track. To avoid this, split the stereo track using the Track Drop-down Menu, select each track in turn and apply the shift you want using the Mono/left channel shift field. If the audio starts after time zero and is preceded by empty space, convert the empty space to silence with Project > Quick Mix in legacy Audacity up to and including version 1.3.13. In current Audacity, select the track, press J, then press SHIFT + HOME, then Generate > Silence. This prevents truncation of the audio providing there is sufficient silence at the start of the track.

    Parameters:

    1. Mono/left channel shift: [-1000 - +1000, default 0]

    2. Right channel shift: [-1000 - +1000, default 0]

    3. [0=milliseconds 1=seconds] (default is milliseconds)

    Trim / Extend

    This plugin can trim audio from the start and/or end of a track (or track selection), or pad the start and/or end with silence, or any combination of the two.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This plugin can trim audio from the start and/or end of a track (or track selection), or pad the start and/or end with silence, or any combination of the two. The effect can be used in a Macro for batch processing.

    Parameters:

    1. Time units: [samples, milliseconds, seconds (default), minutes] This selection sets the time units for the following two controls.

    2. Trim / Extend start by: [-100 to +100, default 0] How much audio to trim (delete) from the start of the track selection, or how much silence to add to the start of the selection. Move the slider to the left or type a negative value to remove audio. Move the slider to the right or type a positive value to add silence.

    3. Trim / Extend end by: [-100 to +100, default 0] How much audio to trim (delete) from the end of the track selection, or how much silence to add to the end of the selection. Move the slider to the left or type a negative value to remove audio. Move the slider to the right or type a positive value to add silence.

    4. Error message control: [Show errors (default) / Hide errors] In the event of an error, a message will normally be shown to indicate what the error is. For example, if you attempt to delete a longer duration than the selection, an error message will indicate that the operation cannot be done. However, when using this effect in a Macro for batch processing, the error message will cause the Macro to stop until the error message is acknowledged. That behavior may not be wanted, so "Hide errors" may be selected to suppress error messages. When "Hide errors" is enabled, if an error is encountered, the plugin will silently skip the current track and continue with any remaining tracks.

    Trim Silence

    This plugin is for trimming excess silence from the start and/or end of tracks or audio clips.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This plugin is for trimming excess silence from the start and/or end of tracks or audio clips. The effect can be used in a Macro for batch processing.

    Parameters:

    1. Silence Threshold (dB): [-100 to 0, default -48] Audio below this level at the start or end of the track may be trimmed.

    2. Silence to leave at start (0 to 30 seconds): [0 to 30 seconds, default 0] When trimming silence from the start of a track or audio clip, the silence will not be trimmed shorter than this length. Note that if the silence at the start of the track is already shorter than this length, it will not be trimmed and will not be extended.

    3. Silence to leave at end (0 to 30 seconds): [0 to 30 seconds, default 0] When trimming silence from the end of a track or audio clip, the silence will not be trimmed shorter than this length. Note that if the silence at the end of the track is already shorter than this length, it will not be trimmed and will not be extended.

    4. Preview is not available for this effect.

    5. This plugin requires the audio to be loaded into RAM. To avoid running out of RAM (which would cause Audacity to freeze or crash), the plugin limits the maximum size of the selected audio to 1 GB (about 47 minutes for a stereo track at 44.1 kHz). Additional information is provided in the plugin code comments.

    Preview is not available for this effect.

    This plugin requires the audio to be loaded into RAM. To avoid running out of RAM (which would cause Audacity to freeze or crash), the plugin limits the maximum size of the selected audio to 1 GB (about 47 minutes for a stereo track at 44.1 kHz). Additional information is provided in the plugin code comments.

    Note that this effect only acts on the start and/or end of the track or audio clip within the current selection. If the selection includes multiple audio clips, trimming starts from the beginning of the first audio clip that is within the selection, and from the end of the last audio clip that is within the selection.

    Turntable Warping MS

    Simulates unplugging and plugging in a turntable while it's powered, and related effects such as speeding it up before unplugging it

    Details

    Authors: David R.Sky, Roger B. Dannenberg

    Simulates unplugging and plugging in a turntable while it's powered, and related effects such as speeding it up before unplugging it. Improved over the previous turntablewarp.ny - this version lets you warp both mono and stereo audio. The default settings simulate unplugging a turntable - the audio starts to slow down halfway through the selection area, and drops to 40% of original volume by the end.

    Parameters:

    1. Initial step: [-36 - +36 semitones, default 0] - the resulting pitch change at the start of the selection, defined as number of semitones above or below the original pitch (1 step = 1 semitone, so 12 steps = 1 octave.)

    2. Initial amplitude: [0 - 100 percent, default 100] - the resulting volume at the start of the selection, related to the original amplitude (so 100% = no change).

    3. Change time: [0 - 100 percent, default 50] - the point in time in the selection (set internally to the original pitch and volume) at which the warping values change to reach and move away from this point. What this means is that depending on your start and end step and amplitude values, you can design warps that slow down then speed up; speed up then slow down; speed up to a particular pitch then remain there; slowly speed up then quickly speed up.

    4. End step: [-36 - +36 semitones, default -12] - the resulting pitch change at the end of the audio. compared to the original pitch.

    5. End amplitude: [0 - 100 percent, default 40] - the resulting volume at the end of the selection, compared to the original volume.

    Change Speed
    357B
    Changespeedsemitones.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    1KB
    extract.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    561B
    Insertsilence.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    3KB
    Equasplit.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    1KB
    Slide-speed.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    418B
    tempo.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    34KB
    tempo1.mp3
    Open
    Download example audio file
    2KB
    timeshif.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    4KB
    TrimExtend.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    9KB
    TrimSilence.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    3KB
    turntablewarp-ms.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin

    In this tutorial, we will be reimplementing Audacity's Tone generator as a Nyquist Macro. During the course of the tutorial, many of the abilities and core concepts of Nyquist Macros will be discussed, along with tips and potential pitfalls to watch out for in your own programming.

    Nyquist Macros are a powerful extension of Audacity's features. With great power comes great responsibility. Nyquist Macros bypass much of Audacity's built-in validation, so it is relatively easy to pass invalid commands that can cause Audacity to crash. Test your Nyquist Macros thoroughly before using them for important production work.

    Overview

    Audacity provides a rich set of scripting commands, which are documented in the Scripting Reference section of the Audacity manual. These commands may be sent from Nyquist, to tell Audacity what to do, using the function call "AUD-DO". As a very simple example, Nyquist can tell Audacity to start playing by sending the command "Play:"

    (aud-do "Play")

    Some things to note:

    • The command "Play:" is a string (text).

    • The command is case sensitive. It must be capitalized exactly as stated in the Scripting Reference.

    • The Nyquist function is AUD-DO, which like any other Nyquist function is case insensitive, and usually written in lower case in code.

    • The function AUD-DO takes exactly one parameter, which is the command string.

    As Nyquist cannot modify the project when used to send Macro scripting commands, most Nyquist-Macros will be written as "tool" type plugins.

    Passing Commands to Audacity

    The examples in this section may be run in the Nyquist Prompt, but ensure that you make a selection in an audio track first.

    As described above, the "AUD-DO" function takes exactly one argument (parameter), which is the command that will be sent to Audacity. However, we may sometimes want to send a command that has multiple parameters. For example, to generate a 10 second, 200 Hz, 0.5 amplitude sine tone, the Macro Scripting command is:

    Tone: Frequency=200 Amplitude=0.5 Waveform="Sine"

    With AUD-DO we can send the command, including it's parameters, as one string:

    (aud-do "Tone: Frequency=200 Amplitude=0.5 Waveform=Sine")

    Using the above example, the macro command string could be passed as the value of a variable:

    As with other Nyquist commands, a string argument does not need to be a string literal, it may be a variable that evaluates to a string.

    (setf command "Tone: Frequency=200 Amplitude=0.5 Waveform=Sine") (aud-do command)

    In this slightly more complex example we use the FORMAT command to construct the command string. This approach is very useful if scripting command parameters are to be generated programmatically or obtained from user input.

    If we incorporate this code in an installable Nyquist Macro, we see that we are getting close to re-implementing Audacity's Tone generator as a Nyquist macro.

    Here is a simplified implementation of Audacity's Tone Generator:

    Some important things to note in this example Nyquist Macro:

    • The plugin type is "tool". If it were set as a "generate" type, running the plugin without a track would crash because of the duplicate attempt to create a new track (once from the plug-in being a generate type, and again from the Audacity scripting command).

    • This simplified version does not provide a "Duration" control, so the generated tone will be the length of the selection (if there is a selection), or 30 seconds (default).

    • In the Scripting command, the Waveform parameter must be quoted because its value may include a space. We therefore use ~S rather than ~A in the FORMAT function.

    Importing Scripting Functions

    If you are familiar with Nyquist's LISP syntax, you will have noticed that the syntax described above is not very Lisp-like. The ''magic string'' commands are case sensitive, and constructing the strings is inelegant. However, for many of the scripting commands, a lisp equivalent exists.

    Each of these functions have names beginning '''AUD-''', suffixed with the scripting command name. The scripting command parameters are passed as keyword arguments.

    There is a small performance penalty when using these LISP syntax commands, so for performance critical applications (such as batch processing many small files), it may be preferred to use the AUD-DO versions.''

    In Audacity 2.3.2 and later, the following scripting commands have equivalent LISP functions:

    • Generate menu effects.

    • Built-in effects.

    • Scriptables I.

    • Scriptables II.

    Tip: Remember that Nyquist Macros cannot call Nyquist effects.

    Example: The scripting command for Audacity's built-in "Amplify" effect is:

    Amplify: Ratio=<number>

    The equivalent imported LISP function for Audacity's built-in Amplify effect is:

    (aud-amplify :ratio <number>)

    In both versions, the ratio is a floating point number representing the gain on a linear scale. If we want to Amplify by -3 dB, we can apply the Amplify effect:

    Tip: Although the imported function names, and keys are case insensitive, note that if the keyword value is a string, the value is case sensitive.

    In this next code sample, we reproduce the simple "Tone" generator from above, using the imported AUD-TONE function:

    Length of Generated Sounds

    Unlike Nyquist's generator functions, Audacity's built-in generator functions do not have a parameter for the duration of the sound that is generated. Instead, the duration is set by the length of the track selection. If there is no track selection, then the length defaults to 30 seconds.

    One limitation of Nyquist plugins that we cannot yet work around, is that the plugin UI is not dynamic and cannot be changed programmatically. Where as Audacity's built-in Tone generator will automatically show the length of the selected audio, this is not yet possible for Nyquist plugins. As a compromise solution, we can:

    • Add a "Duration" control.

    • If there is no selection, create a selection of the length specified by the Duration control.

    • If there is a selection, ignore the Duration control and generate into the selection.

    Note: In order to generate audio into a selection, there has to be a ''track'' selection before running the generate command. It is not enough to have a time selection without a track being selected.

    As we want to mimic the behaviour of Audacity's Tone generator, we need to handle cases where:

    1. There is a selection in an audio track.

    2. There is a time selection but no track selection.

    3. There is a track selection but no time selection.

    While is is possible to find what is selected using the scripting command GetInfo:, a simpler way is to use the Nyquist global property list *SELECTION*.

    In Audacity 2.3.0 and later, there is a "[Nyquist_Plug-ins_Widgets#Time_Widget time widget]", which greatly simplifies handling durations, and is in keeping with Audacity's built-in effects.

    ;control duration "Duration" time "" 30 0 nil

    Then we want to check if an audio track is selected, and if not, add a new track. Note that there isn't a LISP function for adding a new track, so we fall back on AUD-DO instead:

    And to handle the time selection:

    Putting It All Together

    The completed Nyquist Macro plug-in:

    Tips

    When using built-in effects or "Scriptable" commands, it is recommended to use the optional LISP functions. Not only are they more Lisp-like and convenient to use, they also provide a little more error checking, which can be very helpful when debugging. Note however that there is a small performance penalty when using these LISP syntax commands. For performance critical applications (such as batch processing many small files), it may be preferred to use the AUD-DO versions.

    Be flexible in your thinking. Scripting commands are available for many, but not all of Audacity's functions. If you need to do something that appears to be missing from the available commands, consider other ways to achieve the desired result.

    If you get stuck, ask for help. As with other aspects of Nyquist programming, support requests may be made on the Nyquist board of the Audacity forum.

    See also:

    Macros
    Nyquist plugin GUI
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Releases · werman/noise-suppression-for-voiceGitHub
    Download page
    MAAT GŌNwww.maat.digital
    Download
    Vamp Pluginswww.vamp-plugins.org
    Logo
    (setq hz 200)
    (setq amplitude 0.5)
    (setq type "Sine")
    
    (setq command (format nil "Tone: Frequency=~a Amplitude=~a Waveform=~s"
                          hz
                          amplitude
                          type))
    
    (aud-do command)
    ;nyquist plug-in
    ;version 4
    ;type tool
    ;name "Nyquist Tone"
    
    ;control type "Waveform" choice "Sine,Square,Sawtooth,Square, no alias" 0
    ;control hz "Frequency" real "Hz" 440 1 10000
    ;control amplitude "Amplitude" real "0 to 1" 0.8 0 1
    
    (case type
      (0 (setf type "Sine"))
      (1 (setf type "Square"))
      (2 (setf type "Sawtooth"))
      (t (setf type "Square, no alias")))
    
    
    (setq command (format nil "Tone: Frequency=~a Amplitude=~a Waveform=~s"
                         hz
                         amplitude
                         type))
    
    (aud-do command)
    (setq val (db-to-linear -3.0))
    (aud-amplify :ratio val)
    ;nyquist plug-in
    ;version 4
    ;type tool
    ;name "Nyquist Tone"
    
    ;control type "Waveform" choice "Sine,Square,Sawtooth,Square, no alias" 0
    ;control hz "Frequency" real "Hz" 440 1 10000
    ;control amplitude "Amplitude" real "0 to 1" 0.8 0 1
    
    (case type
      (0 (setf type "Sine"))
      (1 (setf type "Square"))
      (2 (setf type "Sawtooth"))
      (t (setf type "Square, no alias")))
    
    (aud-tone :frequency hz :amplitude amplitude :waveform type)
    (get '*selection* 'start)   ;start of time selection in seconds
    (get '*selection* 'end)     ;end of time selection in seconds
    (get '*selection* 'tracks)  ;list of selected tracks. NIL if no audio tracks selected
    (unless (get '*selection* 'tracks)
      (aud-do "NewMonoTrack:"))
    (let ((start (get '*selection* 'start))
          (end (get '*selection* 'end)))
      (unless (> (- end start) 0)
        (aud-selecttime :end duration :relativeto "SelectionStart")))
    ;nyquist plug-in
    ;version 4
    ;type tool
    ;name "Nyquist Tone"
    
    ;control type "Waveform" choice "Sine,Square,Sawtooth,Square, no alias" 0
    ;control hz "Frequency" real "Hz" 440 1 10000
    ;control amplitude "Amplitude" real "0 to 1" 0.8 0 1
    ;control duration "Duration" time "" 30 0 nil
    
    (case type
      (0 (setf type "Sine"))
      (1 (setf type "Square"))
      (2 (setf type "Sawtooth"))
      (t (setf type "Square, no alias")))
    
    ;; A track is required so that we can make a selection.
    (unless (get '*selection* 'tracks)
      (aud-do "NewMonoTrack:"))
    
    ;; A selection is required to set the length of the generated tone.
    ;; Use the current selection if there is one, otherwise select user supplied value.
    (let ((start (get '*selection* 'start))
          (end (get '*selection* 'end)))
      (unless (> (- end start) 0)
        (aud-selecttime :end duration :relativeto "SelectionStart")))
    
    ;; Now generate the tone.
    (aud-tone :frequency hz :amplitude amplitude :waveform type)
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo

    Delay and Reverb

    A delay effect is similar to an echo, in that the sound is repeated (after a brief time delay) one or more times after the original sound.

    Bouncing Ball Delay

    A delay plugin where, like a bouncing ball, the bounces get faster and faster.

    797B
    bouncingball.ny
    Open
    Download link
    Details

    Author:

    A delay plugin where, like a bouncing ball, the bounces get faster and faster. You can set time that the bounces increase in speed with each delay, the number of bounces, and how much in dB the sound decreases with each bounce.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount [dB]: how much quieter each bounce is.

    2. Delay time [seconds]:

    3. Number of bounces [times]:

    Note: The latest available delay plugin in Audacity includes bouncing ball delay and pitch shifting. but not panning.

    Bouncing Ball Delay with Panning

    Combines the with a panning effect.

    Details

    Author:

    Combines the Bouncing Ball Delay with a panning effect. A delay effect in which the echo get faster, like a bouncing ball. Each echo is panned further from center by the designated amount.

    This plugin has bugs and may produce unpredictable results with some settings, but is basically functional.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount

    Bouncing Ball Delay with Tone Shift

    Combines the with Tone Shift plugins.

    Details

    Author:

    Combines the Bouncing Ball Delay and Delay with Tone Shift plugins. A delay effect in which the echoes get faster, like a bouncing ball. Each echo is shifted in pitch by the designated amount in semitones plus cents (hundredths of a semitone).

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount [dB]:

    Reverse Bouncing Ball Delay

    The fastest bounces come first, gradually slowing down - reverse of the effect.

    Details

    Author:

    The fastest bounces come first, gradually slowing down - reverse of the bouncing ball delay effect. Includes normalisation. Note: The latest available delay plugin 3 in includes reverse bouncing ball delay without normalisation, and also includes pitch shifting.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount: [0.00 - 5.00 dB, default 0.50]

    Reverse Bouncing Ball Delay with Tone Shift

    The fastest bounces come first - reverse of the , and each bounce is tone shifted.

    Details

    Author:

    The fastest bounces come first - reverse of the bouncing ball delay, and each bounce is tone shifted. Note: The latest available delay plugin in Audacity includes reverse bouncing ball delay and pitch shifting.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount: [0.00 - 5.00 dB, default 0.05]

    Chimes delay

    Adds random delay to your audio, and randomly changes the pitch of each delay if you specify a note list.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    Based on chimesdelay.ny by

    Adds random delay to your audio, and randomly changes the pitch of each delay if you specify a note list (which is where the name 'Chimes Delay' comes from).

    Each number in the note list indicates how many semitones your audio should be pitch shifted (along with matching tempo shift). For example, 0 indicates no pitch shift, 12 indicates a rise of 12 semitones (one octave), -5 indicates drop of 5 semitones (like going from C down to G below that C note).

    Example: If the audio you have loaded into Audacity is C3, the above note list would randomly produce the following major-sounding notes:

    C1 C2 G2 C3 E3 G3 C4 D4 G4

    Delay BPM with Panning

    Applies a delay effect based on a specified tempo (beats per minute), with optional panning and filtering of the delayed sound.

    Details

    Author: Felipe Zanabria (based on code by Steve Daulton)

    Applies a delay effect based on a specified tempo (beats per minute), with optional panning and filtering of the delayed sound. Requires a stereo track.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay: [0 - 24 dB, default -6dB] - how much quieter each subsequent delay is.

    Delay with High-Pass Filter

    Applies a high-pass filter to a delay so that with each subsequent delay, the filter's cut-off frequency is increased.

    Details

    Author:

    Applies a high-pass filter to a delay so that with each subsequent delay, the filter's cut-off frequency is increased. A high-pass filter attenuates sound below a given cut off frequency, therefore when this plugin is applied, each delay sounds increasingly thin and lacking bass. Applied to a voice, it makes each delay sounds like it's increasingly coming from a telephone.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount: [0 - 24 dB, default zero] - how much quieter each subsequent delay is

    Delay with Low-Pass Filter

    Applies a low-pass filter to a delay so that with each subsequent delay, the filter's cut-off frequency is reduced.

    Details

    Author:

    Applies a low-pass filter to a delay so that with each subsequent delay, the filter's cut-off frequency is reduced. A low-pass filter attenuates sound above a given cut off frequency, therefore when this plugin is applied, each delay sounds to have increasing bass. To the author, this has the psychoacoustic effect of each delay sounding further and further away.

    Based on an effect heard in a popular Cher tune in the late 1990s or later.

    Parameters:

    Delay with Pitch Change

    A delay plugin except, each delay is pitch shifted.

    Details

    Author:

    A delay plugin except, each delay is pitch shifted. Note that pitch changes are accompanied by a corresponding change in duration of each delay.

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount: [0 - 24 dB, default 0]

    Delay with Stereo Flip

    This is a stereo delay effect: with each delay, the stereo channels are flipped from left to right and vice versa.

    Details

    Author:

    This is a stereo delay effect: with each delay, the stereo channels are flipped from left to right and vice versa. Inspired by a sound effect heard in the opening track of Mike Oldfield's "Songs From Distant Earth."

    Parameters:

    1. Decay amount: [0 - 24 dB]

    Delay with Tone Shift

    Similar to pitchshift.ny except you can define in semitones how much each delay is to be pitch shifted.

    Details

    Author:

    Similar to pitchshift.ny except you can define in semitones how much each delay is to be pitch shifted. A shift of 1 semitone means each delay is increased in pitch by 1 semitone, a shift of -1 means a decrease of 1 semitone. Includes whole semitones plus semitone cents (hundredths of a semitone).

    Both plugins are best applied to relatively short duration audio, or few number of delays for longer audio. Otherwise Audacity will be working a long time. Same thing seems to happen if there is already pitch shifting within the audio.

    Dynamics Processing

    Broadcast Limiter II

    Gives you the possibility to overdrive an audio track without introducing ugly digital distortion noise.

    145KB
    RFT-Limiter-II.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Details

    Author: Edgar-rft

    Gives you the possibility to overdrive an audio track without introducing ugly digital distortion noise. The Limiter cuts all peaks above the given threshold, rounds the edges to reduce ugly distortion, while simultaneously amplifying the whole track to the maximum limit. This is a "soft clipping" effect.

    Parameters:

    1. Threshold: sets the 'cutting edge' in a linear volume number from 0.0 to 1.0

    The minimum threshold is -90dB, so you can set the threshold slider to 0.0 and listen to 1-bit of a 16-bit recording if you want. The plugin has no memory limits, it can process audio tracks of several hours in length without problems.

    Broadcast Limiter III

    Similar to Broadcast Limiter II with an added Exciter

    Details

    Author: Edgar-rft

    Is in principle a similar "soft clipping" effect as , but adds an Exciter to control or intensify the high-range distortion. This function is often desired by musicians to make e.g. electric guitars or drum sets sound more aggressive.

    Parameters:

    1. Exciter: controls the high-range distortion in linear numbers from 1 to 10

    Hyperexp

    The Hyperexp effect is a type of compression.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    The Hyperexp effect is a type of compression. High amplitude sections of approximately unity are relatively unchanged. Low amplitude sections are greatly amplified. The effect is a partial nullification of the amplitude envelope. There is one parameter, which is to choose to normalize or not, the default choice being "yes".

    Level Speech

    This effect is designed to mitigate problems in speech recordings where there are very large variations in the loudness / amplitude of the recorded voice or voices.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This effect is designed to mitigate problems in speech recordings where there are very large variations in the loudness / amplitude of the recorded voice or voices. A typical situation might be a conference recording where one person's voice is much louder than the other people present.

    Technically, it is a special kind of "dynamic range compression" effect, to "level" out variations in amplitude (reduce dynamic range), particularly for speech recordings. Usage of the effect is greatly simplified compared to most traditional compressor effect, by combining control of all of the effect parameters into a single "Leveling Amount" control.

    Parameters:

    Limiter (Audacity <3.6)

    Use the Limiter effect to pass signals below a specified input level unaffected or gently reduced, while preventing the peaks of stronger signals from exceeding this threshold. Mastering engineers often use limiting combined with make-up gain to increase the perceived loudness of an audio recording during the audio mastering process.

    This limiter effect provides two basic types of effect; "limiting" and "clipping". The "limiting" effect is a special kind of that responds very rapidly to peaks in the waveform. The "clipping" effect is a kind of that changes the shape of the waves by "clipping" off the high and low peaks.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    Usage:

    Type

    Soft Limit (default) progressively reduces the as the amplitude of the waveform approaches the threshold and prevents the waveform from exceeding that level.

    Limiter (legacy)

    A "lookahead" dynamic range limiter to compress peaks that extend beyond the set threshold value.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton.

    A "lookahead" dynamic range limiter to compress peaks that extend beyond the set threshold value. This is not a "wave shaper", it is a very fast compressor and is able to limit the maximum peaks with minimal harmonic distortion.

    This limiter is an ideal choice for peak limiting live music recordings due to the exceptionally low harmonic distortion. For best results the audio should be normalized to 0 dB before applying this effect.

    Parameters:

    Limiter (2)

    The same as except that the make up gain control is a multi-choice selection rather than a slider.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton.

    The same as except that the make up gain control is a multi-choice selection rather than a slider.

    Parameters:

    1. Limit to (dB): (-10 dB to 0 dB)

    Noise Gate

    Noise Gates may be used to cut the level of noise between sections of a recording.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton.

    Noise Gates may be used to cut the level of noise between sections of a recording. While this is essentially a very simple effect, this Noise Gate has a number of features and settings that allow it to be both effective and unobtrusive and well suited to most types of audio.

    Parameters:

    1. Select Function: [Apply the Noise Gate effect | Test the noise level | View one of the Help screens].

    This effect requires the entire audio selection to be loaded into RAM. If there is insufficient available memory, the plugin and Audacity will crash. The maximum length that can be processed is dependent on the sample rate, length of audio selection, operating system, and available RAM. Please test carefully before using this effect on long (> 45 minutes) tracks to verify the limits on your computer.

    Pop Mute

    The effect is like an "upside-down" . Whereas a attenuates sounds that are below a specified threshold level, Pop Mute attenuates sounds that are above a specified threshold level.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    The effect is like an "upside-down" . Whereas a attenuates sounds that are below a specified threshold level, Pop Mute attenuates sounds that are above a specified threshold level. The effect can be used to heavily attenuate loud sounds. It may be useful for rescuing recordings that suffer from loud clicks or pops.

    Sounds (such as 'pops') that have a peak level above the 'Threshold' level will be lowered to a 'residual' level set by the 'Mute Level'. Be aware that ALL sounds above the threshold will be affected. Take care to avoid selecting loud sounds that should not be muted.

    The effect 'looks ahead' for peaks so that it can begin to lower the level of the sound smoothly a short time before the peak occurs. This is set by the 'Look ahead' time value. After the peak has passed, the level will smoothly return to normal over a period set by the 'Release time' setting.

    Text Envelope

    Provides an alternative to the "Envelope Tool" that is accessible for visually impaired and other users that do not use pointing devices

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton.

    Provides an alternative to the "Envelope Tool" that is accessible for visually impaired and other users that do not use pointing devices. This effect provides a means to shape the volume level of a track or selection by fading from one control point level to the next. Control points are defined by a pair of numbers, the first of which sets the time position of the control point and the second defines the amplification level. Initial and final amplification settings may also be defined. Help screens are available in the 'Select Function' control of this effect.

    Parameters:

    1. Select function:

    TAL Software GmbHtal-reverb-4
    Download link
    Voxengo OldSkoolVerb - Free Vintage Reverb Plugin VST, AU, AAXVoxengo
    Download link
    OrilRiver by Denis TihanovKVR Audio
    Download link
    Valhalla Super Massive - Valhalla DSPValhalla DSP
    Download link
    Protoverb: Experimental research reverbu-he.com
    EQ560 10-Band Graphic EqualizerRed Rock Sound
    Download page
    EQ302 32 Band EqualiserRed Rock Sound
    Download page
    Voxengo Marvel GEQ - Free Graphic Equalizer Plugin, 16-Band VST, AU, AAXVoxengo
    Download page
    Fuse Audio Labs | Audio Plugins and Mobile Audio Appsfuseaudiolabs.de
    Download page
    [dB]:
  • Delay time [seconds]:

  • Number of bounces [times]:

  • Pan spread movement [move]: - defines the extent to which each bounce will be increasingly far from center

  • Note: The latest available delay plugin in Audacity includes bouncing ball delay and pitch shifting, but not panning.

    Delay time [seconds]:

  • Number of bounces [times]:

  • Tone shift (whole) [semitones]:

  • Tone shift (cents) [cents]:

  • Notes:

    1. The value for the decay amount (in dB) for an increasing pitch can be left at the default 0. However, with decreasing pitch, the lengths of the delays increase over time, overlapping with each other. In this case, clipping can occur if the decay value is left at 0.

    2. Note: The latest available delay plugin in Audacity includes bouncing ball delay and pitch shifting.

    Delay time: [0.01 - 1.00 seconds, default 0.05]

  • Number of bounces: [1 - 100, default 15]

  • Delay time: [0.01 - 1.00 seconds, default 0.02]

  • Number of bounces: [1 - 100, default 15]

  • Tone shift (whole): [-24 - +24 semitones, default -1]

  • Tone shift (cents): [-100 - +100, default 0]

  • If you delete this note list, a list of notes will be generated between a lower and upper number. The default values of these two numbers are -12 semitones (decrease of 1 octave) and +24 semitones (increase of 2 octaves) respectively.

    If your audio is stereo, each random delay with random volume and pitch change will also be randomly panned anywhere between left and right. (It is best that your audio is first panned to center before applying Chimes Delay.)

    Tips:

    • Adding a bit of regular delay and/or other effects before applying Chimes Delay results in a richer sound.

    • If you want a particular note (from the note list) to be repeated more often, you can enter it more than once in the list.

    • If you simply want your audio randomly delayed with no multiple pitch changes, either enter just one number into the note list, or enter the same number into the minimum and maximum notes fields.

    • It is possible that total length of your resulting audio will be maximum delay time *plus* the duration of your original audio. This may be still longer if the final delay(s) is/are decreased in pitch (resulting in a reduced tempo).

    Warning: If your original audio is non-musical, Chimes Delay will not make it musical!

    Parameters:

    1. Chimes note list: [default list: -24 -12 -5 0 4 7 12 14 19]

    2. Minimum note: [semitones from -12 to +48]

    3. Maximum note: [semitones from -12 to +48]

    4. Maximum delay time: [seconds from 0.5 to 120] - the maximum delay of the random delays

    5. Minimum volume: [percentage] - the minimum random volume that each random delay can have. If you want no random amplitude changes, set this field to 100 percent.

    6. Number of chime delays: [from 1 to 100] - how many delays within the maximum delay time.

    Acknowledgement due to Steven Jones whose "Harmonic Noise" generator plugin is the source for Nyquist code to handle a string-input note list (David Sky's original version only).

    Tempo: [1 - 500 bpm, default 120 bpm] - Specifies the tempo for the delay.

  • Note values: [Choice: "Half note" to "Sixty-fourth note", default "Eighth note"] - Acts as a tempo multiplier. The default "Eighth note" produces echoes at "double tempo", whereas "Sixteenth Note" would produce echoes at 4x the tempo setting.

  • Number of echoes": [1 - 100, default 5]

  • Pan spread": [-1 to +1, default 0] - the amount of side to side panning of the echoes. When positive, the echo is initially panned to the right. When negative, the echo is initially panned to the left. Subsequent echoes pan side to side. When zero, the echo is mono at the center of the stereo mix.

  • Optional filters: [Choice: None, High pass, Low pass, Band pass. Default: None]

  • Filter frequency: [10 - 10000 Hz, default 1000 Hz] - The filter frequency (if enabled).

  • Filter width (bandpass only): [0 - 10000 Hz, default 1500 Hz] - If the optional "Band Pass" filter is selected, the "Filter frequency" is the center frequency of the filter, and this control sets the width (in Hz).

  • Wet level: [-24 - 0 dB, default 0 dB] - Reduces the level of each echo.

  • Note that this effect does not extend the selected audio. If you require space for echoes after the end of the track, the selection must be made long enough to accommodate the final echoes.

    Delay time: [0 - 5 seconds, default 0.5]

  • Number of echoes: [1 - 30, default 10]

  • Start cut-off frequency: [100 - 5000, default 1000] - the high-pass cut-off frequency at the start of the delay.

  • Cut-off increase: [octaves, 0.1 - 5.0, default 0.5] - how much to increase the filter cut-off point with each delay.

  • Decay amount: [0 - 24 dB, default zero] - how much quieter each subsequent delay is
  • Delay time: [0 - 5 seconds, default 0.5]

  • Number of echoes: [1 - 30, default 10]

  • Start cut-off frequency: [100 - 20000, default 1000] - the low-pass cut-off frequency at the start of the delay.

  • Cut-off reduction: [octaves, 0.1 - 5.0, default 0.5] - how much to reduce the filter cut-off point with each delay.

  • Normalization level: [0 - 1.0, default 0.95]

  • Delay time: [0 - 5 seconds, default 0.5]

  • Number of echoes: [1 - 30, default 10]

  • Pitch change factor: [1.001 - 3.0, default 1.1]

  • Pitch: increase or decrease: [default = increase] - whether each delay is increased or decreased in pitch

  • Normalization level: [0.0 - 1.0, default 0.95]

  • Delay time: [0 - 5 seconds]

  • number of delays: [1 - 100]

  • Normalization level: [0 - 1, default 0.95]

  • David R.Sky
    Bouncing Ball Delay
    2KB
    Bbdelay.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    Bouncing Ball Delay
    1KB
    bbdtone.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    Bouncing Ball Delay
    1KB
    delayreb.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    Audacity
    Bouncing Ball Delay
    1KB
    rbbdtone.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    Chimesdelay3.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    3KB
    Delay-bpm.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1KB
    hpdelay.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    lpdelay.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    delaypit.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    delayfli.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    963B
    tonedelay.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky

    Threshold: sets the 'cutting edge' in a linear volume number from 0.0 to 1.0

    The plugin has no memory limits, it can process audio tracks of several hours in length without problems.\

    Leveling Amount (%): (0 to 100% default 50%) Higher values produce a stronger effect.

    Hard Limit makes no change to the audio until the peaks reach the "Limit to (dB)" threshold. Where the input level (after applying optional input gain) exceeds the threshold, an equal amount of negative gain is applied so that the peaks never exceed the threshold.

    Hard Clipping is the simplest method for reducing peaks. It just chops off the peaks at the "Limit to" threshold. Note that clipping causes distortion. Hard clipping may be useful for purposefully introducing distortion on high peaks, for example to add high harmonics to percussive sounds. Excessive use of hard clipping creates a harsh distortion that is usually unpleasant. For heavier use of distortion the "Soft Clipping" option may be preferable. Hard clipping may also be useful for producing synthetic signals for scientific purposes.

    Soft Clipping works in much the same way as "Hard Clipping", but is less fierce in that it "squashes" the peaks rather than cutting them off flat. Soft clipping starts to reduce the peaks a little below the threshold level and progressively increases its effect as the input level increases such that the threshold is never exceeded. When applied heavily, the effect is similar to a "Fuzz Box" effect.

    The difference between "Hard" and "Soft" clipping is that "Hard" clipping cuts off the peaks flat, whereas "Soft" clipping rounds the corners where the waveform has been clipped, resulting in a softer sounding distortion.

    Input Gain

    Amplifies the audio before applying the limiter.

    As the limiter acts on audio peaks that exceed the Limit to (dB) threshold, it will clearly have little or no effect on audio tracks in which all of the audio is below the threshold level. In such cases, the audio should be amplified before limiting so that the limiter can work properly. Amplification could be applied using Audacity's Amplify effect, or more conveniently using the "Input Gain" controls.

    For mono tracks, only the "mono/Left" gain control has any affect. For stereo tracks the left and right channel gains may be adjusted independently of each other.

    Limit to (dB)

    Limits the amplitude (after optional amplifying) to this level.

    Whichever type is selected, the limiter prevents the waveform from exceeding this level. (Note that makeup gain, if used, is applied to the waveform after it has been limited.)

    Hold

    This applies only to the "Hard Limiter" and "Soft Limiter" settings. It has no effect when using either of the "Clip" settings.

    In order to catch even the most sudden peak, the limiter "looks ahead" to see when the next peak is coming, and begins to reduce the gain just a little in advance of the peak. The gain level is then held at the reduced level for a short while before being released back to the normal level. Looking ahead and holding the gain level allows the gain to adjust more smoothly and reduces the amount of distortion. The shorter the "Hold" duration, the faster the limiter responds to changes in input level. It is generally desirable for the limiter to respond very rapidly, but responding too rapidly will produce distortion, especial when processing low frequency sounds such as a double bass.

    Normally this control can be left at the default (10 ms) setting.

    Apply makeup gain

    Amplifies the output (post limiter) close to 0 dB (usually just a little below 0 dB). This is useful when using the limiter to maximize loudness.

    Basically, a limiter reduces the gain (negative amplification) when the audio exceeds the "threshold" ("Limit to") level. The "Hold" time is how long (in milliseconds) the gain remains at the reduced level before returning back to normal. Usually you would want the gain to return back to normal pretty quickly after the peak has passed because you normally only want to limit the peaks and then return back to normal as quickly as possible. However, there is a problem if the limiter responds too quickly, and this is most noticeable when processing bass instruments.

    If there is a very low note, say below 100 Hz, then the time from one peak to the next may be longer than the "hold" time. Thus the gain will start to reduce as the peak level rises, then will start to "release" (return to normal gain) between one peak and the next. This rapid "fluttering" of the gain level distorts the waveform, which is usually undesirable. The solution to the problem is simple - just hold the gain at the reduced level for a little while so that the limiter is responding to the overall shape of the note and not the individual waveform peaks.

    Limit to (dB): (-10 dB to 0 dB) Sets the maximum peak level. As peaks in the original audio approach this level the gain is reduced so as to prevent the peaks exceeding the set level.
  • Hold (ms): (1 to 50 ms Default = 10 ms) Holds the gain at the reduced level after a peak is detected so as to prevent the gain from "riding the waveform" which would cause harmonic distortion.

  • Make-up Gain (0=No, 1=Yes): (Default = 1) When enabled (set to 1) the output is amplified by an amount equal to the "Limit" level. If the input audio has a peak level of 0 dB, the peak output level will also be 0 dB. When disabled the peaks are limited only.

  • Shorter Hold times allow the peaks to be tracked more accurately and the limiter will respond faster to the dynamics. If there are high levels of very low bass it will be necessary to increase the Hold time to avoid distortion. The default 10 ms hold time is sufficient for frequencies down to 100 Hz without distortion. To cleanly limit high amplitude, very low frequency bass (down to 50 Hz) the Hold should be increased to 20 ms. Setting the hold to 50 ms is sufficient right down to 20 Hz but the delay before the gain level "recovers" is likely to be too slow for most material.

    Additional notes:

    • Threshold level: The Limit to (dB) control has a range of -10 dB to 0 dB. The effect is not designed to work beyond this range. When set to 0 dB there will be no change to the audio (though any over 0 dB audio will be clipped). If set below -10 dB the knee will be so soft that all of the audio will be compressed, not just the peaks.

    • Stereo Tracks: As is normal for this type of effect, the left/right channels of a stereo track are processed independently.

    • Lookahead: The limiter looks ahead for peaks and will begin to change the gain just before the peak occurs. This ensures that all peaks, no matter how fast they occur, will be caught. The lookahead time is roughly a quarter of the hold time.

    • Knee: The "hardness" of the knee depends on the threshold (Limit To) level. When the threshold is close to zero a hard knee is used but as the threshold is lowered the knee becomes softer so as to provide a smooth transition in gain level even with a very fast attack time. A typical threshold level of around -3 dB will have a relatively "soft knee" so as to avoid unnecessary distortion. That is, the amount of compression (compression ratio) progressively increases as the input gets louder. At the "Limit to" level the compression ratio is infinite (brick wall) which ensures that peaks will not exceed the limit.

    • Creative use: The limiter can be used on its own, or can be used to limit peaks after running a compressor that does not use lookahead (such as the SC4 LADSPA compressor). This can produce "crisper" compression than using a lookahead compressor such as the standard Audacity compressor or Chris's dynamics compressor.

    • Over 0 dB input: The input waveform should not exceed 0 dB. Over 0 dB input signals are treated as illegal and will be hard clipped to 0 dB before processing with the limiter. If necessary, the Amplify or Normalize effects should be run before applying this limiter to ensure that the input does not exceed 0 dB.

    Hold (ms): (1 ms to 50 ms Default = 10 ms)

  • Apply Make-up Gain: [No, Yes (default)]

  • Stereo Linking: [Link Stereo Tracks (gate audio when both channels fall below the gate threshold)| Don't Link Stereo (gate channels independently)]

  • Apply Low-Cut filter: [No (Do not apply filter) | 10Hz 6dB/octave | 20Hz 6dB/octave] Removes sub-sonic frequencies including DC offset.

  • Gate frequencies above: [0 kHz to 10 kHz] Applies the gate only to frequencies above the set level which may be useful for reducing tape hiss, but will also introduce some 'phase shift'. Setting this below 0.1 kHz will switch this feature off.

  • Level reduction: [-100 dB to 0 dB] How much the gated sections are reduced in volume. Values below -96 dB 'shut' the gate to produce absolute silence.

  • Gate threshold: [-96 dB to -6 dB] When the audio level drops below this threshold the gate will 'close' and the output level will be reduced. When the audio level rises above this threshold the gate will 'open' and the output will return to the same level as the input.

  • Attack/Decay: [10 to 1000 milliseconds] How quickly the gate opens and closes. At the minimum (10 ms) the gate will fully open and close almost instantly as the audio level crosses the threshold. At the maximum (1000 ms), the gate will begin to slowly open (fade-in) 1 second before the sound level exceeds the Threshold, and will gradually close (fade-out) after the sound level drops below the Threshold over a period of 1 second.

  • For more detailed information and usage tips, read the help file included in this ZIP package, or the help screens included in the plugin.

    To attenuate brief clicks, time values of around 5 ms are likely to work well. For larger pops, values of 10 ms or more may sound better. For reverberant sounds such as hand claps, the 'Release time' may be increased so as to catch some of the reverberation.

    Parameters:

    1. View Help: [No | Yes] (default "No") View the built-in help screen.

    2. Threshold: [-24 dB to 0 dB] (default -6 dB) This is the level above which sounds are acted on (reduced in level)

    3. Mute Level: [-100 dB to 0 dB] (default -24 dB) How much to reduce the peak level by.

    4. Look ahead: [1 to 100 milliseconds] (default 10 millisecond) How far to look ahead for the next "pop" or "crackle".

    5. Release time: [1 to 1000 milliseconds] (default 10 millisecond) How rapidly to "release" the effect and return to normal volume after the pop has passed.

    [choices: Apply Effect, View Quick Help, View Examples, View Tips. Default = "Apply Effect"]
  • Time Units: [choices: milliseconds, seconds, minutes, percent. Default = seconds]

  • Amplification Units: [choices: dB or Percent. Default = dB]

  • Initial Amplification [Numeric input. Default = none]

  • Final Amplification [Numeric input. Default = none]

  • Intermediate Control Points as pairs of time and amplification [Pairs of numbers. Default = none]

  • Note: Decimal values must use a dot as the decimal separator.

    143KB
    RFT-Limiter-III.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Broadcast Limiter II
    866B
    hyperexp.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    2KB
    LevelSpeech.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    dynamic compression
    distortion
    5KB
    limiter.ny
    Open
    gain
    "Limit to (dB)"
    1KB
    Limiter.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Limiter
    1KB
    Limiter2.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Limiter
    9KB
    Noisegate.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Noise Gate
    Noise Gate
    3KB
    Popmute.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Noise Gate
    Noise Gate
    11KB
    TextEnvelope.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo

    Amplify, Mix and Pan Effects

    Amplify Left or Right Channel

    Amplify or attenuate a single audio channel (Left or Right) from a stereo track

    Details

    Author:

    If you have a stereo track and want to amplify or attenuate one channel only without using the mouse, this plugin will do it.

    Parameters:

    1. Channel 0=left channel, 1=right channel (default 0).

    2. Volume [dB]: amplify or attenuate the channel (default 0 dB, no change in volume).

    Bass to Center

    Frequency-selective filter to crossfeed (mix) bass frequencies to center (mono). Requires stereo tracks

    Details

    Author: Jvo Studer.

    Frequency-selective filter to crossfeed (mix) bass frequencies to center (mono). Requires stereo tracks.

    Simulates the "Elliptic EQ" filter found on vinyl mastering consoles by means of a first order high-pass filter in the side-channel (L-R difference). This is useful to bring the bass drum (or beat in electronic music) to the center. If bass frequencies are partially out of phase there will be some bass loss which can be compensated for with the Bass Boost shelf filter (typically +0.5 dB to +2 dB will be sufficient).

    Parameters:

    1. Crossover Frequency: [10 - 500 Hz, default = 150]

    2. Bass Feed Proportion: [20 - 100 %, default 95]

    3. Bass Boost: [0 - 6 dB, default 0.5]

    Center Pan Remover

    Removes center-panned content in stereo tracks by inverting and making mono

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Removes center-panned content in stereo tracks by inverting and making mono. Can be used to mitigate vocals in music tracks if the vocals are panned to center. Optionally you can choose a band of frequencies to invert, rather than the whole channel. This may be less destructive of the content panned away from center. The resulting audio retains two channels, but sounds mono because both channels are panned to center.

    Parameters:

    1. Invert band or channel: [0="band", 1="channel", default = channel]

    2. Remove frequencies above...: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 500]

    3. Remove frequencies below...: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 2000]

    Channel Mixer

    A multi-purpose tool that can perform almost any type of channel mixing task on an unsplit stereo track.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton.

    A multi-purpose tool that can perform almost any type of channel mixing task on an unsplit stereo track.

    Typical uses include:

    • Copying one channel of a stereo track to the other channel

    • Converting a stereo track into 2 channel mono

    • Stereo "widening" (or narrowing)

    • Swapping left and right channels of a stereo track

    • Vocal Removal

    • decoding.

    The plugin has 15 presets for the above and similar tasks. If the presets are not used, custom values for the mix of original left and right channel in the left and right outputs can be entered in the parameters as listed below. All values are percentages with a possible range of -100% to +100% and all default to zero value.

    <-- LEFT CHANNEL OUTPUT -->

    1. from original Left channel (%):

    2. from original Right channel (%): <-- RIGHT CHANNEL OUTPUT -->

    3. from original Left channel (%):

    4. from original Right channel (%):

    This download also includes a comprehensive 'FAQ' help file.

    List of Presets:

    1. Mono (Average): Creates identical left and right with 50% from the Left channel and 50% from the Right channel.

    2. Mono (Both Left): Makes both channels the same as the original Left channel.

    3. Mono (Both Right): Makes both channels the same as the original Right channel.

    4. Extra Narrow: Almost mono but retains a little stereo separation.

    Cross Fade In

    Cross Fade In applies a "curved" fade that is different from the linear Fade in that will result in equal RMS volume throughout the faded section when used in conjunction with the Cross Fade Out effect to perform a crossfade.

    Details

    Author: [multiple contributions]

    Despite the name this effect does not perform an automatic "crossfade" between two tracks or adjoining audio. Instead Cross Fade In applies a "curved" fade that is different from the linear Fade in. The curve used is one that will result in equal RMS (average) volume throughout the faded section when used in conjunction with the "Cross Fade Out" effect, to perform a crossfade.

    Cross Fade Out

    Cross Fade Out applies a "curved" fade that is different from the linear Fade Out. The curve used is one that will result in equal RMS (average) volume throughout the faded section when used in conjunction with the Cross Fade In effect, to perform a crossfade.

    Details

    Cross Fade Out applies a "curved" fade that is different from the linear Fade Out. The curve used is one that will result in equal RMS (average) volume throughout the faded section when used in conjunction with the Cross Fade In effect, to perform a crossfade.

    Fade In and Out

    Define the length of fade-in and fade-out selections without using a mouse or cursor keys.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Define the length of fade-in and fade-out selections without using a mouse or cursor keys. Note Audacity has a Selection Toolbar providing a screen-reader friendly display of selection start time and duration which you could use for similar purpose.

    Parameters:

    1. Fade in time: [seconds, maximum 30]

    2. Fade out time: [seconds, maximum 30]

    Panning

    This plugin will statically pan your stereo audio anywhere between left and right channels.

    Details

    Authors: David R.Sky, Dominic Mazzoni

    Audacity lets you pan with the keyboard instead of the mouse, but if you prefer the pan to modify the waveform immediately, this plugin will statically pan your stereo audio anywhere between left and right channels. There is only one parameter:

    1. Pan position: [0=left, 1=right, default is 0.5 (center-panned)]

    Panning (LFO)

    Panning is controlled by a low frequency oscillator

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Panning is controlled by a low frequency oscillator. Only works on unsplit stereo tracks. Pan the audio to center before use for best results.

    Parameters:

    1. LFO frequency: [Hz, 0.02 - 20, default 0.1]

    2. LFO waveform: [sine, triangle, saw, inverted saw, pulse]

    3. Pulse waveform duty cycle: [percent, default 50]

    4. LFO starting phase: [degrees, -180 - +180, default 0]

    5. Leftmost pan position: [percent, default 5] - 0%=left channel, 50%=center, 100%=right channel

    6. Rightmost pan position: [percent, default 95] - 0%=left channel, 50%=center, 100%=right channel

    Panning (random)

    Randomly pans stereo audio from one side of the stereo field to the other

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Randomly pans stereo audio from one side of the stereo field to the other - just like someone is playing around with the panning knob. Requires an unsplit stereo track.

    Parameters:

    1. Maximum random panning speed: [Hz, 0.01 - 10.00, default 0.2] - how fast the random panning changes occur

    2. Maximum stereo width: [percent, 0 - 100, default 100] - how far away from center the signal is panned. 0% gives no panning, 100% results in the signal being randomly panned between hard left and hard right pan positions.

    Pseudo-Stereo

    Creates an artificial stereo effect that can be useful for giving some "depth" to mono recordings.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A stereo spatializer effect. Creates an artificial stereo effect that can be useful for giving some "depth" to mono recordings. Mono tracks must be converted to a 2 channel track before using the effect. To do so, click above the Mute and Solo buttons in the Track Control Panel, choose Edit > Duplicate then click on the name of the upper track and select "Make Stereo Track" from the dropdown menu.

    Parameters:

    1. Select source channel: [Left (upper) or Right (lower)]

    2. Delay factor (%): [0 to 100, default 30] Higher values will produce a wider stereo effect but may sound echoey.

    3. Effect mix (%): [0 to 100, default 80] 0% = Dry (original signal with no effect), 100% = Wet (effect and no original signal). Higher settings will produce a more pronounced stereo effect but may leave a "hole" in the center of the stereo field. Lower values produce a more subtle effect with the original signal centered mid-stage.

    Ramp Panning

    Evenly pan your stereo audio, starting at one point in the stereo field and ending at another.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Evenly pan your stereo audio, starting at one point in the stereo field and ending at another. -10 corresponds to 100% left, 0 to center and +10 to 100% right.

    Parameters:

    1. Start position: from [where -10 - +10, default -10]

    2. End position: from [where -10 - +10, default +10]

    Repair Channel

    For repairing damage to one channel of a stereo track by overwriting the damaged region with audio from the other channel

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    For repairing damage to one channel of a stereo track by overwriting the damaged region with audio from the other channel. Select the damaged audio and allow additional space for cross-fading, then apply the effect.

    The plugin includes an option for Stereo Simulation which will often make repairs to stereo recordings less noticeable. For tracks that have little or no stereo channel separation and for synthesized tones, best results will probably be achieved with Stereo Simulation disabled.

    Parameters:

    1. Which Channel to Repair: [Left Channel or Right Channel] The upper channel of a stereo pair is the Left channel.

    2. Stereo Simulation: [Enabled or Disabled]

    3. Cross-fade Time: [0% to 50%] 0% will cut directly from one channel to the other without fading. At 50% the fades will occupy the entire selection. For the default 20% fade, the selection should be at least 40% longer than the actual damage to be repaired.

    Stereo Butterfly (static)

    The original Stereo Butterfly plugin which can be spread wide (1, full stereo), closed (0, sounding mono), or somewhere in-between

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    The original Stereo Butterfly plugin, the name coming from a butterfly's wings, which can be spread wide (1, full stereo), closed (0, sounding mono), or somewhere in-between. Stereo Butterfly can even mirror the left and right channels (-1... the butterfly's flipped!). And also anywhere between the extremes from -1 to 1.

    Parameters:

    1. Stereo width [width, between -1.0 and +1.0]

    Stereo Butterfly (LFO)

    Second in the Stereo Butterfly series. It takes stereo audio and makes it sound like the left and right channels are switching back and forth with each other.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Second in the Stereo Butterfly series. It takes stereo audio and makes it sound like the left and right channels are switching back and forth with each other. You can define the LFO (low frequency oscillator) rate. As in Stereo Butterfly (static), -1 is stereo channels fully flipped with each other, 0 sounds like mono, and 1 is full regular stereo. The difference here is that you can define two widths, so defining how you want the stereo to be manipulated over time. For instance, from -1 to +1 means Stereo Butterfly flips the left and right channels with each other at the frequency you set. If you set the two numbers at 0 and +1, the stereo audio will change between mono-sounding and regular stereo. Set at -1 and 0, the effect will be of fully flipped stereo changing to mono-sounding. Any other numbers you choose between -1 and +1 will give intermediate effects.

    Parameters:

    1. LFO frequency: [between 0.01 and 20 Hz]

    2. Width1: Stereo width from [range from -1.00 to +1.00]

    3. Width2: to Stereo width [range from -1.00 to +1.00]

    Stereo Butterfly (ramp)

    Third in the series of Stereo Butterfly plugins. As with the previous two, 0 setting sounds like mono, +1 is regular stereo, -1 is left and right channels flipped with each other.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Third in the series of Stereo Butterfly plugins. As with the previous two, 0 setting sounds like mono, +1 is regular stereo, -1 is left and right channels flipped with each other.

    Select which value to start at and which value to finish at. The default is from 0 to 1, which creates the effect of your stereo audio starting out sounding mono, then gradually widening to full stereo as the selection progresses. Start and finish values may lie anywhere between -1 and +1.

    Parameters:

    1. Spread stereo from... [range from -1.00 to +1.00]

    2. to: [range from -1.00 to +1.00]

    Stereo Widener

    Gives the illusion of widening stereo audio. The effect produces different results depending on whether you are listening to the audio through speakers or headphones, and the distance stereo speakers are apart.

    Details

    Author: David R.Sky

    Gives the illusion of widening stereo audio. The effect produces different results depending on whether you are listening to the audio through speakers or headphones, and the distance stereo speakers are apart. The widener works by inverting both left and right channels of stereo audio, then panning those inverted signals somewhere between the center pan position and the opposite channel.

    Parameters:

    1. Inverted signal volume: [-48 dB - -6 dB, default -18 dB]

    2. Pan position: [0 (center) to -100 (opposite channel), default 0]

    3. Time offset: [0 - 20 ms, default 0] - applying an offset can enhance the illusion.

    800B
    amplr.ny
    Open
    Download link
    David R.Sky
    1KB
    BassToCenter.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1KB
    Centerpanremover.ny
    Open
    Download link
    3KB
    Channel-mixer.ny
    Open
    Download link
    214B
    Crossfadein.ny
    Open
    Download link
    262B
    Crossfadeout.ny
    Open
    Download link
    712B
    fade-io.ny
    Open
    Download link
    789B
    pan.ny
    Open
    Download link
    4KB
    panlfo2a.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1KB
    Panrand.ny
    Open
    Download link
    2KB
    Pseudostereo.ny
    Open
    Download link
    903B
    Panramp.ny
    Open
    Download link
    4KB
    Repair_channel.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1022B
    buttrfly.ny
    Open
    Download link
    2KB
    buttrlfo.ny
    Open
    Download link
    1KB
    buttrramp.ny
    Open
    Download link
    2KB
    widener.ny
    Open
    Download link
    Logo
    Nyquist-Macros - Audacity Manualmanual.audacityteam.org

    Narrow Stereo: Reduces the stereo width (requires that the original track is true stereo).

  • Wide Stereo: Expands the stereo width (requires that the original track is true stereo).

  • Extra Wide: Same as 'Wide Stereo' but more extreme.

  • Centre to Left: Moves sounds from the middle of the stereo stage to the Left.

  • Centre to Right: Moves sounds from the middle of the stereo stage to the Right.

  • Swap Left/Right: What it says on the tin.

  • Vocal Remover (L/R invert): Removes sound from the center of the stereo mix and inverts the right channel.

  • Vocal Remover (mono): Removes sound from the center of the stereo mix.

  • Invert Left: Inverts the Left channel.

  • Invert Right: Inverts the Right channel.

  • Mid-Side Decode: A simple Mid-Side decoder.

  • Mid-Side
    Zip archive
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo
    Logo

    Plugin Reference

    This page offers a detailed look at the structure and syntax of Nyquist Plugins. It is intended for people who wish to write their own plugins.

    • If you are looking for extra Nyquist plugins to use, see Nyquist Plugins.

    • If you are especially interested in Nyquist in Audacity, we highly recommend subscribing to our Audacity forum, which has a section specifically for matters relating to Nyquist.

    Overview

    Nyquist is a superset of the XLISP programming language, (a dialect of LISP and supports both a LISP syntax and an alternative syntax called SAL. A general introduction to Nyquist is given on the main Nyquist page.

    The Audacity Nyquist Interface is implemented in the following files in the Audacity source code:

    • audacity/src/effects/nyquist/Nyquist.cpp

    • audacity/lib-src/libnyquist/nyx.c

    Nyquist is in many ways a separate program from Audacity (and is also available as a ). Nyquist is embedded in Audacity as a software that may be called from the main Audacity application to provide additional functionality, most notably as "plugins".

    When a Nyquist plugin is selected from one of Audacity's menus, Audacity locates the plugin script (the ".NY" file), starts a Nyquist session and passes the Nyquist code to be interpreted by the Nyquist library. Nyquist then attempts to run the program. The result of running the Nyquist script is returned to Audacity.

    Nyquist Plugin Header

    As in most other computer languages, Nyquist supports code comments. Any line beginning with a semi-colon (;) is entirely ignored by Nyquist. Comments may also be placed at the end of a line of code by beginning the comment with a semi-colon. Nyquist ignores everything from the semi-colon to the end of the line.

    In Audacity, special comments are used in Nyquist plugins to pass information to Audacity. As with other code comments, these are ignored entirely by Nyquist, but provide instructions to tell Audacity how to create the plugin.

    Plugin Header Example

    In this example (derived from the effect), the first four lines make up the essential headers that are required in all Nyquist plugins.

    • ;nyquist plug-in This header tells Audacity that this file is a Nyquist plugin.

    • ;version 4 This header specifies that this is a "4th generation" plugin.

    • ;type process This header defines the plugin as a "process" (Effect) type.

    The other headers enable various options and properties, including the plugin's controls.

    Full descriptions of all plugin headers are provide on the page.

    Nyquist Plugin Widgets

    Nyquist plugins support a range of "widgets", which are control elements for a graphical user interface (GUI). These elements are unique to Nyquist in Audacity.

    The GUI is created by Audacity when a plugin contains one or more widget header commands.

    As with other plugin headers, they begin with a semicolon (;) and are ignored by Nyquist, except that the variable name of the widget is initialized with a value and made available to Nyquist. This means that Nyquist can access the value that has been set in the widget as the value of the variable specified in the widget header.

    Note: The "Text widget" is an exception to the above at it is for display purposes only and does not set a value.

    Each widget begins with ";control", and is followed by a number of parameters, one of which defines the type of widget. There are currently nine widget types, though not all of them are available for old versions of Audacity.

    When a plugin is launched, Audacity searches the plugin .NY file for valid headers. Every ";control" line that is found gets parsed by Audacity into several tokens, where each token is separated by spaces. If the tokens match one of the defined patterns, then Audacity adds the widget to the GUI, otherwise they are ignored.

    Syntax for widgets

    ;control
    var-name
    text-left
    widget-type
    text-right
    initial-value
    minimum
    maximum

    Note: "real" (deprecated) is an alternative name for "float" and is provided as legacy support for old plugins. It should not be used in new code.

    Italic words in the table denote data types. Because tokens are separated by whitepace, strings containing whitespace must be written within quotation marks.

    Note: Older versions of Audacity may not support all of these controls, which may lead to an "unbound symbol" error. Plugin users are encouraged to use the current version of Audacity, to ensure that they can benefit from all of the latest features.

    The following code may be run in the of Audacity 2.3.1 or later, and produces the GUI shown above:

    The detailed syntax for each widget type is described on the Nyquist Plugins Widgets page.

    Tracks and Selections

    Audacity passes information about the current Audacity session to the Nyquist interpreter, along with the Nyquist code. Typically, when the code runs, it acts on data that has been passed from Audacity, which often includes the selected audio data, and returns data back to Audacity. Here we shall look at the ways that audio data is passed from Audacity to Nyquist, and from Nyquist back to Audacity.

    Passing Selected Audio to Nyquist

    For process and analyze type plugins, Nyquist runs the plugin code on each selected track in turn. The audio data is passed from Audacity to Nyquist as a variable called *TRACK* (the asterisks are part of the name).

    • For mono tracks, the value of *TRACK* is a "sound" (which is a Nyquist ).

    • For stereo tracks, the value of *TRACK* is an "array". An array is a special kind of ordered list. The array has two elements, both of which are "sounds". The first element holds audio data from the left channel, and the second element hold data from the right channel.

    The selected audio is only available to "process" and "analyze" type plugins (including the compound types "tool process" and "tool analyze").

    Time and Durations

    The way that time and durations are handled depends on the type of plugin.

    For process and analyze type plugins, the start time of the selection is seen as "time = 0", and the length of the selection is seen as one unit of time. The absolute length of the sound in seconds can be computed one of the following ways:

    NOTE: get-duration answers the question: "If a behavior has a nominal duration of 1, how long will it be after warping it according to the Nyquist environment?" Since many built-in behaviors like OSC and LFO have nominal durations of 1, In process effects, Audacity sets up the environment (including warp) to stretch them by the selection's duration. Otherwise, if you wrote (OSC C4), the result would have a duration of one second instead of the duration of the selection.

    In 'generate' effects, this does not happen, so the length specified by the effect is the length that is produced. For example, if you write (OSC C4 3.5), a generate type effect will produce a tone of duration 3.5 seconds.

    For generate type plugins, the length of the selection (if there is a selection) is usually ignored by Nyquist. However, if for some reason the length of the selection needs to be known, then *SELECTION* START and END properties may be used (version 4 plugins or later).

    When generating sounds with a 'generate' type plugin, durations in Nyquist represent seconds. For example, to generate a 2.5 second sine tone, you could write:

    but if the same code is used in a 'process' type plugin, the generated tone will be 2.5 x the duration of the track selection:

    If a duration in seconds is required in a 'process' type plugin, this may be done using the command:

    The above examples may be run in the .

    Global Variables and Reserved Variable Names

    In addition to the standard global variables defined in the , Nyquist in Audacity also has global variables that relate specifically to Audacity. Listed here are a few common standard Nyquist globals, and global variables that are relevant to Nyquist in Audacity.

    • : [float] The sample frequency of the control signals (such as those created by . By default 1/20 of the sample rate of the track.

    • *DECIMAL-SEPARATOR* : [char] A comma character (#\') or dot character (#\.) depending on the language selected in .

    • *FILE-SEPARATOR* : [char] The character that separates directories in a path, e.g. "/" (#\/) for Unix, ":" (#\:) for Mac, and "\" (#\\) for Win32.

    Other global variables provided by Nyquist can be found in the .

    Global Property Lists

    Property lists are defined for the global variables *AUDACITY*, *PROJECT*, *SELECTION*, *SYSTEM-DIR*, *SYSTEM-TIME*, and *TRACK*.

    For examples using property lists, see the .

    *AUDACITY*

    This property list was added in Audacity version 2.1.0

    Value: Unbound (not defined).

    • LANGUAGE : [string] The country code for the language set in . Example - when Audacity's locale setting is for English, (print (get '*audacity* 'language))will print en.

    • VERSION : [integer list] A list in the form (Audacity_version Audacity_release Audacity_revision) Example: Print the full Audacity version for Audacity 2.1.3 (let ((version-list (get '*audacity*' version))) (format nil "Audacity version ~a.~a.~a" (first version-list)(second version-list)(third version-list))) Prints: Audacity version 2.1.3

    *PROJECT*

    Value: Unbound (not defined).

    • LABELTRACKS : [integer] The number of label tracks in the project.

    • MIDITRACKS : [integer] The number of note tracks in the project.

    • NAME : [string] The name of the current project. A project that has not been named (not yet saved) returns an empty string.

    *SELECTION*

    Value: Unbound (not defined).

    • BANDWIDTH : [float] The bandwidth of the frequency selection in octaves (Spectrogram or Spectrogram (log f) track view).

    • CENTER-HZ : [float] The centre frequency selection in Hz (Spectrogram or Spectrogram (log f) track view).

    • CHANNELS : [integer] The number of selected audio channels.

    *SYSTEM-DIR*

    Value: Unbound (not defined).

    • BASE : [string] The Audacity installation directory.

    • DATA : [string] The Audacity data directory. This is where the audacity.cfg, pluginregistry.cfg and EQCurves.xml files are located.

    • DOCUMENTS [string] The system default documents directory.

    *SYSTEM-TIME*

    This property list was added in Audacity version 2.1.1.

    Value: A list in the form '(year, day, hours, minutes, seconds), where each list item is an integer.

    Example: 5 minutes past 2pm January 1st 2022 would be the list: 2022, 1, 14, 5, 0.

    Note that "day" is a number in the range 1 to 366, counted from the start of the year.

    This is the time that the Nyquist code is parsed, NOT the time it is executed. It cannot therefore be used for timing events that occur while the code is running. Possible uses for *SYSTEM-TIME* could include automatic naming of files written to disk, or for "" random processes.

    • DATE : [string] The date formatted according to the current locale. Example: "dd/mm/yy".

    • DAY : [integer] Day of the month.

    • DAY-NAME : [string] The name of the day (Example: "Monday").

    *TRACK*

    Value: The sound from a selected mono audio track, or an array of two sounds from a selected stereo track (see the Nyquist Stereo Track Tutorial).

    Properties of *TRACK* all relate to the track that is being processed. Currently Nyquist only processes audio tracks. When multiple tracks are selected, Nyquist processes each audio track in turn (top to bottom).

    • CHANNELS : [integer] The number of channels in the track (mono = 1, stereo = 2).

    • CLIPS : [list or array] For mono tracks, a list of start and end time of each audio clip. For stereo tracks, an array containing a list of clips for each channel. Due to a limitation in Nyquist, the "clips" property can hold a maximum of 1000 start / end times. If an audio channel contains more than 1000 clips, the first 1000 will be listed, and the 1001th item will be NIL. See for an alternative way to get clip times that will work with 1000's of clips.

    • END-TIME : [float] The track end time.

    The VIEW property may change in future versions of Audacity, so is not recommended for public release plugins. During Preview, audio tracks are copied to temporary tracks which are not visible, so the returned "VIEW" value is NIL.

    Return Values

    Nyquist supports many "data types", including "numbers" (integer or floating-point), "characters" (such as the letter "A", the number "4", or any other ), "strings" (text), "" (a list of data), "" (special kind of indexed list), and "sounds" (a sound / digital signal).

    The result of the last computation within the plugin code will be given back from Nyquist to Audacity. According to the data type of the returned value one of the following actions will be invoked in Audacity:

    Mono Sound

    If a "sound" is returned, the sound will be re-inserted into the selected part of the Audacity track, (or a new track for "generate" type plugins). If the returned sound is shorter or longer than the original sound, the selection will be reduced or augmented. If a mono sound is returned to a stereo track, the same mono sound will be inserted into both channels of the stereo track.

    Multi-Channel / Stereo Sound

    Nyquist handles multi-channel sounds as an array of sounds. The first element of the array is the left channel, and the second element is the right channel. Audacity currently supports a maximum of two channels in a track (stereo).

    Returning an array of sounds to a mono track is an error.To return a stereo sound without error, a stereo track must be selected before running the Nyquist code.

    For more information about stereo tracks, see the .

    String / Text

    When the return value is a character or string, a dialog window will appear with the data displayed as text.

    Number

    A dialog window will appear with the number displayed as text.

    Labels

    If an appropriately formatted list is returned to Audacity, a label track will be created below the audio track(s).

    For point labels the format is:

    ((number ``"string") (number ``"string") ... )

    The list to create a label track must contain one or more lists, each of which must have:

    • number - (an integer or float) is the time in seconds from the beginning of the Audacity selection, where the label will appear.

    • "string" - a string to be displayed in the label's text field.

    For region labels, each label list must contain two int-or-float elements, one for the start and one for the end of the label region.

    ((number````number ``"string") (number````number ``"string") ... )

    Audacity will always place returned audio or labels relative to the start of the and not the start of the .

    Empty String

    An empty string may be used as a "null return", which means that the plugin returns nothing, and no error. An example use would be if you wish to process only the first selected track.

    Playing sounds with Nyquist

    When using the or (most) Nyquist plugins that have a , if the plugin returns a sound, it may be previewed using the Preview button. In addition to this, it is also possible to play sounds directly from Nyquist, using the function. The PLAY function will be executed when the plugin code runs.

    The PLAY function is described in the . The information here describes aspects that are specific to Nyquist in Audacity.

    Note that the Nyquist PLAY command does not use Audacity's . Nyquist uses the system default device for playback, and has a default buffer of 100 ms. The buffer setting may be changed with the command. The actual latency values are dependent on the computer sound system and may differ from those requested by Nyquist.

    To see the list of available devices when Nyquist plays, set *snd-list-device* to "true" before the play command, then use Debug button to see the output.

    (setf *snd-list-devices* t) (play *track*)

    To select a specific output device, set *snd-device* to the index number of the device you wish to use (not all devices are valid). For example, if ALSA hw(0,0) is device 0, select it with:

    (setf *snd-device* 0) (setf *snd-list-devices* t) (play *track*)

    It is not possible to interrupt Nyquist playback. The sound will continue playing until it reaches the end, and other Audacity functions are disabled until Nyquist playback has finished.

    To limit the amount of audio that will play, the length of the sound must be defined before starting playback. For example, to play the first 1 second of a selection, you could write (LISP syntax):

    Note also that if a plugin uses Nyquist PLAY command, using Previewwill cause an error on some machines because Audacity may not be able to access the audio device while it is being used by Nyquist. For "own use" plugins, if you have more than one sound card, a possible workaround to enable Preview and Nyquist PLAY simultaneously, is to set the Nyquist playback device to a different device to that which Audacity uses. For public release plugins the Preview button should normally be disabled if Nyquist PLAY is used.

    Plugin Translations

    Nyquist plugins provide two mechanisms for translation into the language specified in Audacity's preferences.

    One method is exclusively for plugins that are shipped by default with Audacity and requires compiling Audacity from source, plus several other steps involving . Unfortunately this method is not documented, so only a brief description is provided here.

    The other method may be used by plugin developers for their "third party" plugins, but can be used only for returned strings and not for the main plugin interface.

    Translation for shipped effects

    Header comments in translated plugins begin with a dollar "$" character rather than the usual semicolon ";" character. The strings to be translated are then wrapped in a function that has a one character name "_" (underscore).

    Example: In the effect, the header is changed from:

    ;name "Adjustable Fade"

    to:

    $name (_ "Adjustable Fade")

    ;control lines become $control. As with other translated headers, the $ symbol replaces the normal semicolon. The line is ignored by Nyquist as a comment, but is visible to Audacity for translation and for creating a .

    The options in Multiple-choice widgets may be translated. For example:

    ;control var (_ "Translated left text") choice ((_ "Yes") (_ "No")) 0

    The above example is not safe to use. See the "Limitations" section below.

    Macros and portability: To allow portability of settings and macros, choices may include a non-translated form of each choice. The non-translated form is used by Macros but is not normally visible to users.

    ;control var (_ "Translated left text") choice (("Label1" (_ "Translated Label 1")) ("Label2" (_ "Translated Label 2"))) 0

    Other user visible strings: Other strings that are visible to users are marked for translation using the "underscore" function. An example from the Adjustable Fade plugin:

    (format nil (_ "~aPercentage values cannot be negative.") err)

    Limitations

    Control characters like (new line), (tab) are not supported. The workaround is to use Lisp format directives instead:

    • Bad (does not work correctly):

    (print (_ "Line one.\nLine two."))

    • Good:

    (print (format nil (_ "Line one.~%Line two.")))

    Note that translations may contain Unicode characters that are not supported by Nyquist. It is therefore important that any translated strings that need to be machine readable (such as Multiple-Choice widget options) should also have a non-translated form.

    ;control var (_ "Translated left text") choice (("Label1" (_ "Translated Label 1")) ("Label2" (_ "Translated Label 2"))) 0

    Translation for third party effects

    It is not currently possible to provide translations for a third party plugin's main interface, unless the name is the same as a translated Nyquist plugin that is already shipped with Audacity. It is highly recommended to NOT reuse the same name as a shipped plugin for a third party plugin.

    Translations may be provided for return value messages and debug messages. To do this, the string must be marked for translation by wrapping it in the "underscore" function. The translation must also be provided in a specially formatted list variable *locale*.

    The format for the *locale* list is: (LIST (language-list) [(language-list) ...])

    where "language-list" is a list in the form: (LIST country-code (translations))

    and the "translations" are list in the form: (LIST (List "string" "translation") [(List "string" "translation")...])

    • The *locale* list may contain any number of "language-list" elements, where each language-list is a list of two strings.

    • The first element of each "language-list" is the country code (for example "en" or "fr"),

    • The second item of each "language-list" is a list of translation pairs.

    • A "translation pair" is a list containing the default string (usually in English) and the translated string (in the language specified by the country code).

    A working example may be found in the .

    See Also

    • in the Audacity manual

    • Nyquist and

    Logo

    ;name "High-Pass Filter" This header tells Audacity the name of the plugin.

    integer

    integer

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    float (real)

    string

    float

    float

    float

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    int-text

    string

    integer

    integer / NIL

    integer / NIL

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    float-text

    string

    float

    float / NIL

    float / NIL

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    string

    string

    string

    -

    -

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    choice

    string

    integer

    -

    -

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    time

    string

    float

    float / NIL

    float / NIL

    ;control

    symbol

    string

    file

    string

    string

    string

    string

    ;control

    -

    -

    text

    string

    -

    -

    -

    LEN : [int] The number of samples contained in the selected Audacity sound.

  • *LOCALE* : [list] This is variable name is reserved for translation strings.

  • *PREVIEWP* : [bool] True when previewing an effect, otherwise false.

  • *RUNTIME-PATH* : [string] Path to Nyquist .lsp files.

  • *PROJECT* : A variable with a list of properties relating to the current Audacity project.

  • S (obsolete) : [sound or array of two sounds] Prior to version 4 plugins, in process and analyze type plugins this was the Audacity sound [the selected part of the Audacity audio track]. In generate type plugins "S" is the Adagio notation for a quarter note (float value 0.25).

  • S : Adagio notation. [float] A quarter note (float value 0.25).

  • *SCRATCH* : [any] a symbol whose value and property list are preserved from one effect invocation to the next.

  • *SELECTION* : A variable with a list of properties relating to the current selection.

  • *SOUND-SRATE* : [float] The sample frequency of the selected track audio.

  • *SYSTEM-DIR* : A variable with a list of properties relating to the file system.

  • *SYSTEM-TIME* : A variable with a list of properties relating to the system time/date.

  • *TRACK* : [sound or array of sounds] The Audacity sound [the selected part of the Audacity audio track]. The *TRACK* variable also has a list of "properties" that pass additional information to Nyquist.

  • *WARP* : information that communicates start-time and duration to Nyquist functions. In Audacity, the start-time is always considered to be zero (regardless of the actual start time of the selection) and the duration indicates the duration of the selection. *warp* should not normally be accessed directly.

  • PREVIEW-DURATION : [float] The Effects Preview Length set in Audacity preferences.
  • PROJECTS : [integer] The number of open projects.

  • RATE : [integer] The project rate in the project.

  • TIMETRACKS : [integer] The number of time tracks in the project.

  • TRACKS : [integer] The number of tracks in the project.

  • WAVETRACKS : [integer] The number of audio tracks in the project.

  • END : [float] The end of the selection in seconds.
  • HIGH-HZ : [float] The high frequency selection Hz (Spectrogram or Spectrogram (log f) track view).

  • LOW-HZ : [float] The low frequency selection Hz (Spectrogram or Spectrogram (log f) track view).

  • RMS : [float or array] For mono tracks, the RMS amplitude (linear scale). For stereo tracks, an array containing the RMS for each channel.

  • PEAK : [float or array] For mono tracks, the absolute peak level (linear scale). For stereo tracks, an array containing the absolute peak level for each channel. Returns 'NIL' if peak level is infinite or NaN.

  • PEAK-LEVEL : [float] The absolute peak level (linear scale). Returns 'NIL' if peak level is infinite or NaN.

  • START : [float] The start of the selection in seconds.

  • TRACKS : [integer list] A list of track numbers of selected audio tracks.

  • HELP : [string] The installation directory for the Audacity Manual (note that the Manual may not exist).
  • HOME : [string] The current user's "home" directory.

  • PLUG-IN : [string list] The Nyquist plugin search path. This includes the directories where Audacity looks for Nyquist plugins, and other Nyquist related files. Not all directories are currently used and some are for legacy support only.

  • SYS-TEMP : [string] The system temp directory.

  • TEMP : [string] The Audacity temp directory. This is where unsaved project data is temporarily stored.

  • USER-PLUG-IN : [string] The default path for user plugins.

  • ISO-DATE
    : [string] The date represented in the ISO 8601 format "YYYY-MM-DD".
  • ISO-TIME : [string] The time represented in the ISO 8601 format "HH:MM:SS".

  • MONTH : [integer] The month (as an integer).

  • MONTH-NAME : [string] The name of the month (Example: "January").

  • TIME : [string] The time formatted according to the current locale. Example: "hh:mm:ss".

  • YEAR : [integer] The year (as an integer).

  • FORMAT : [integer or float] The track sample format. One of (Integer) 16, (Integer) 24, or (float) 32.

  • GAIN : [float] The value of the track Gain slider.

  • INDEX : [integer] A counter that increments for each track processed. On processing the first track, the value is "1".

  • NAME : [string] The name of the track.

  • PAN : [float] The value of the track Pan slider.

  • RATE : [float] The track sample rate.

  • SPECTRAL-EDIT-ENABLED : [bool] Returns 'T' (true) if spectral editing is enabled, otherwise 'NIL'. Note that this is irrespective of the track view and will return 'T' if the spectral editing option for the track is enabled even if the track is not displaying a spectrogram.

  • START-TIME : [float] The track start time (note that this will often be different from the selection start time.)

  • TYPE : [string] The type of track. One of: "wave", "midi", "label", "time". Currently only "wave" (audio tracks) are processed by Nyquist plugins.

  • VIEW : [string or list] The track view. Only applies to audio tracks. * A single track view returns one of "Waveform", "Spectrogram" or NIL. Multi-View returns a list of strings or NIL. * Multi-view returns the upper view as the first element, and the lower view as the second (either "Waveform" or "Spectrogram"). Both normal "Waveform" and "Waveform (dB)" return the string "Waveform". * Prior to Audacity 2.4.x : [string] One of: "Waveform", "Waveform (dB)", "Spectrogram" or NIL.

  • ;control

    symbol

    string

    int

    string

    standalone programming language
    library
    High-Pass Filter
    Nyquist Plugin Headers
    Nyquist Prompt
    data type
    ABS-ENV
    Nyquist Prompt
    Nyquist Reference Manual
    *CONTROL-SRATE*
    piecewise approximations
    Audacity's Preferences
    Nyquist manual index
    Nyquist Property List Tutorial
    Audacity Preferences
    seeding
    AUD-GET-INFO
    ASCII character
    list
    array
    Nyquist Stereo Track Tutorial
    selection
    Timeline
    Nyquist Prompt
    GUI
    PLAY
    Nyquist manual
    audio device settings
    SND-SET-LATENCY
    gettext
    Adjustable Fade
    Name
    widget
    RMS effect
    Nyquist
    Basics
    Tutorials
    Nyquist 3.02 Reference Manual
    XLISP 2.0 Manual
    This image displays all nine widget types in Audacity 2.3.1 on Windows 10

    integer

    ;nyquist plug-in
    ;version 4
    ;type process
    ;name "High-Pass Filter"
    ;preview linear
    ;manpage "High-Pass_Filter"
    ;debugbutton disabled
    ;action "Performing High-Pass Filter..."
    ;author "Dominic Mazzoni"
    ;release 3.0.2
    ;copyright "Released under terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 or later."
    
    ;control frequency "Frequency (Hz)" float-text "" 1000 0 nil
    ;version 4
    ;name "Plugin Widgets"
    
    ;control filename "File Button widget" file "" "" "" "open"
    ;control number-sw "Slider widget" float "(float)" 50 0 100
    ;control integer-sw "Slider widget" int "(integer)" 50 0 100
    ;control number-nt "Numeric Text widget" float-text "(float)" 50 0 100
    ;control integer-nt "Numeric Text widget" int-text "(integer)" 50 0 100
    ;control string-var "String widget" string "text right" "default string"
    ;control text "Text widget [string]"
    ;control duration "Time widget" time "text right" 30 nil nil
    
    (format nil
            "File Selected: ~s~%~
            Floating point slider: ~s~%~
            Integer slider: ~s~%~
            Floating point text: ~s~%~
            Integer text: ~s~%~
            String: ~s~%~
            (Text widget does not return a value)~%~
            Duration: ~s (seconds)"
            filename
            number-sw
            integer-sw
            number-nt
            integer-nt
            string-var
            duration)
    ;Lisp
     (/ len *sound-srate*)
    (get-duration 1)
    
    ;SAL
     len / *sound-srate*
    get-duration(1)
    ;type generate
    (osc 60 2.5)
    ;type process
    (osc 60 2.5)
    ;type process
    (abs-env (osc 60 2.5))
    ;; Example: Apply a function "process" to
    ;; the first selected track only.
    
    (if (= (get '*track* 'index) 1)
        (process *track*)
        "")
    (play (extract-abs 0 1 *track*))

    File Button Tutorial

    This tutorial provides a description and examples of how to create and use a File-Button Widget in Nyquist Plugins.

    The File-Button Widget provides a means to select one or more files via a graphical file browser.

    Overview

    For some plugins it is necessary to read from or write to files. In order to do this, it is necessary to define precisely which file is required, where the file is located, and whether it is required for read access or write access (for read access, the file must exist, whereas for write access this is not always a requirement).

    Prior to the availability of the File-Button Widget, file names could be hard coded into the Nyquist script, or a text box could be provided for the user to enter the name of the file. Hard coded file paths lack flexibility, are platform specific (a path starting with "C:\" does not work on Mac or Linux), and may point to locations that do not exist on some machines. While a text box may provide a better solution than hard coding a file path, it remains inconvenient and prone to user error, especially for long file paths. The File-Button Widget was introduced in Audacity 2.3.0 to solve these problems, by providing access to a graphical "file browser window" similar to using

    File menu > Open
    or
    File menu > Save
    in other applications.

    Syntax and Appearance

    File button widget example

    The File-Button Widget, as shown above, has an editable text input field that allows a file path to be typed (or pasted). After the text input field is a button that launches a file browser. Below is an example of the familiar file browser window on Windows 10.

    Note that selecting a file in this file browser does NOT open the file.

    When a file is selected in the file browser window, the full name and path of the selected file is passed to the Nyquist script as the value of the File-Button Widget variable.

    Widget Arguments (Parameters)

    The syntax for creating a File-Button Widget is similar to all other Nyquist Plugin widgets.

    • ;control : Start of header statement. The leading semicolon ";" (or dollar character "$") tells Nyquist to treat this line as a comment and ignore it. The keyword "control" tells Audacity to create a GUI widget to be used by the Nyquist script.

    • variable-name : [symbol] The variable name that will be set.

    • text-left : [string] Text on the left side of the widget.

    • file : [keyword] Declares a "file" type widget.

    • button-text : [string] Text on the button. Normally this would be two double quotes (an empty string), which gives the default text: "Select a file"

    • default-file-path : [string] Default file path for the file browser. This supports keywords to aid cross-platform support.

    • wildcard-filters : [string] This is a magic "wildcard" string that follows the same syntax as . The string comprises pairs of "description", pipe symbol ("|"), "file extension(s)". Multiple file extensions may be listed, separated by semi-colons (";").

    • flags : [string] This is a "magic" string that sets options for the file browser, following the same syntax as .

    Magic Strings

    The final three arguments, default-file-path, wildcard-filters, and flags, use special keywords that define the behavior of the File-Button Widget and the associated File Browser.

    • Note that unlike Nyquist symbols, these keywords are case sensitive.

    • The "Windows", "macOS" and "Linux" examples below refer to standard file paths for modern operating systems, though may be different on some machines.

    • "<username>" is the name of the computer user's account (log-in name).

    Default File Path

    "default file path" supports the keywords:

    • *home*" : The current user's "home" directory.

      • Windows: C:\Users\<username>\

      • macOS: /Users/<username>/

      • Linux: /home/<username>/

    • ~ : An alias for *home*.

    • *default* : The default "Documents" path.

      • Windows: C:\Users\<username>\Documents\Audacity

      • macOS: /Users/<username>/Documents/

    • *export* The default "Export" path.

      • Windows: C:\Users\<username>\Desktop\

      • macOS: /Users/<username>/Documents/

    • *save* The default "Save" path.

      • Windows: C:\Users\<username>\Desktop\

      • macOS: /Users/<username>/Documents/

    • *config* The default configuration file directory.

      • Windows: C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\audacity\

      • macOS: /Users/<username>/Library/Application Support/audacity/

    These keywords may be combined with a file name to specify which file to open. For example, if you want the default file to be called "sample-data.txt", and you want the default location to be the default "Documents" path, you could write the default file path parameter as: "*default*/sample-data.txt".

    File paths should be quoted with double quotes, otherwise spaces in file name will fail. If no file path is provided, the default is "default". If no file name is provided, the default file name is "untitled". The default file extension is taken from the wildcard-filters.

    Wildcard Filters

    The "wildcard-filters" determine which file types are visible in the file browser. An empty string will default to all files types.

    This "magic string" follows the same syntax as wxFileDialog. The string comprises pairs of "description" and "file extension(s)", separated by a pipe character ("|"). Multiple file extensions may be listed, separated by semi-colons (";").

    Example:

    "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*"

    In this example we have two pairs:

    1. Text file|*.txt;*.TXT: Description: "Text file" File extension "*.txt" matches: "anything.txt" File extension "*.TXT" matches: "anything.TXT"

    2. All files|*.*;*: Description: "All files" File extension "*.*" matches: "anything.anything" File extension "*" matches: "anything"

    Flags

    The magic "flags" string is similar to the "Styles" options in wxFileDialog. Flags may be an empty string, a single keyword, or a comma separated list of keywords.

    Available keywords are:

    • open : This is a "file open" dialog. Usually this means that the default button's label of the dialog is "Open". Cannot be combined with "save"

    • save : This is a "file save" dialog. Usually this means that the default button's label of the dialog is "Save". Cannot be combined with "open".

    • overwrite : For save dialog only: prompt for a confirmation if a file will be overwritten.

    • exists : For open dialog only: the user may only select files that actually exist

    • multiple : For open dialog only: allows selecting multiple files.

    Example: Open file dialog for one or more files that must exist.

    "open,exists,multiple"

    Example: Save file dialog with overwrite prompt if file exists.

    "save,overwrite"

    Return Values

    The File-Button widget attempts to create a valid file path as a string, and assign it to the "variable-name" symbol.

    • If a single file is selected using the file browser, then the widget text box is updated to show the full path to the selected file.

    • If multiple files are selected using the file browser (requires "multiple" flag to be set), each file path is enclosed in double quotes. Note: The list of file paths is NOT a LISP list. It is still a string. See example below for how to deal with multiple file paths.

    • If the file path text box is empty, then the widget variable symbol is set to the default path.

    • If the file path text box contains only a file name (or any string that is not a path), then it is prepended with the default path and assigned as the value of the widget variable.

    Error Messages

    In the event of programming or user errors, the File-Button Widget may return an error message. Understanding these messages can be a great help when debugging a new plug-in.

    • <Path>is not a valid file path. ****This error occurs if the returned file path is invalid, for example, if the directory does not exist. : This error is most likely to be due to the user manually editing the file path text box with an invalid file path.

    • Mismatched quotes in <string> ****When the "multiple" flag is set, the file browser returns a list of quoted strings for each path. This error is thrown if the opening quotes do not have matching closing quotes. : This error is most likely to be due to the user manually editing the file path text box and missing one or more quote characters.

    • Invalid wildcard string in 'path' control. Using empty string instead. ****This error occurs if the 'wildcard' magic string is malformed. : This is a programming error. Check the syntax of your string.

    Examples

    Simple "Open File" Example

    ;control var "Select file to open" file "" "" "" ""

    In this example. only the variable ("var") and the "text-left" ("Select file to open") are explicitly set. Empty strings are passed to the other parameters, so they will all take default values.

    In reverse order: the default "flag" is "open", the default wildcard filter is "All files", the default file path is "*default*", the default file name is "untitled", and the default button text is "Select a file".

    Simple "Save File" Example

    ;control var "Select file to save" file "" "" "" "save"

    Very much like the simple "open file" example above, except this one is selecting a file for writing.

    Advanced "Open File" Example

    ;control filename "Select file" file "" "*default*/sample-data.txt" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "open,exists"

    Unlike the previous examples, all parameters are explicitly defined. The default file name is "sample-data.txt", and by default the file browser filters the file list to show Text files only (ending in ".txt" or ".TXT"). The file browser also has an option to show all files.

    Note that the file browser is created by the underlying operating system, so there are subtle differences across platforms. The "exists" flag is only relevant for file browsers that allow you to type the file name. For a purely graphical browser it is not possible to select a file that does not exist.

    Note also that the "exists" flag only affects the file browser - it does not prevent the user typing a non-existent file name in the file path text field. If the plugin requires the file to exist, then the plugin code should run a test to ensure that it does. A simple test for the existence of a file, is to try and open it, for example:

    Advanced "Save File" Example

    ;control filename "Export data to" file "Select a file" "*default*/sample-data.txt" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|CSV files|*.csv;*.CSV|HTML files|*.html;*.HTML;*.htm;*.HTM|All files|*.*;*" "save,overwrite"

    In this example, all parameters are explicitly defined:

    • variable-name: filename

    • text-left: "Export data to"

    • button-text: "Select a file"

    • default-file-path: "*default*/sample-data.txt"

    • wildcard-filters: ****Text file|*.txt;*.TXT| CSV files|*.csv;*.CSV| HTML files|*.html;*.HTML;*.htm;*.HTM| All files|*.*;*"

    • flags : "save,overwrite"

    The wildcard filters provide options in the file browser to show either text files (.txt or .TXT), which is the default, or CSV files (.csv pr .CSV), or HTML files (.html, or .HTML, or .htm, or .HTM), or "All files" (any file name).

    Note that on Windows, file extensions are not case sensitive, but Linux, and some Mac computers are case sensitive, so for cross-platform portability it is recommended to use both upper and lower case file name extensions.

    Open Multiple Files

    ;control var "Select one or more files" file "Select" "*default*" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "open,multiple"

    In this example, the variable that will be set is var, the default directory is *default*, and the default file type filter is for text files (with an option to show all files). Unlike the previous versions, the file browser may be used to select multiple files (requires Audacity 2.3.1 or later).

    If the users selects one or more files using the file browser, then each file path will be enclosed in double quotes. However, the user could type in the path to a single file without quotes, or, as in this case, the default could be an unquoted single file path, so we should check for and support both versions.

    To extract all of the the paths from the returned string, we first need to convert it to a more useful form, such as a LISP list:

    (setf path-string (format nil "(list ~s )" (string-trim "\"" var)))

    Here we have stripped the outer double quotes (if present), and then formatted it into a string that describes a LISP list. So, for example, if the selected files were: "C:\first.txt" and "C:\second.txt", then the value of varwould be ""C:\first.txt""C:\second.txt"", and the value of path-string would be "(list "C:\first.txt" "C:\second.text")".

    Important: Note that this is still only a string value, not a LISP list.

    To convert this string into a LISP list, we need to evaluate the string as if it were code. Fortunately in Audacity 2.3.1 and later, there is an easy way to do this with the EVAL-STRING function:

    (setf paths (eval-string path-string))

    paths is now a valid LISP list of strings, which we can iterate through like this:

    (dolist (p paths) (print p))

    The complete example that can run in the Nyquist Prompt:

    Example Applications

    These example applications may be run in the Nyquist Prompt, or could be converted to plugins by adding full plugin headers.

    These code examples are excessively commented so as to explain what they are doing. For production code, comments should be concise and provide clarification where the intent is not obvious. As far as possible, the code should be self explanatory, but as this is intended for learning purposes, additional explanatory comments are included.

    Writing to a File

    In this example, we use a File-Button widget to specify a file that will be written to. It is important to note that selecting the file does NOT write to the file, it only captures the file path and file name, which we then write to later in the script. The plugin will get some information about the selected audio, and write (append) it to a file.

    First we start with a couple of headers to set the syntax version and plugin type.

    ;version 4 ;type analyze

    Next is our File-Button widget. Note that it has the "save" flag because we are selecting a file to write to.

    ;control filename "Export to" file "" "data.txt" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "save"

    The next three code lines gather the raw information that we will be writing to the file.

    When we write to a file with Nyquist, the file is overwritten by the data that we are writing. As we want to append the new data to the file rather than overwriting it, we must first read the existing text from the file and store it in a variable. We can then write the old data, plus the new data back to the file. Here is a function that will read the contents of the file if it exists, and returns the data to the function caller.

    As this code is designed to work with text files, we can check that the file name ends with ".txt".

    The file name extension is NOT a reliable way to test the file type. In any situation where security is a concern, the file extension must not be relied as an indicator of the file type.

    • First we assign an empty string as the value of the variable ext.

    • If the file name is at least 4 characters long, we extract the last 4 characters and assign it as the value of ext.

    • We can then apply a case insensitive string comparison. If ext is equal to .txt, then we assume it is a plain text file.

    So now we can run our main program, which is within a program prog block.

    • The program block begins by binding a local variable {{inlineCode|data}}{=mediawiki} to the data returned by the {{inlineCode|read-file}}{=mediawiki} function (defined above).

    • Then we open the file for writing.

    • And then the data can be written to the open file.

    • After reading or writing to a file, the file should be closed again.

    • Finally we return an acknowledgment message.

    If the file did not end with .txt, we return an error message.

    The Complete Code:

    Reading Multiple Files

    This is an advanced example that uses the File-Button widget to read data from one or more text files. Text handling is not one of Nyquist's strengths (Nyquist is primarily designed for handling audio), hence parsing the text file data is quite complex.

    In this example, we will import (read) labels from one or more text files.

    For simplicity, we will deal only with the basic label format and not support "spectral" labels.

    The data format we will use is compatible with exported labels, provided that Spectral Selections are NOT used.

    For this plug-in, we will specify that the label data file has one label definition per line, and each label definition has a start time (in seconds), and end time (in seconds) and optional label text. The numbers and optional label text may be separated by spaces or tabs. The data should be saved as plain text, with a ".txt" file extension.

    Example Data:

    The Complete Code:

    Headers Reference

    Plugin Headers are specially formatted placed at the top of a Nyquist plugin script.

    Any line beginning with a semi-colon (";") is entirely ignored by Nyquist, but properly formatted "header" comments provide instructions that tell Audacity how to create the plugin.

    Plugin header format

    Plugin headers are written as:

    where keyword is the header command, and args is a list of values. For most header commands there must be the correct number of arguments.

     ;control variable-name "text-left" file "button-text" "default-file-path" "wildcard-filters" "flags"
    (defun test ()
    (if (setf f (open filename))
    (close f)
    (throw 'error "File does not exist"))
    (print "All good"))
    
    (catch 'error (test))
    ;version 4
    ;type tool
    ;debugflags trace
    
    ;control var "Select one or more files" file "Select" "*default*" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "open,multiple"
    
    (setf path-string (format nil "(list ~s )" 
      (string-trim "\"" var)))
    
    (setf paths (eval-string path-string))
    
    (dolist (p paths "")
      (print p))
    ;; Get data:
    (setf tname (get '*track* 'name))
    (setf peak (get '*selection* 'peak))
    (setf rms (get '*selection* 'rms))
    (defun read-file(fname)
    ;;; If file exists, copy its contents.
    ;;; Return the data, or empty string.
    (setf data "")
    (setf fp (open fname))
    (when fp
    (do ((line (read-line fp) (read-line fp)))
    ((not line))
    (setf data (format nil "~a~a~%" data  line)))
    (close fp))
    data)
    ;; Check file extension.
    (setf ext "")
    (when (>= (length filename) 4)
    (setf ext (subseq filename (- (length filename) 4))))
    
    (if (string-equal ext ".txt")
    ...
    ;; It looks like a text file, so let's do it...
    (prog ((data (read-file filename)))
    ;; Open the file for writing.
    (setf fp (open filename :direction :output))
    ;; Use the 'format' command to write to the file pointer 'fp'.
    (format fp "~aTrack ~s: Peak level: ~a  RMS level: ~a~%"
    data tname peak rms)
    ;; Close the file.
    (close fp)
    (format nil "Data exported to:~%~s" filename))
    ;; It doesn't look like a text file, so throw an error.
    "Error.\nUnsupported file type.")
    ;version 4
    ;type analyze
    
    ;control filename "Export to" file "" "data.txt" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "save"
    
    ;; Get data:
    (setf tname (get '*track* 'name))
    (setf peak (get '*selection* 'peak))
    (setf rms (get '*selection* 'rms))
    
    
    (defun read-file(fname)
      ;;; If file exists, copy its contents.
      ;;; Return the data, or empty string.
      (setf data "")
      (setf fp (open fname))
      (when fp
        (do ((line (read-line fp) (read-line fp)))
            ((not line))
          (setf data (format nil "~a~a~%" data  line)))
        (close fp))
      data)
    
    
    ;; Check file extension.
    (setf ext "")
    (when (>= (length filename) 3)
      (setf ext (subseq filename (- (length filename) 4))))
    
    (if (string-equal ext ".txt")
        ;; It looks like a text file, so let's do it...
        (prog ((data (read-file filename)))
          ;; Open the file for writing.
          (setf fp (open filename :direction :output))
          ;; Use the 'format' command to write to the file pointer 'fp'.
          (format fp "~aTrack ~s: Peak level: ~a  RMS level: ~a~%"
                  data tname peak rms)
          ;; Close the file.
          (close fp)
          (format nil "Data exported to:~%~s" filename))
        ;; It doesn't look like a text file, so throw an error.
        "Error.\nUnsupported file type.")
    12.427844   12.427844   Hello
    39.320883   52.495756   World
    63.769100   63.769100
    79.524618   79.524618   Hi there
    ;version 4
    ;type analyze
    
    ;control filepaths "Select one or more files" file "Select" "*default*/Label Track.txt" "Text file|*.txt;*.TXT|All files|*.*;*" "open,multiple"
    
    
    (defun get-files(txt)
      ;;; Convert string of file paths to LISP list.
      ;;; Return list.
      (let* ((txt (string-trim "\"" txt))
             (txt (format nil "(list ~s )" txt)))
        (eval-string txt)))
    
    
    (defun label-from-text(txt)
      ;;; 'txt' is a line read from the file. It must be formated as:
      ;;; "number number string"
      ;;; Each label needs to be a LISP list  in the form:
      ;;; (LIST  number number [string])
      ;;; Return a properly formatted label from a line of text.
      (let ((newtxt "")
            (labeltext nil)
            (isnumber nil)
            (index 0))
        ;; Label text must be double quoted.
        (dotimes (i (length txt))
          (setf ch (char txt i))
          (cond
           (labeltext
              ;we are in the label text region, so just add the character.
              (setf newtxt (format nil "~a~a" newtxt ch)))
           ((and (< index 2) ;two numbers expected.
                 (or (char= ch #\.)
                     (digit-char-p ch)))
                (setf isnumber t)
                (setf newtxt (format nil "~a~a" newtxt ch)))
           ;; Elements may be delimited by spaces or tabs.
           ((or (char= ch #\space)
                (char= ch #\tab))
              (when isnumber ;previous character was numeric.
                (incf index)
                (setf isnumber nil))
              (setf newtxt (strcat newtxt " ")))
           ;; Non-space character after the two numbers is
           ;; the start of the label text.
           (t (setf labeltext t)
              (setf newtxt (format nil "~a\"~a" newtxt ch)))))
        ;; If label text exists, close the double quotes,
        ;; else add an empty string.
        (if labeltext
            (setf txt (strcat newtxt "\""))
            (setf txt (strcat newtxt "\"\""))))
      ; Convert txt to a list.
      (setf data (eval-string (format nil "(list ~a)" txt)))
      ;; Sanity check the data.
      (cond
       ((/= (length data) 3)
          (throw 'err "Error.\nFile must contain one label per line."))
       ((or (not (numberp (first data)))
            (not (numberp (second data))))
          (throw 'err "Error.\nMalformed label file.")))
      ; Return single label.
      data)
    
    
    (defun openfile(filename)
      ;;; Open file with error checking.
      ;;; Return file pointer (fp).
      (setf fp (open filename))
      (when (not fp)
        (throw 'err (format nil "Error.~%~s could not be opened." filename)))
      fp)
    
    
    (defun process-file (fp)
      ;;; Reads data from file pointer and create one label from each line.
      ;;; Return a list of labels.
      (let ((labels ()))
        (do ((txt (read-line fp) (read-line fp)))
            ((not txt) labels)
          (push (label-from-text txt) labels))))
    
    
    (defun process()
      ;;; 'Main' function.
      ;;; Process each file path in turn and concatenate the lists of labels.
      ;;; Return all labels.
      (let ((file-list (get-files filepaths))
            (labels ()))
        (dolist (path file-list labels)
          (setf fp (openfile path))
          (setf labels (append labels (process-file fp)))
          (close fp))))
    
    
    ; Call the 'main' function, and catch any errors.
    (catch 'err (process))

    Linux: /home/<username>/Documents/

    Linux: /home/<username>/Documents/

    Linux: /home/<username>/Documents/

    Linux: /home/<username>/.audacity-data/

    wxFileDialog
    wxFileDialog
    wildcard
    Important:
    • Nyquist plugin headers normally begin with one single semicolon at the beginning of each line.

    • Headers must be all lower-case except for quoted text (for example: "name") which may include upper-case characters.

    • Malformed plugin headers are ignored (treated as normal code comments).

    • Audacity 2.3.0 adds a new style of header for plugins that are shipped with Audacity which provides multi-language translation support.

    Locale Support

    Translated headers begin with a dollar character ("$") rather than a semi-colon. The string to be translated is double quoted, and appears between (_ and ).

    Multi-language support for a plugin's GUI is available only to plugins that are shipped with Audacity, as the translations must be compiled into Audacity's language files.

    See also: Plugin Translations.

    Example:

    Header Syntax

    All plugin headers have the syntax: ;keyword args, where args are the parameters ("arguments") for the header command.

    Required plugin headers:

    These headers are required in all Nyquist plugins.

    ****

    Defines the text file as a Nyquist plugin.

    "name"

    Sets the name of the plugin.

    "type"

    Specifies the type of plugin.

    version

    Specifies the Nyquist plugin version.

    Required plugin headers

    nyquist plug-in

    Tells Audacity "this is a Nyquist plugin". This should normally be the first line as it defines the contents of the file.

    name

    Name of the plugin as it will appear in the Audacity menu:

    Note that for plugins to be used in Chains, the colon character ":" cannot be used (as it is a special character in the Chain text file).

    If the plugin has an interface, the name should end with three dots so as to indicate that additional user action is required before the plugin is applied. Plugins that act immediately without additional user action should not have dots at the end of the name.

    type

    Only one ";type" line should be used.

    A plugin cannot appear in several Audacity menus at the same time, but it is possible to write several plugins with the same name and different ";type" lines. Each plugin will then appear in the appropriate menu. Using the same name for more than one plugin is not recommended and should generally be avoided.

    Type header
    Features
    Typical Role

    ;type analyze

    Plugin appears in the Audacity Analyze menu.

    • Analyzing selected track audio.

    • Durations are relative to the selection length.

    • Code iterates through each selected track.

    ;type generate

    Plugin appears in the Audacity Generate menu.

    • Generating audio.

    • Durations are absolute (1 "unit" of time = 1 second).

    • Code runs once only regardless of number of tracks.

    ;type process

    Plugin appears in the Audacity Effect menu.

    • Processing selected track audio.

    • Durations are relative to the selection length.

    • Code iterates through each selected track.

    Tool type plugins are typically Nyquist Macros or plugins that don't fit well in any of the first three roles. They may also be combined with one of the other types:

    Type header
    Features

    ;type tool analyze

    Appears in the Audacity Tools menu and behaves like an Analyze type.

    ;type tool generate

    Appears in the Audacity Tools menu and behaves like a Generate type.

    ;type tool process

    Appears in the Audacity Tools menu and behaves like a Process type.

    version

    Use only one ";version" line.

    All new plugins should use the most recent version number so that all current features are available. The version line is required to allow Audacity to run the plugin correctly and prevents plugins with new features from being loaded in an old Audacity program that is missing required features.

    Version header
    Features

    ;version 1

    Slider Widget

    ;version 2

    Text input widget added

    ;version 3

    multiple-Choice widget added

    ;version 4

    • Additional global variables to pass additional information from Audacity to Nyquist.

    • New optional plugin headers:

    Display headers

    author

    Name of the plugin Author. If this line is added, its text will appear in the Audacity Effect Menu when sorted or grouped by "Publisher". The author name string must be quoted.

    copyright

    A short statement of the copyright/license terms. For plugins shipped with Audacity, this must be compatible with Audacity's GPL v2 license. The copyright string must be quoted.

    Recommended text for GPL v2 license:

    ;copyright "Released under terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 or later"

    Additional copyright details may be included in the plugin code comments, but must not conflict with the terms declared in the copyright header.

    release

    Displays a release version number for the plugin in the Manage > About menu.

    Plugins that are shipped with Audacity have a release version number equivalent to the Audacity version at the time that the plugin was last updated.

    Plugin authors may choose whichever versioning scheme they prefer, but should ensure that later versions of the plugin always have a later version number. If the version number has spaces, it must be enclosed in double quotes.

    Any one of the following are valid (though there should be only ONE release header in a plugin):

    release 1 release 0.0.1 release "1.0" release "3.5 beta"

    Functional headers

    codetype

    Declaration of code syntax. May be either lisp or sal (lower case).

    • For LISP syntax plugins this is usually omitted, but it should always be included for SAL syntax plugins.

    • If the code type is not declared in the Nyquist Prompt effect, Audacity attempts to deduce the correct syntax from the code.

    • The code type can only be Lisp syntax or SAL. It cannot be a mix of both.

    debugbutton

    Show or hide the Debug button. The default is to show the button, but for plugins that are shipped with Audacity, or other plugins that are believed to be bug free, the Debug button may be hidden by setting this to "false" or "disabled"

    or

    debugflags

    debugflags header
    Description

    ;debugflags trace

    Sets (LISP) or sal-traceback (SAL) and displays debug window if there is anything to show.

    This may be useful when showing debug info is integral to what the plugin does, or when debugging a script.

    ;debugflags notrace

    Disables tracenable (LISP) / sal-traceback (SAL). This prevents the debug window from opening on error, unless the Debug button has been pressed.

    If the Debug button has not been pressed and there is an error, the error message will be sent to Audacity's . Note that disabling tracenable limits the debug output to only the error message with little or no additional debugging information.

    ;debugflags compiler

    Set sal-compiler-debug to 'true'.

    Output from the SAL compiler is printed to the debug output. This may be viewed in the Debug window if enabled (for example, by clicking the Debug button), otherwise in the .

    ;debugflags nocompiler

    Set sal-compiler-debug to 'false'.

    Disables compiler messages from SAL. Only debug and error messages are printed to the debug output.

    These flags may be used in conjunction with the debugbutton header to provide a variety of behaviors.

    • debugbutton true, debugflags trace: Debug window opens if debug button pressed or if Nyquist printed to the debug window.

    • debugbutton false, debugflags trace: Debug button disabled, but debug window opens if Nyquist printed to the debug window.

    • debugbutton true, debugflags notrace: Debug window opens only when Debug button is pressed. If Debug button has NOT been pressed, any error messages that arise are routed to the Audacity log.

    • debugflags compiler, debugflags trace: (When using SAL syntax) The Debug window always opens to display the output from the SAL compiler.

    • debugflags compiler, debugflags notrace: (When using SAL syntax) The Debug window only opens to display the output from the SAL compiler if Debug button is clicked, otherwise it is printed to the Audacity log.

    • debugflags nocompiler, debugflags trace: (When using SAL syntax) The Debug window always opens to display debug and/or error messages. Output from the SAL compiler is suppressed.

    helpfile

    A Help button may be added to the plugin GUI by giving the relative path and name of a help file. As the button can only be created if the plugin has a GUI, this header should not be used in plugins that do not have a GUI.

    The file path is relative to the plugin search path. Normally the help file would be placed in the same location as the plugin when it is installed. To support HTML files with images and/or media, the help file and its resources may be in a folder, and the folder included in the file path. For example, if the help file is called "my_effect.html" and it includes images, then the html file and images may be placed in a folder called "my_effect_help", and the helpfile header would be:

    If the help file is not found, the ? button will not appear.

    manpage

    This is primarily intended for use by plugins that are shipped with Audacity. It is similar to the helpfile header, except that it looks for the help file in the search path for Audacity's manual. As with ";helpfile" it should only be used in plugins that have a GUI. For more information, see Location of Manual

    maxlen

    Specifies the maximum number of samples to be processed in "process" or "analyze" type plugins. This can help the progress bar if length that will be processed is determined by the plugin rather than by the length of selection. It could also be used as a fail-safe for plugins that are specifically designed for short selections. This example limits the number of samples to 1 million:

    When the MAXLEN header is used, the Nyquist global variable LEN is the maximum of "length of selection in samples" and "value set by MAXLEN".

    In "process" type effects, this may cause the selected audio to be truncated to the specified number of samples. In such cases it may be best to throw an error if "maxlen" is exceeded, for example:

    mergeclips

    Allows Nyquist plugins to override Audacity's default "clip merge" behaviour. By default, when effects (including generator effects) are applied across one or more clip boundaries and the returned audio is a different length from the original selection, Audacity will add "split lines" at the ends of the returned audio. In all other cases, the returned audio is "merged" into the current audio.

    This option only applies when the plugin is applied across clip boundaries (including across "split lines").

    Clip Merge Options

    • -1 Automatic clip merge behaviour (default)

    • 0 Don't merge clips. Effects that are applied across clip boundaries will not be merged into the existing audio (there will be split lines at the ends of the returned audio) whether the returned audio is the same length as the original selection or not.

    • 1 Always merge clips. The returned audio will always be merged into the existing audio (no split lines added).

    See also "restoresplits".

    preview

    Provides options for previewing the effect. Multiple preview options may be defined to achieve the desired behaviour.

    Preview Options

    • enabled (default). Preview is enabled.

    • true Same as "enabled".

    • disabled Preview is disabled. If Audacity is unable to provide a meaningful preview, then preview should be disabled. This may be required for effects that affect specific time regions within the selection.

    • false Same as "disabled".

    • linear Provides an optimisation for previewing multiple tracks by mixing the selected tracks before applying the Nyquist code. This optimisation is disabled by default.

    • selection When previewing, the Nyquist code is applied to the entire selection (not just the length that will be previewed). Audacity's "Preview" then plays the first few seconds of the processed audio. This may be required for effects that vary over the duration of the selection.

    restoresplits

    Allows Nyquist plugins to override Audacity's default "split restore" behaviour. By default, when effects (including generator effects) are applied across one or more clip boundaries, Audacity will restore "split lines" at the position of the original clip boundaries.

    This option only applies when the plugin is applied across clip boundaries (including across "split lines").

    Restore Splits Options

    • 1 Splits at clip boundaries are restored (default)

    • 0 Splits at clip boundaries are not restored (clips are joined).

    Note: Nyquist plugins are not currently able to distinguish between silence and "empty space" within the selection, so gaps between audio clips will be treated as if the empty space is an additional "silent" audio clip.

    See also "mergeclips".

    Obsolete plugin headers

    These headers are obsolete and no longer used by Audacity. They should not be used in new plugins.

    They may still be found in some old plugins, but are now treated by Audacity as ordinary "comments" and simply disregarded.

    action

    Description shown in progress window.

    categories

    Specifies an LV2 category for the plugin.

    info

    A single line of text to be displayed at the top border of the plugin window. For multiple lines of text, a two-character sequence "\n" may be used within "text" to create a line break.

    Control headers

    If the plugin includes at least one properly formed "Control" header, Audacity will launch the plugin with a GUI.

    Each valid "Control" header adds a widget to the GUI. If there are no "Control" headers, Audacity will attempt to run the effect without a GUI.

    There can be several "control" lines in the plugin header. Add one for each widget to appear in the dialog box. The ;control headers should normally be the final headers as they define variables used by the Nyquist code.

    code comments
    ;keyword args
    $name (_ "Name of Effect")
     ;nyquist plug-in
     ;name "name"
     ;author "Name of Plugin Author(s)"
     ;copyright "copyright text"
     ;codetype type
     ;debugbutton false
     ;debugbutton disabled
     ;helpfile path to file
     ;helpfile "my_effect_help/my_effect.html"
     ;manpage URL
     ;maxlen 1000000
    ;maxlen 1000000
    
    (defun isok ()
      ;; Return true if selection is less than "maxlen".
      (let ((start (get '*selection* 'start))
            (end (get '*selection* 'end)))
        (<= (truncate (* *sound-srate* (- end start))) len)))
     ;mergeclips -1
     ;mergeclips 0
     ;mergeclips 1
     ;preview enabled
     ;preview true
     ;preview disabled
     ;preview false
     ;preview linear
     ;preview selection
     ;restoresplits 1
     ;restoresplits 0
     ;action "text"
     ;categories "text"
     ;info "text"
     ;control parameters
    ;copyright
  • ;maxlen

  • ;mergeclips

  • ;preview

  • ;release

  • ;restoresplits

  • Display Headers:

    Display additional information about the plugin. These headers are optional.

    ;author "text"

    Name of plugin developer. Shown in the "About" section of Manage. Also used when effects are sorted by "Publisher".

    ;copyright "text"

    Copyright / license notice. Shown in the "About" section of Manage.

    ;release version

    Version / release number of the plugin. Shown in the "About" section of Manage.

    Functional Headers:

    These headers may be used to provide additional functionality.

    ;codetype type

    Specifies if the Nyquist code uses SAL or LISP syntax.

    ;debugbutton option

    Specifies if the Debug button is visible.

    ;debugflags flags

    Sets the debug message behavior.

    ;helpfile "path to file"

    Displays a Help button that links to a plugin Help file.

    ;manpage "URL"

    Displays a Help button that links to the plugin Help page in the Audacity manual.

    ;maxlen integer

    Sets the maximum number of samples to be processed.

    ;mergeclips integer

    Specifies the clip merge behavior.

    ;preview option

    Specifies the plugin Preview options.

    ;restoresplits integer

    Specifies the clip split behavior.

    Obsolete Headers:

    These headers are no longer used by current versions of Audacity and are ignored.

    ;action "text"

    Ignored.

    ;categories "text"

    Ignored.

    ;info "text"

    Ignored.

    Control Headers:

    These headers define the plugin GUI.

    ;control <args>

    The parameters (<args>) specify the type of widget and the widget's required arguments. See also: Nyquist Plugins Widgets

    ;type tool

    Plugin appears in the Audacity Tools menu.

    • Nyquist Macros / Other.

    • Nyquist cannot directly modify the project.

    ;nyquist plug-in
    ;name
    ;type
    ;version
    ;author
    tracenable
    log
    Audacity log

    Filters and EQ

    Band-Stop Filter

    A band-rejection filter that passes most frequencies unaltered, but stops those in a specific range.

    2KB
    Bandstop.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A band-rejection filter that passes most frequencies unaltered, but stops those in a specific range.

    Parameters:

    Center Frequency: 100.0 to 10000.0 [Hz]. Set the 'Center Frequency' slider, or type in a value for the center of the frequency band to block.

    Stop-Band Width: 0.250 to 4.000 [Octaves]. Set the Stop-Band Width to determine how wide the cut frequency band will be. Smaller numbers will produce a narrower 'notch' and larger numbers will cut a broader band of frequencies.

    This filter uses steep high-pass and low-pass filters to achieve the band-stop effect. The filters iterate to improve the band-stop efficiency for narrow band width and can thereby perform close to total blocking down to almost 1/4 octave.

    For even narrower notches a notch filter should be used.

    Chebyshev Type I Filter

    Type I Chebyshev filters can provide a steeper than but at the expense of more in the .

    Details

    Author: Kai Fisher

    A with options for high-pass or low-pass operation.

    Type I Chebyshev filters can provide a steeper than but at the expense of more in the . The plugin provides unity gain (except for ripple) in the passband. This plugin is capable of providing an exceptionally steep cut-off transition by selecting a "high order".

    Parameters:

    Classic EQ

    An Equalizer (EQ) that can modify more than one band at a time.

    Details

    Authors: Josu Etxeberria and David R.Sky.

    An Equalizer (EQ) that can modify more than one band at a time. You have 15 bands to choose from and can manipulate all of of them independently by moving their sliders.

    Comb Filter

    The name 'comb' filter comes from how it acts on the audio spectrum it's applied to: it looks like a comb with the teeth pointing up.

    Details

    Author:

    The name 'comb' filter comes from how it acts on the audio spectrum it's applied to: it looks like a comb with the teeth pointing up. For example, if you set the comb frequency at 1000 Hz, the comb filter emphasizes 1000 Hz as well as 2000, 3000, 4000 Hz and succeeding frequencies. Produces an 'airy' effect, which is more pronounced the higher the comb decay value is set, and resonance is increasingly produced as well.

    A comb filter can be produced using flanger-like settings on a delay effect, but this filter does not use a delay to get the result, so it does sound somewhat different.

    Parameters:

    Customizable EQ

    Customizable single-band equalizer.

    Details

    Author:

    Parameters:

    1. Center frequency: [Hz, 20 - 20000, default 440]

    2. Band width in octaves

    Desk EQ

    This equalizer is modelled on the EQ section of the Allen & Heath GL series mixing desk.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    This EQ is modelled on the EQ section of the Allen & Heath(TM) GL series mixing desk.

    It is a 4-band EQ (equaliser) with two semi-parametric mids and provides independent control of four frequency bands plus a low frequency roll-off switch (HPF). Allen & Heath (along with Soundcraft and Neve) are well known for their distinctive "". The two "mid" filters are bell shaped peak/dip filters which affect frequencies around a center point which can be swept from 500 Hz to 15 kHz, and 35 Hz to 1 kHz respectively. The width of the band is selected to provide effective control for both creative and corrective equalisation.

    Parameters:

    High Pass Filter with Q

    A high pass filter with Q, or resonance.

    Details

    Author:

    A high pass filter with Q, or resonance. A high pass filter attenuates frequencies below a given cut-off point. The higher Q is, the more the cut-off frequency will resonate (produce a tone). Applied to white noise, both this filter and the low pass filter with Q can be used to produce wind-like sounds at a constant frequency. See the and low pass filter (LFO) for ability to modulate a fixed resonance cut-off frequency.

    Parameters:

    1. Cut-off frequency: [20 - 10000 Hz, default 1000]

    High Pass Filter (LFO)

    A high pass filter with a low frequency oscillator (LFO).

    Details

    Author:

    A high pass filter with a low frequency oscillator (LFO). A high pass filter attenuates frequencies below a given cut-off point. The LFO in this plugin modulates the cut-off frequency up and down, like on an electronic synthesizer.

    Parameters:

    1. LFO frequency: [0 - 20 Hz, default 0.2] - defines the speed of the oscillation, higher is faster

    High Pass Filter (LFO) - Alternative version

    Details

    Author:

    Parameters:

    1. Center cut-off frequency: [20 to 20000 Hz, default 640]

    Hum Remover

    A filter for removing the sound of from recordings.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A filter for removing the sound of from recordings.

    The frequency of mains electricity is 60 Hz in the US, 50 Hz in Europe. This can create electrical interference in recordings with many . To remove the hum, this effect applies a series of notch filters based on the frequencies of mains electricity and the harmonics, which have frequencies that are at exact multiples of that frequency.

    To minimize loss of audio data, the number of harmonics may be adjusted so that only as many notches as required to eliminate the audible hum are applied. There are often more odd harmonics than even harmonics, so this effect allows the number of odd and even harmonic filters to be set independently.

    Unless the amount of hum is very bad, high level audio will often mask the hum, making removal unnecessary, but during quiet parts of the recording the hum may be unpleasantly obtrusive. This effect therefore has a threshold level control so that only quiet sounds (where the hum will be most noticeable) are filtered.

    The effect can often provide a useful guide as to which frequencies need to be removed.

    First, select 50 or 60 Hz with the first control as appropriate, then set the other controls to maximum. Preview the effect frequently while reducing one control at a time to find the minimum settings required to remove the hum.

    Low Pass Filter (LFO)

    A low pass filter with a low frequency oscillator (LFO).

    Details

    Author:

    A low pass filter with a low frequency oscillator (LFO). A low pass filter attenuates frequencies above a given cut-off point. The LFO in this plugin modulates the cut-off frequency up and down, like on an electronic synthesizer.

    Parameters:

    1. LFO frequency: [0 - 20 Hz, default 0.2] - defines the speed of the oscillation, higher is faster

    Low Pass Filter (LFO) - Alternative version

    Details

    Author:

    Parameters:

    1. Center cut-off frequency: [20 20000 Hz, default 640]

    2. LFO depth (radius):

    Low Pass Filter with Q

    A low pass filter with Q, or resonance.

    Details

    Author:

    A low pass filter with Q, or resonance. A low pass filter attenuates frequencies above a given cut-off point. The higher Q is, the more the cut-off frequency will resonate (produce a tone). Applied to white noise, both this filter and the high pass filter with Q can be used to produce wind-like sounds at a constant frequency. See the and for ability to modulate a fixed resonance cut-off frequency.

    1. Cut-off frequency: [20 - 10000 Hz, default 1000]

    Multiband EQ

    A multiband equalizer.

    Details

    Author:

    Select total number of bands (T, from 2 to 30), band number (1 to 30, depending on how many total bands T you chose), and apply gain (-24 to +24 db). Determines width of band depending on total band number T you chose.

    Mutron

    Loosely based on the Mutron stomp box from the late 70's. Basically it is a filter controlled by an envelope follower.

    Details

    Author: Steven Jones.

    Loosely based on the Mutron stomp box from the late 70's. Basically it is a filter controlled by an envelope follower.

    Parameters:

    1. Center/Cut-off: [0 - 10000 Hz, default 100] - sets the static filter frequency

    Notch Filter

    A notch filter cuts out a "notch" in the spectrum of your audio.

    Details

    Authors: Steve Daulton and Bill Wharrie.

    Like its name suggests, a notch filter cuts out a "notch" in the spectrum of your audio. The default frequency (60 Hz) can remove much of the hum that recordings can acquire from 60 Hz mains supply (as used in North and Central America and much of South America). You can set Frequency to 50 Hz to counteract mains hum in other countries. See .

    Filter frequencies above 10000 Hz may be entered by typing the value but are only valid up to half of the sample rate of the audio being processed. Q values outside of the slider range can be entered by typing the values but must be greater than 0.01.

    Parameters:

    Parametric EQ

    A parametric equalizer is a variable equalizer effect which provides control of three parameters: amplitude, center frequency and bandwidth.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton and Bill Wharrie

    A parametric equalizer is a variable equalizer effect which provides control of three parameters: amplitude, center frequency and bandwidth. This plugin provides control of one frequency band that can be "tuned" to a user defined center frequency. The width of the affected frequency band may be adjusted with the "Width" control and the defined frequency band may be boosted or attenuated according to the "Gain" control.

    Parameters:

    1. Frequency (Hz): [10 to 10000 Hz, default 1000 Hz] - sets the center frequency of the filter

    Random Low Pass Filter

    Like someone is playing around with the cut-off frequency knob of your low pass filter.

    Details

    Author:

    Like someone is playing around with the cut-off frequency knob of your low pass filter. Because of the way the random signal is generated, the lower the maximum speed is, the higher the depth factor must be to produce a similar depth of filtering changes. If you generate white noise then apply this effect, you can to some extent simulate constant pitch wind noise.

    Parameters:

    1. Max filter sweep speed: [0.01 - 10.0 Hz, default 0.2] - maximum speed of the random filter cut-off changes

    Resonant Filter

    A filter with low pass, high pass and band pass options with a "resonance" control.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A filter with low pass, high pass and band pass options with a "resonance" control.

    Audio filters are commonly designed to have a smooth frequency response that is essentially flat in the pass band then rolls off to a lower level in the stop band, but in some cases it is desirable to use a filter that has a peak and accentuates frequencies close to the defined filter frequency. Such filters are commonly used in sound synthesis to cause "ringing" at specified frequencies. This tends to be most effective with sounds that have complex frequency content, such as noise.

    Parameters:

    Shelf Filter

    A shelf filter with options for high shelf, low shelf or mid-band.

    Details

    Author: Steve Daulton

    A shelf filter with options for high shelf, low shelf or mid-band.

    Low-shelf filter passes all frequencies, but increases or reduces frequencies below the shelf frequency by specified amount. High-shelf filter passes all frequencies, but increases or reduces frequencies above the shelf frequency by specified amount. Mid-band shelf filter passes all frequencies, but increases or reduces frequencies between the low and high cut-off frequencies by specified amount.

    Parameters:

    Ten Band EQ

    An Equalizer (EQ) that can modify one band at a time.

    Details

    Author:

    An Equalizer (EQ) that can modify one band at a time. Select the band number (1 to 10) and gain (-24 to +24 dB).

    Vocal reduction and isolation

    Warning: This effect can cause data loss on macOS. See for details.

    This is the vocal reduction and isolation effect that was included in Audacity prior version 3.5.

    Details

    Vocal Reduction and Isolation attempts to remove or isolate center-panned audio from a stereo track. Vocals are sometimes (but not always) recorded in this way. The simplest and quickest removal method subtracts one channel from the other, but the result will be (dual) mono. This method is available at "Remove Center Classic: (Mono)" under Action. All other "Remove" options in this effect preserve the stereo image.

    The Isolate options all return (dual) mono output. The narrowness of the center slice can be adjusted with the "Strength" slider. Center isolation is not possible using the classic subtraction method.

    The Analyze option displays the amount of correlation between the stereo channels and the degree of likelihood that center removal or isolation will work effectively.

    WARNING: Note carefully that when you apply an effect to a time-stretched clip the changed speed of the clip will be automatically

    Filter Type: [choice: Lowpass / Highpass] (default Lowpass)
  • Order: [choice 2 to 30 in steps of 2] (default 6) The higher the "order" number, the steeper the cut-off transition from the passband to stop band.

  • Cut-off Frequency: [1 to 48000 Hz] (default 1000 Hz). The actual filter frequency is limited to half of the track sample rate (the Nyquist frequency). For example, if the track sample rate is 44100 Hz, then setting the Cut-off frequency to any value greater than 22050 will produce the same result as setting the frequency to 22050 Hz.

  • Ripple: [0.0 to 3.0 dB] (default 0.05) Lower values will produce less ripple in the passband at the expense of a less steep cut-off. Higher values will produce a steeper cut-off but with more ripple in the passband. The difference in ripple and cut-off slope is likely to be most noticeable with low order filters and may be noticed as a slight boost or ringing in the passband just before the cut-off frequency.

  • When Ripple is set to zero, the passband response is essentially flat and the filter has the characteristics of a Butterworth filter.

    The high-pass and low-pass filters may be used one after the other to produce a "flat topped" band-pass effect, in which the lower cut-off is provided by the high-pass filter and the upper cut-off provided by the low pass filter. The passband is the frequency band that passes between these two cut-off frequencies.

    Comb frequency: [Hz, 20 - 5000, default 440]

  • Comb decay: [0 - 0.1, default 0.025]

  • Normalization level: [0.0 - 1.0, default 0.95]

  • [octaves, 0.1 - 5.0, default 1.0]
  • Gain: [dB, -48.0 - +48.0, default 0.0]

  • Apply normalization? [Default = "no"]

  • Normalization level: [0.0 - 1.0, default 0.95]

  • 100 Hz HPF: (+/- 15 dB) attenuates frequencies below 100 Hz by 12 dB per octave. It may be used to reduce low frequency noise such as microphone popping, stage noise and tape transport rumble.

  • HF Gain: sets the gain of the high frequency shelf filter which boosts or cuts high frequencies. Positive values will tend to make the sound "brighter". Negative values will tend to make the sound less bright.

  • High-Mid Frequency: (500 Hz to 15 kHz) sets the center frequency of the high-mid band filter.

  • High-Mid Gain: (+/- 15 dB) sets the gain of the high-mid band filter.

  • Low-Mid Frequency: (35 Hz to 1 kHz) sets the center frequency of the low-mid band filter.

  • Low-Mid Gain: (+/- 15 dB) sets the gain of the low-mid band filter.

  • LF Gain: (+/- 15 dB) sets the gain of the low frequency shelf filter. Positive values will tend to give the sound more bass and negative values will reduce the bass.

  • Filter Q (resonance): [0 - 5, default 1]

  • Lower cut-off frequency: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 160]

  • Upper cut-off frequency: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 2560]

  • LFO starting phase: [-180 to + 180 degrees, default 0]

  • LFO depth (radius):
    [0.0 to 10.0, default 1] - how far (in octaves) from center f the filter sweeps.
  • LFO frequency: [0.0 to 20.0, default 0.2]

  • LFO starting phase: [-180 to + 180 degrees, default 0]

  • Parameters:

    1. Select Region: [Europe (50Hz) or USA (60Hz), default 50Hz] - Sets the fundamental hum frequency.

    2. Number of odd Harmonics: [0 to 200, default 1] - The first harmonic is 50 or 60 Hz depending on the region selected.

    3. Number of even Harmonics: [0 to 200, default 0] - The number of even harmonics to filter.

    4. Hum Threshold Level (0 to 100%): [0 to 100, default 10] - The signal level, as a percentage of 'full scale' below which the filters are applied.

    Lower cut-off frequency: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 160]

  • Upper cut-off frequency: [20 - 20000 Hz, default 2560]

  • LFO starting phase: [-180 to + 180 degrees, default 0]

  • [0.0 to 10.0, default 1] - how far (in octaves) from center f the filter sweeps.
  • LFO frequency: [0.0 to 20.0, default 0.2]

  • LFO starting phase: [-180 to + 180 degrees, default 0]

  • Filter q (resonance): [0 - 5, default 1]

    Depth: [-10000 - +10000 Hz, default 5000] - sets the negative or positive filter modulation depth

  • Band Width: [50 - 400 Hz, default 100] - controls the resonance, lower values being more resonant

  • Mode: [0="Low" 1="High" 2="Notch" 3="Band" (default)] - sets the filter mode: 0 = "Low pass", 1 = High pass, 2 = Band Reject (cut a notch at the filter frequency), 3 = Band Pass

  • Frequency: [0 - 10000 Hz, default 60 Hz]

  • Q: [0.1 - 20.00, default 1.00] - determines the width of the notch. Below 1 creates a wider notch, above 1 creates a narrower notch.

  • Width: [0 to 10, default 5] - determines the width of the affected frequency band. Greater width settings affect a broader range of frequencies. Smaller width affects a narrower band of frequencies. Numerically the width setting is approximately the half gain width in half octaves, thus the default setting of 5 has a half gain width of approximately 2.5 octaves.

  • Gain (dB): [-15 to +15 dB, default 0 dB (no effect)] - how much the filter center frequency is boosted or attenuated.

  • Filter depth factor: [1 - 300, default 20] - how extreme the random filter cut-off changes are

  • Maximum cut-off frequency: [20 - 5000 H, default 2000] - the filter's maximum cut-off frequency

  • Filter frequency: [1 to 20000 Hz] (default: 1000 Hz) - The corner frequency of the filter. The frequency must be below the Nyquist Frequency (half the sample rate) or an error message will be displayed.
  • Resonance (Q): [0.1 to 100] (default: 10) - The amount of resonance. Higher values will produce a more pronounced and narrower peak at the corner frequency. Lower values will produce a less prominant peak with values below 0.7 showing no peak at all.

  • Filter type: [choice: Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass] (default: Low Pass) - Low pass allows frequencies below the corner frequency to pass through the filter and reduces frequencies above the corner. High Pass allows frequencies above the corner to pass and reduces frequencies below the corner. Band Pass reduces frequencies that are below the corner and reduces frequencies that are above the corner, allowing only a band of frequencies around the corner frequency to pass.

  • Output Gain: [-60 to 0 dB] (default -12 dB) - Because the resonance accentuates frequencies around the corner frequency it is often necessary to reduce the output level of this effect. Lower (more negative) values reduce the level more.

  • Filter type: [low-shelf / high-shelf / mid-band] - specifies which type of filter
  • Low frequency cut-off: [1 to 10000 Hz] - The corner frequency for the low shelf filter, or the lower corner frequency for the mid-band filter.

  • High frequency cut-off: [0.1 to 20 kHz] - The corner frequency for the high shelf filter, or the upper corner frequency for the mid-band filter. The high frequency cut-off must be less than half the track sample rate.

  • Filter gain: [+/- 30 dB] - how much to boost or cut the filtered audio. Positive values boot and negative values reduce the level.

  • rendered
    .
    • If you apply an effect to a selection within a time-stretched clip then Audacity will split the original clip so that the selection can be rendered as part of applying the effect.

    Action

    Bandwidth Limited Actions

    WARNING: The Low Cut and High Cut sliders affect these actions.

    • Remove Vocals: to mono: (default). If the audio is center-panned, removes the vocal range defined by the Low Cut and High Cut sliders, and returns it as a dual-channel mono track. Audio is said to be "center-panned" if it is common to both left and right channels. Cancellation of center panned audio is achieved by the well known "invert and mix" method.

    NOTE: This option is usually much quicker than the other actions because the processing is much simpler.

    • This setting is identical to the "Vocal Remover > Remove frequency band" effect in previous versions of Audacity.

    • The Strength slider is not used when "Remove Vocals: to mono:" is selected.

    • Remove Vocals: If the audio is center-panned, removes the vocal range defined by the Low Cut and High Cut sliders, and returns it as a stereo track.

    • Isolate Vocals: If the audio is center-panned, extracts the slider-defined vocal range and returns it as a (dual) mono track.

    • Isolate Vocals and Invert: If the audio is center-panned, extracts the slider-defined vocal range and returns it as an inverted (dual) mono track.

    HINT: Inverting a waveform is the action of flipping the audio samples upside-down, reversing their polarity. The positive samples (above the horizontal zero line in the Audacity Waveform) are moved below the zero line (so becoming negative), and negative samples are made positive.

    • This option is equivalent to applying the Isolate Vocals option and then inverting.

    • The "and Invert" options may be useful when processing using duplicated tracks. See the examples below.

    Full Spectrum Actions

    WARNING: The Low Cut and High Cut sliders have no effect with these actions.

    • Remove Center: to mono: Removes all audio (the whole frequency spectrum) that is common to both left and right channels and returns a (dual) mono track. Cancellation of center panned audio is achieved by the well known "invert and mix" method.

    NOTE: This option is usually much quicker than the other actions because the processing is much simpler.

    • This setting is identical to the "Vocal Remover > entire spectrum" effect in previous versions of Audacity.

    • None of the sliders are used when "Remove Center: to mono" is selected.

    • Remove Center: Removes all audio (the whole frequency spectrum) that is common to both left and right channels and returns a true stereo track.

    • Isolate Center: If the audio is center-panned, extracts the whole frequency spectrum and returns it as a (dual) mono track.

    • Isolate Center and Invert: If the audio is center-panned, extracts the whole frequency spectrum from and returns it as an inverted (dual) mono track.

    INFO: This option is equivalent to applying the Isolate Center option and then inverting.

    Analysis Action

    • Analyze: Tells you how great the chances are of a successful vocal reduction or isolation. It returns also the average Pan position for the selected audio. See below for an in-depth explanation.

    NOTE: This option only analyzes the audio. The selected audio is not modified by the effect.

    Strength

    The shape of the center is not a thin band but rather like a tent with a pole in the middle. This means that there will always audio from other pan positions included. The Strength slider modifies the shape of the center. Higher values increase the degree of reduction or isolation. Zero is off (no reduction or isolation). This slider has no effect with the "Remove Center Classic: (Mono)" choice.

    Remove

    • Less than 1.0: Produces a notch with a V shape like a ship's keel, but also with a sharp point. Use this setting to preserve some amount of the center.

    • 1.0 - the default: Produces a notch with a V shape. The power distribution is preserved. This is the ideal setting for most cases.

    • Greater than 1.0: Produces a notch with a U shape. This removes some audio adjacent to the center, as well as the center. Note that this will not remove stereo reverberation since it is distributed over the entire pan width.

    Isolate

    • Less than 1.0: Produces a peak like a U shape upside down, similar to an arch. Only extreme left and right are eliminated.

    • 1.0 - the default: Produces a peak like a ''V'' shape upside down. The power distribution is preserved. You might want a higher value when a lot of side audio leaks in. This is also the recommended setting when working with two tracks (options with ...and Invert).

    • Greater than 1.0: Produces a peak with an A shape like the Eiffel Tower (with a sharp point). This will attenuate most of the side energy but might produce artifacts or musical noise. Normalize the audio after using Isolate with a high strength setting.

    Low Cut for Vocals

    All actions with Vocals in the name use this value. The frequencies below will either not be removed or not be included in the isolated audio. It is useful to exclude bass and kick drum. The default value of 120 Hz is good for most lead vocals, or even low male voices. You can enter a higher value around 170 Hz for female voices and about 230 Hz for those of children. NOTE: This control only affects "Actions" that contain the word Vocals in their name.

    High Cut for Vocals

    All actions with Vocals in the name use this value. The frequencies above will either not be removed or not be included in the isolated audio. It is useful to exclude high sounds like bells, cymbals or Hi-hat. Note that human sounds like S or Z can also be very high in frequency - 5000 to 8000 Hz, so listen carefully to the preview. NOTE: This control only affects "Actions" that contain the word Vocals in their name.

    Interpreting the analysis results

    It is recommended to analyze the audio prior to actual processing of the effect. Analysis is very fast compared to the time needed for processing.

    The two important values are:

    • Pan Position: This gives the average pan position for the whole selected audio. The value of the track pan slider is not included in this calculation.

    • Correlation: This is a measure for the similarity of the two channels. Values of +/-100 mean that the channels are exactly the same, even if one is inverted. A value of 0 means no relationship. It is fruitless to attempt removal or isolation in these cases. The ideal value is normally around +50. Values below 0 are rare and indicate that the stereo width is more than 100%. Inverting one channel makes the correlation positive.

    NOTE Sometimes the lead vocals are not exactly in the middle. In this case, select a short portion of audio where only the voice is audible and no other instrument. Choose Analyze.

    1. The correlation should be fairly high (around 100) which would indicate that there is indeed only the voice.

    2. Copy the value for the Pan Position. Double-click in the Pan slider to open the adjustment dialog then paste in the value with reversed sign (that is, put a minus sign in front of a positive value and a positive sign in front of a negative value).

    3. Mix and render the track. The voice will now be exactly centered and you can remove or isolate it.

    4. Do not forget to readjust the selection.

    Limitations

    • The input must be a true stereo track and not mere (dual) mono.

    • Stereo Reverberation will not be fully removed because it is independently distributed over the whole stereo image.

    • Naturally the plug-in does not know what kind of audio is in the center. All is removed or isolated equally, whether vocals, bass or solo instruments.

    • This effect is quite slow, except for the "Remove Center Classic: (Mono)" and "Analyze" actions.

    WARNING: The whole processing is done in memory. Long selections (over half an hour) might therefore cause Audacity to crash.

    Examples

    This effect can be used in a variety of ways:

    • Creating a Karaoke version from an original song Choose Remove Vocals if you want to keep some bass and drum beat.

    • Creating an acapella version from an original song Choose Isolate Vocals with a high Strength value. The result will probably still have some music in it. It is therefore better suited for a remix with a different accompaniment. Pure vocal versions have to be post-processed with other tools.

    • Alternative to "Auto Duck" with podcasts Duplicate the track and choose Isolate Center and Invert on the second track. Record your voice. Silence the second track where you do not speak and the original music should be heard. On the same track, make fades at the boundaries (where the speech starts or stops).

    • Removing excessive stereo reverb from a vocal or instrument track. Use Isolate to make a single vocal or instrument track "dry" again.

    • Removing random system noise from a two channel recording of a mono source. use Isolate to remove random noise produced by the audio interface, the cables or the computer itself.

    • Removing single words or phrases You can remove offending content from a song or movie dialog by selecting it and choosing Remove Vocals. Mask it with other sounds, if necessary.

    • Amplifying dialogs in a movie. Duplicate the track, isolate the vocals and adjust the gain.

    • Converting stereo files into 3.1, 5.1 and other multi-channel formats. Duplicate the track and choose "Isolate Center and Invert" on the second track. Render all to a new track. Delete the first track, invert the second track and split the third track. Rearrange the tracks accordingly. Thus you end up with "Front Left", "Center" and "Front Right" eventually.

    • Extracting instrument solos Isolate the center if the solo is there, otherwise remove the center, split to mono and delete the superfluous track.

    • Blending between original, karaoke version and vocals only Duplicate the track and choose Isolate Vocals and Invert on the second track. Choose the envelope tool or fade effects to gradually change from one mode to the other. Silencing the first track results in the vocals being isolated. Silencing the second track produces the original audio. Playing both tracks together removes the vocals.

    • Correcting the pan position Analyze the whole track and copy the value for the pan position. Paste the value into the pan dialog and reverse the sign, that is, set a minus sign in front of positive values and vice versa.

    • Measuring similarity between two mono tracks Make the two tracks stereo and choose Analyze. The correlation value is the measure for the similarity in percent.

    • Applying a brick wall filter to mono tracks Duplicate a mono track, make it stereo and choose Isolate Vocals for band pass and Remove Vocals for band stop filtering. Adjust the frequencies accordingly.

    roll-off
    Butterworth filters
    ripple
    passband
    6KB
    ChebyI.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    Chebyshev filter
    roll-off
    Butterworth filters
    ripple
    passband
    3KB
    15bandEQ.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    875B
    comb.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    1KB
    eqcustom.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    Desk-eq.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    British EQ
    481B
    highpass2.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    high pass filter (LFO)
    1KB
    hplfo.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    879B
    lfohp.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    mains hum
    2KB
    De-hum.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    mains hum
    harmonics
    Plot Spectrum
    1KB
    lplfo.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    876B
    lfolp.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    474B
    lowpass2.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    low pass filter (LFO)
    high pass filter (LFO)
    1KB
    multibandeq.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    2KB
    Mutron.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    995B
    notch.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    chart of mains frequencies by country
    1KB
    Parametric.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    977B
    randomlp.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    1KB
    Resonant.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    3KB
    Shelf.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    1KB
    10bandeq.ny
    Open
    Download Plugin
    David R.Sky
    #5864
    13KB
    vocalrediso.ny
    Open
    Download plugin

    Scripting reference

    This page lists scripting commands.

    Yes these are the same commands as in the menus, same as in "Commands and Shortcuts" too, just presented differently.

    • Presented in a format useful to people using:

      • Macros or

      • Python Scripting or

      • AUD-DO.

    • Most of this page is automatically generated.

    A few commands are intentionally omitted from the Macro Manager (such as "Close:") because they are unsuitable for use in Macros.

    This table shows the items in the menus that are scriptable.

    • The Scripting Ids, parameters and defaults are all likely to change between versions.

    • Boolean values must be given as 1 (true) or 0 (false).

    File Menu

    The File Menu provides commands for creating, opening and saving Audacity projects and importing and exporting audio files

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    File: Save Project

    Various ways to save a project.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    File: Export

    For exporting audio files

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    File: Import

    For importing audio files or label files into your project

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Edit Menu

    The Edit Menu provides standard edit commands (Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete) plus many other commands specific to editing audio or labels

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Edit: Remove Special

    For more "advanced" removal of audio

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Edit: Clip Boundaries

    Create or remove separate clips in the audio track. A clip inside an audio track is a separate section of that track which has been split so that it can be manipulated somewhat independently of the other clips in the track.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Edit: Labels

    These commands are to add and edit labels.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Edit: Labeled Audio

    Labeled Audio commands apply standard Edit Menu commands to the audio of one or more regions that are labeled. The labels themselves are not affected.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Select Menu

    Select Menu has commands that enable you make selections of tracks or parts of the tracks in your project.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Select: Tracks

    Tracks

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Select: Region

    For modifying, saving and restoring a selection.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Select: Spectral

    For making a selection of a frequency range.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Select: Clip Boundaries

    For modifying a selection, taking account of clips.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    View Menu

    View Menu has commands that determine the amount of detail you see in all the tracks in the project window. It also lets you show or hide Toolbars and some additional windows such as Undo History.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    View: Zoom

    Zoom in/out on the horizontal axis. Show more detail or show a longer length of time.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    View: Track Size

    Controls the sizes of tracks.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    View: Skip to

    Move forward/backwards through the audio

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    View: Toolbars

    Toolbars can be used to determine which of the Audacity toolbars are displayed. By default all toolbars are shown except Spectral Selection and Scrub

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport Menu

    Transport Menu commands let you play or stop, loop play, scrub play or record (including timed and sound activated recordings).

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport: Playing

    These commands control playback in Audacity. You can Start, Stop or Pause playback of the audio in your project.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport: Recording

    These commands control recording in Audacity. You can Start, Stop or Pause recording in your project. You can either start a recording on your existing track or on a new track.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport: Scrubbing

    Scrubbing is the action of moving the mouse pointer right or left so as to adjust the position, speed or direction of playback, listening to the audio at the same time - a convenient way to quickly navigate the waveform to find a particular event of interest. Speed changes are made by rotating the mouse wheel while scrubbing.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport: Cursor to

    These commands let you move the cursor to the start or end of the selection, track or any adjacent Clip that you may have

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Transport: Transport Options

    This submenu lets you manage and set various options for transport (playing and recording) in Audacity

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks Menu

    Tracks Menu provides commands for creating and removing tracks, applying operations to selected tracks such as mixing, resampling or converting from stereo to mono, and lets you add or edit labels.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Add New

    Adds a new track

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Mix

    Mixes down selected tracks to mono or stereo tracks

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Mute/Unmute

    Mutes or unmutes audio tracks in the project

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Pan

    Pans left right or center audio tracks in the project

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Align Tracks

    Commands that provide an automatic way of aligning selected tracks with the cursor, the selection, or with the start of the project.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tracks: Sort Tracks

    Sorts all tracks in the project from top to bottom in the project window, by Start Time or by Name.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Generate Menu

    Generate Menu lets you create audio containing tones, noise or silence.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Generate: Built-in

    Shows the list of available Audacity built-in effects but only if the user has effects "Grouped by Type" in Effects Preferences.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Generate: Nyquist

    Shows the list of available Nyquist effects but only if the user has effects "Grouped by Type" in Effects Preferences.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Effects Menu

    Audacity includes many built-in effects and also lets you use a wide range of plugin effects.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Effect: Built-in

    No special notes for Built-in

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Effect: Nyquist

    No special notes for Nyquist

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Analyze Menu

    The Analyze Menu contains tools for finding out about the characteristics of your audio, or labeling key feature.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Analyze: Nyquist

    No special notes for Nyquist

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tools Menu

    The Tools Menu contains customisable tools.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Tools: Apply Macro

    Displays a menu with list of all your Macros. Selecting any of these Macros by clicking on it will cause that Macro to be applied to the current project.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra Menu

    The Extra menu provides access to additional Commands that are not available in the normal default Audacity menus.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Transport

    Extra commands related to play and record

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Tools

    Extra commands to select the tool, for example time-shift, envelopes, multi-tool.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Mixer

    Extra commands related to volume

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Mixer

    Extra commands related to editing

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Play-at-Speed

    Extra commands related to play at speed

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Seek

    Extra commands related to seeking

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Device

    Extra commands related to selecting a device

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Selection

    Extra commands related to selecting.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Focus

    Extra commands to set focus, usually focus on one track

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Cursor

    Extra commands to move the cursor

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Track

    Extra commands to operate on a track that has focus

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Scriptables I

    These commands were originally written for scripting Audacity, e.g via a Python script that uses mod-script-pipe. The commands though are also present in the menu, available from macros, and available from within Nyquist using (AUD-DO "command")

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Extra: Scriptables II

    Like Scriptables I, but these ones are less commonly used from the menu.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Help Menu

    The Help Menu lets you find out more about the Audacity application and how to use it. It also includes some diagnostic tools.

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    Help: Diagnostics

    A set of diagnostic tools

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    No Menu

    These are additional commands that do not appear in any menu

    Scripting Id
    Action
    Parameters
    Description

    none

    Closes the current project window, prompting you to save your work if you have not saved.

    SaveProject:

    Save Project

    none

    Various ways to save a project.

    CompactProject:

    Compact Project

    none

    Compact your project to save disk space.

    PageSetup:

    Page Setup...

    none

    Opens the standard Page Setup dialog box prior to printing

    Print:

    Print...

    none

    Prints all the waveforms in the current project window (and the contents of Label Tracks or other tracks), with the Timeline above. Everything is printed to one page.

    Exit:

    Exit

    none

    Closes all project windows and exits Audacity. If there are any unsaved changes to your project, Audacity will ask if you want to save them.

    none

    Saves the current Audacity project .AUP3 file.

    SaveCompressed:

    Save Compressed Copy of Project...

    none

    Saves in the audacity .aup3 project file format, but compressed (Suitable for mailing)

    none

    Exports to an OGG file

    Export:

    Export Audio...

    none

    Exports to an audio file.

    ExportSel:

    Export Selected Audio...

    none

    Exports selected audio to a file.

    ExportLabels:

    Export Labels...

    none

    Exports audio at one or more labels to file(s).

    ExportMultiple:

    Export Multiple...

    none

    Exports multiple audio files in one process, one file for each track if there are multiple audio tracks, or labels can be added which then define the length of each exported file.

    ExportMIDI:

    Export MIDI...

    none

    Exports MIDI (note tracks) to a MIDI file.

    none

    Imports a MIDI (MIDI or MID extension) or Allegro (GRO) file to a Note Track where simple cut-and-paste edits can be performed. The result can be exported with the File > Export> > Export MIDI command. Note: Currently, MIDI and Allegro files cannot be played.

    ImportRaw:

    Raw Data...

    none

    Attempts to import an uncompressed audio file that might be "raw" data without any headers to define its format, might have incorrect headers or be otherwise partially corrupted, or might be in a format that Audacity is unable to recognize. Raw data in textual format cannot be imported.

    none

    Removes the selected audio data and/or labels and places these on the Audacity clipboard. By default, any audio or labels to right of the selection are shifted to the left.

    Delete:

    Delete

    none

    Removes the selected audio data and/or labels without copying these to the Audacity clipboard. By default, any audio or labels to right of the selection are shifted to the left.

    Copy:

    Copy

    none

    Copies the selected audio data to the Audacity clipboard without removing it from the project.

    Paste:

    Paste

    none

    Inserts whatever is on the Audacity clipboard at the position of the selection cursor in the project, replacing whatever audio data is currently selected, if any.

    Duplicate:

    Duplicate

    none

    Creates a new track containing only the current selection as a new clip.

    EditMetaData:

    Metadata...

    none

    The Metadata Editor modifies information about a track, such as the artist and genre. Typically used with MP3 files.

    Preferences:

    Preferences...

    none

    Preferences let you change most of the default behaviors and settings of Audacity. On Mac, Preferences are in the Audacity Menu and the default shortcut is ⌘ + ,.

    none

    Replaces the currently selected audio with absolute silence. Does not affect label tracks.

    Trim:

    Trim Audio

    none

    Deletes all audio but the selection. If there are other separate clips in the same track these are not removed or shifted unless trimming the entire length of a clip or clips. Does not affect label tracks.

    none

    If you select an area that overlaps one or more clips, they are all joined into one large clip. Regions in-between clips become silence.

    Disjoin:

    Detach at Silences

    none

    In a selection region that includes absolute silences, creates individual non-silent clips between the regions of silence. The silence becomes blank space between the clips.

    none

    Creates a new, empty label at the current playback or recording position.

    PasteNewLabel:

    Paste Text to New Label

    none

    Pastes the text on the Audacity clipboard at the cursor position in the currently selected label track. If there is no selection in the label track a point label is created. If a region is selected in the label track a region label is created. If no label track is selected one is created, and a new label is created.

    TypeToCreateLabel:

    Type to Create a Label (on/off)

    none

    When a label track has the yellow focus border, if this option is on, just type to create a label. Otherwise you must create a label first.

    none

    Same as the Split Cut command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    SplitDeleteLabels:

    Split Delete

    none

    Same as the Split Delete command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    SilenceLabels:

    Silence Audio

    none

    Same as the Silence Audio command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    CopyLabels:

    Copy

    none

    Same as the Copy command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    SplitLabels:

    Split

    none

    Same as the Split command, but operates on labeled audio regions or points.

    JoinLabels:

    Join

    none

    Same as the Join command, but operates on labeled audio regions or points. You may need to select the audio and use Edit > Clip Boundaries > Join, to join all regions or points.

    DisjoinLabels:

    Detach at Silences

    none

    Same as the Detach at Silences command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    none

    Selects from the position of the cursor to the previously stored cursor position

    StoreCursorPosition:

    Store Cursor Position

    none

    Stores the current cursor position for use in a later selection

    ZeroCross:

    At Zero Crossings

    none

    Moves the edges of a selection region (or the cursor position) slightly so they are at a rising zero crossing point.

    none

    Selects a region in the selected track(s) from the start of the track to the cursor position.

    SelCursorToTrackEnd:

    Cursor to Track End

    none

    Selects a region in the selected track(s) from the cursor position to the end of the track.

    SelTrackStartToEnd:

    Track Start to End

    none

    Selects a region in the selected track(s) from the start of the track to the end of the track.

    SelSave:

    Store Selection

    none

    Stores the end points of a selection for later reuse.

    SelRestore:

    Retrieve Selection

    none

    Retrieves the end points of a previously stored selection.

    none

    When in Spectrogram views snaps the center frequency to the next lower frequency peak, moving the spectral selection downwards.

    none

    Moves the selection to the previous clip.

    SelNextClip:

    Next Clip

    none

    Moves the selection to the next clip.

    none

    Mixer Board is an alternative view to the audio tracks in the main tracks window. Analogous to a hardware mixer board, each audio track is displayed in a Track Strip.

    ShowExtraMenus:

    Extra Menus (on/off)

    none

    Shows extra menus with many extra less-used commands.

    ShowClipping:

    Show Clipping (on/off)

    none

    Option to show or not show audio that is too loud (in red) on the wave form.

    none

    Zooms out displaying less detail over a greater length of time.

    ZoomSel:

    Zoom to Selection

    none

    Zooms in or out so that the selected audio fills the width of the window.

    ZoomToggle:

    Zoom Toggle

    none

    Changes the zoom back and forth between two preset levels.

    AdvancedVZoom:

    Advanced Vertical Zooming

    none

    Enable for left-click gestures in the vertical scale to control zooming.

    none

    Collapses all tracks to take up the minimum amount of space.

    ExpandAllTracks:

    Expand Collapsed Tracks

    none

    Expands all collapsed tracks to their original size before the last collapse.

    none

    Chooses various tools for selection, volume adjustment, zooming and time-shifting of audio

    ShowRecordMeterTB:

    Recording Meter Toolbar

    none

    Displays recording levels and toggles input monitoring when not recording

    ShowPlayMeterTB:

    Playback Meter Toolbar

    none

    Displays playback levels

    ShowMixerTB:

    Mixer Toolbar

    none

    Adjusts the recording and playback volumes of the devices currently selected in Device Toolbar

    ShowEditTB:

    Edit Toolbar

    none

    Cut, copy, paste, trim audio, silence audio, undo, redo, zoom tools

    ShowTranscriptionTB:

    Play-at-Speed Toolbar

    none

    Plays audio at a slower or faster speed than normal, affecting pitch

    ShowScrubbingTB:

    Scrub Toolbar

    none

    Controls playback and recording and skips to start or end of project when neither playing or recording

    ShowDeviceTB:

    Device Toolbar

    none

    Selects audio host, recording device, number of recording channels and playback device

    ShowSelectionTB:

    Selection Toolbar

    none

    Controls the sample rate of the project, snapping to the selection format and adjusts cursor and region position by keyboard input

    ShowSpectralSelectionTB:

    Spectral Selection Toolbar

    none

    Displays and lets you adjust the current spectral (frequency) selection without having to be in Spectrogram view

    none

    Temporarily pauses playing or recording without losing your place.

    none

    Brings up the Timer Record dialog.

    PunchAndRoll:

    Punch and Roll Record

    none

    Re-record over audio, with a pre-roll of audio that comes before.

    Pause:

    Pause

    none

    Temporarily pauses playing or recording without losing your place.

    none

    Shows (or hides) the scrub ruler, which is just below the timeline.

    none

    Moves the cursor to the start of the selected track.

    CursTrackEnd:

    Track End

    none

    Moves the cursor to the end of the selected track.

    CursPrevClipBoundary:

    Previous Clip Boundary

    none

    Moves the cursor position back to the right-hand edge of the previous clip

    CursNextClipBoundary:

    Next Clip Boundary

    none

    Moves the cursor position forward to the left-hand edge of the next clip

    CursProjectStart:

    Project Start

    none

    Moves the cursor to the beginning of the project.

    CursProjectEnd:

    Project End

    none

    Moves the cursor to the end of the project.

    none

    You can change Audacity to play and record with a fixed head pinned to the Timeline. You can adjust the position of the fixed head by dragging it

    Overdub:

    Overdub (on/off)

    none

    Toggles on and off the Overdub option.

    SWPlaythrough:

    Software Playthrough (on/off)

    none

    Toggles on and off the Software Playthrough option.

    none

    Ensures that length changes occurring anywhere in a defined group of tracks also take place in all audio or label tracks in that group.

    none

    Adds an empty label track to the project

    NewTimeTrack:

    Time Track

    none

    Adds an empty time track to the project. Time tracks are used to speed up and slow down audio.

    none

    Same as Tracks > Mix and Render except that the original tracks are preserved rather than being replaced by the resulting "Mix" track.

    none

    Mutes the selected tracks.

    UnmuteTracks:

    Unmute Tracks

    none

    Unmutes the selected tracks.

    none

    Pan selected audio to right speaker.

    none

    Aligns the start of selected tracks with the start of the project.

    Align_StartToSelStart:

    Start to Cursor/Selection Start

    none

    Aligns the start of selected tracks with the current cursor position or with the start of the current selection.

    Align_StartToSelEnd:

    Start to Selection End

    none

    Aligns the start of selected tracks with the end of the current selection.

    Align_EndToSelStart:

    End to Cursor/Selection Start

    none

    Aligns the end of selected tracks with the current cursor position or with the start of the current selection.

    Align_EndToSelEnd:

    End to Selection End

    none

    Aligns the end of selected tracks with the end of the current selection.

    MoveSelectionWithTracks:

    Move Selection with Tracks (on/off)

    none

    Toggles on/off the selection moving with the realigned tracks, or staying put.

    none

    Shows the list of available Nyquist effects but only if the user has effects "Grouped by Type" in Effects Preferences.

    enum Type, (default:White)

    • White

    • Pink

    • Brownian

    double Amplitude, (default:0.8)

    Generates 'white', 'pink' or 'brown' noise.

    Tone:

    Tone...

    double Frequency, (default:440)

    double Amplitude, (default:0.8) enum Waveform, (default:Sine)

    • Sine

    • Square

    • Sawtooth

    Generates one of four different tone waveforms: Sine, Square, Sawtooth or Square (no alias), and a frequency between 1 Hz and half the current project rate.

    double freq, (default:0)

    double decay, (default:0) double cf, (default:0) double bw, (default:0) double noise, (default:0) double gain, (default:0)

    Produces a realistic drum sound.

    none

    Shows the list of available LADSPA effects but only if the user has effects "Grouped by Type" in Effects Preferences.

    double Bass, (default:0)

    double Treble, (default:0) double Gain, (default:0) bool Link Sliders, (default:False)

    Increases or decreases the lower frequencies and higher frequencies of your audio independently; behaves just like the bass and treble controls on a stereo system.

    ChangePitch:

    Change Pitch...

    double Percentage, (default:0)

    bool SBSMS, (default:False)

    Change the pitch of a selection without changing its tempo.

    ChangeSpeed:

    Change Speed...

    double Percentage, (default:0)

    Change the speed of a selection, also changing its pitch.

    ChangeTempo:

    Change Tempo...

    double Percentage, (default:0)

    bool SBSMS, (default:False)

    Change the tempo and length (duration) of a selection without changing its pitch.

    ClickRemoval:

    Click Removal...

    int Threshold, (default:200)

    int Width, (default:20)

    Click Removal is designed to remove clicks on audio tracks and is especially suited to declicking recordings made from vinyl records.

    Compressor:

    Compressor...

    double Threshold, (default:-12)

    double NoiseFloor, (default:-40) double Ratio, (default:2) double AttackTime, (default:0.2) double ReleaseTime, (default:1) bool Normalize, (default:True) bool UsePeak, (default:False)

    Compresses the dynamic range by two alternative methods. The default "RMS" method makes the louder parts softer, but leaves the quieter audio alone. The alternative "peaks" method makes the entire audio louder, but amplifies the louder parts less than the quieter parts. Make-up gain can be applied to either method, making the result as loud as possible without clipping, but not changing the dynamic range further.

    Distortion:

    Distortion...

    enum Type, (default:Hard Clipping)

    • Hard Clipping

    • Soft Clipping

    • Soft Overdrive

    Use the Distortion effect to make the audio sound distorted. By distorting the waveform the frequency content is changed, which will often make the sound "crunchy" or "abrasive". Technically this effect is a . The result of waveshaping is equivalent to applying non-linear amplification to the audio waveform. Preset shaping functions are provided, each of which produces a different type of distortion.

    Echo:

    Echo...

    float Delay, (default:1)

    float Decay, (default:0.5)

    Repeats the selected audio again and again, normally softer each time and normally not blended into the original sound until some time after it starts. The delay time between each repeat is fixed, with no pause in between each repeat. For a more configurable echo effect with a variable delay time and pitch-changed echoes, see Delay.

    FadeIn:

    Fade In

    none

    Applies a linear fade-in to the selected audio - the rapidity of the fade-in depends entirely on the length of the selection it is applied to. For a more customizable logarithmic fade, use the Envelope Tool on the Tools Toolbar.

    FadeOut:

    Fade Out

    none

    Applies a linear fade-out to the selected audio - the rapidity of the fade-out depends entirely on the length of the selection it is applied to. For a more customizable logarithmic fade, use the Envelope Tool on the Tools Toolbar.

    FilterCurve:

    Filter Curve...

    size_t FilterLength, (default:8191)

    bool InterpolateLin, (default:False) enum InterpolationMethod, (default:B-spline)

    • B-spline

    • Cosine

    • Cubic

    Adjusts the volume levels of particular frequencies

    GraphicEq:

    Graphic EQ...

    size_t FilterLength, (default:8191)

    bool InterpolateLin, (default:False) enum InterpolationMethod, (default:B-spline)

    • B-spline

    • Cosine

    • Cubic

    Adjusts the volume levels of particular frequencies

    Invert:

    Invert

    none

    This effect flips the audio samples upside-down. This normally does not affect the sound of the audio at all. It is occasionally useful for vocal removal.

    LoudnessNormalization:

    Loudness Normalization...

    bool StereoIndependent, (default:False)

    double LUFSLevel, (default:-23) double RMSLevel, (default:-20) bool DualMono, (default:True) int NormalizeTo, (default:0)

    Changes the perceived loudness of the audio.

    NoiseReduction:

    Noise Reduction...

    none

    This effect is ideal for reducing constant background noise such as fans, tape noise, or hums. It will not work very well for removing talking or music in the background. More details here This effect is not currently available from scripting.

    Normalize:

    Normalize...

    double PeakLevel, (default:-1)

    bool ApplyGain, (default:True) bool RemoveDcOffset, (default:True) bool StereoIndependent, (default:False)

    Use the Normalize effect to set the maximum amplitude of a track, equalize the amplitudes of the left and right channels of a stereo track and optionally remove any DC offset from the track

    Paulstretch:

    Paulstretch...

    float Stretch Factor, (default:10)

    float Time Resolution, (default:0.25)

    Use Paulstretch only for an extreme time-stretch or "stasis" effect, This may be useful for synthesizer pad sounds, identifying performance glitches or just creating interesting aural textures. Use Change Tempo or Sliding Time Scale rather than Paulstretch for tasks like slowing down a song to a "practice" tempo.

    Phaser:

    Phaser...

    int Stages, (default:2)

    int DryWet, (default:128) double Freq, (default:0.4) double Phase, (default:0) int Depth, (default:100) int Feedback, (default:0) double Gain, (default:-6)

    The name "Phaser" comes from "Phase Shifter", because it works by combining phase-shifted signals with the original signal. The movement of the phase-shifted signals is controlled using a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO).

    Repair:

    Repair

    none

    Fix one particular short click, pop or other glitch no more than 128 samples long.

    Repeat:

    Repeat...

    int Count, (default:1)

    Repeats the selection the specified number of times.

    Reverb:

    Reverb...

    double RoomSize, (default:75)

    double Delay, (default:10) double Reverberance, (default:50) double HfDamping, (default:50) double ToneLow, (default:100) double ToneHigh, (default:100) double WetGain, (default:-1) double DryGain, (default:-1) double StereoWidth, (default:100) bool WetOnly, (default:False)

    A configurable stereo reverberation effect with built-in and user-added presets. It can be used to add ambience (an impression of the space in which a sound occurs) to a mono sound. Also use it to increase reverberation in stereo audio that sounds too "dry" or "close".

    Reverse:

    Reverse

    none

    Reverses the selected audio; after the effect the end of the audio will be heard first and the beginning last.

    SlidingStretch:

    Sliding Stretch...

    double RatePercentChangeStart, (default:0)

    double RatePercentChangeEnd, (default:0) double PitchHalfStepsStart, (default:0) double PitchHalfStepsEnd, (default:0) double PitchPercentChangeStart, (default:0) double PitchPercentChangeEnd, (default:0)

    This effect allows you to make a continuous change to the tempo and/or pitch of a selection by choosing initial and/or final change values.

    TruncateSilence:

    Truncate Silence...

    double Threshold, (default:-20)

    enum Action, (default:Truncate Detected Silence)

    • Truncate Detected Silence

    • Compress Excess Silence

    double Minimum, (default:0.5) double Truncate, (default:0.5) double Compress, (default:50) bool Independent, (default:False)

    Automatically try to find and eliminate audible silences. Do not use this with faded audio.

    Wahwah:

    Wahwah...

    double Freq, (default:1.5)

    double Phase, (default:0) int Depth, (default:70) double Resonance, (default:2.5) int Offset, (default:30) double Gain, (default:-6)

    Rapid tone quality variations, like that guitar sound so popular in the 1970's.

    Use Crossfade Clips to apply a simple crossfade to a selected pair of clips in a single audio track.

    CrossfadeTracks:

    Crossfade Tracks...

    enum type, (default:ConstantGain)

    • ConstantGain

    • ConstantPower1

    • ConstantPower2

    Use Crossfade Tracks to make a smooth transition between two overlapping tracks one above the other. Place the track to be faded out above the track to be faded in then select the overlapping region in both tracks and apply the effect.

    Delay:

    Delay...

    enum delay-type, (default:Regular)

    • Regular

    • BouncingBall

    • ReverseBouncingBall

    double dgain, (default:0) double delay, (default:0) enum pitch-type, (default:PitchTempo)

    A configurable delay effect with variable delay time and pitch shifting of the delays.

    High-passFilter:

    High-Pass Filter...

    double frequency, (default:0)

    enum rolloff, (default:dB6)

    • dB6

    • dB12

    • dB24

    Passes frequencies above its cutoff frequency and attenuates frequencies below its cutoff frequency.

    Limiter:

    Limiter...

    enum type, (default:SoftLimit)

    • SoftLimit

    • HardLimit

    • SoftClip

    Limiter passes signals below a specified input level unaffected or gently reduced, while preventing the peaks of stronger signals from exceeding this threshold. Mastering engineers often use this type of dynamic range compression combined with make-up gain to increase the perceived loudness of an audio recording during the audio mastering process.

    Low-passFilter:

    Low-Pass Filter...

    double frequency, (default:0)

    enum rolloff, (default:dB6)

    • dB6

    • dB12

    • dB24

    Passes frequencies below its cutoff frequency and attenuates frequencies above its cutoff frequency.

    NotchFilter:

    Notch Filter...

    double frequency, (default:0)

    double q, (default:0)

    Greatly attenuate ("notch out"), a narrow frequency band. This is a good way to remove mains hum or a whistle confined to a specific frequency with minimal damage to the remainder of the audio.

    SpectralEditMultiTool:

    Spectral edit multi tool

    When the selected track is in spectrogram or spectrogram log(f) view, applies a notch filter, high pass filter or low pass filter according to the spectral selection made. This effect can also be used to change the audio quality as an alternative to using Equalization.

    SpectralEditParametricEq:

    Spectral edit parametric EQ...

    double control-gain, (default:0)

    When the selected track is in spectrogram or spectrogram log(f) view and the spectral selection has a center frequency and an upper and lower boundary, performs the specified band cut or band boost. This can be used as an alternative to Equalization or may also be useful to repair damaged audio by reducing frequency spikes or boosting other frequencies to mask spikes.

    SpectralEditShelves:

    Spectral edit shelves...

    double control-gain, (default:0)

    When the selected track is in spectrogram or spectrogram log(f) view, applies either a low- or high-frequency shelving filter or both filters, according to the spectral selection made. This can be used as an alternative to Equalization or may also be useful to repair damaged audio by reducing frequency spikes or boosting other frequencies to mask spikes.

    StudioFadeOut:

    Studio Fade Out

    Applies a more musical fade out to the selected audio, giving a more pleasing sounding result.

    Tremolo:

    Tremolo...

    enum wave, (default:Sine)

    • Sine

    • Triangle

    • Sawtooth

    Modulates the volume of the selection at the depth and rate selected in the dialog. The same as the tremolo effect familiar to guitar and keyboard players.

    VocalReductionAndIsolation:

    Vocal Reduction and Isolation...

    enum action, (default:RemoveToMono)

    • RemoveToMono

    • Remove

    • Isolate

    Attempts to remove or isolate center-panned audio from a stereo track. Most "Remove" options in this effect preserve the stereo image.

    Vocoder:

    Vocoder...

    double dst, (default:0)

    enum mst, (default:BothChannels)

    • BothChannels

    • RightOnly

    int bands, (default:0) double track-vl, (default:0) double noise-vl, (default:0) double radar-vl, (default:0) double radar-f, (default:0)

    Synthesizes audio (usually a voice) in the left channel of a stereo track with a carrier wave (typically white noise) in the right channel to produce a modified version of the left channel. Vocoding a normal voice with white noise will produce a robot-like voice for special effects.

    none

    Takes the selected audio (which is a set of sound pressure values at points in time) and converts it to a graph of frequencies against amplitudes.

    FindClipping:

    Find Clipping...

    int Duty Cycle Start, (default:3)

    int Duty Cycle End, (default:3)

    Displays runs of clipped samples in a Label Track, as a screen-reader accessible alternative to View > Show Clipping. A run must include at least one clipped sample, but may include unclipped samples too.

    none

    Displays a menu with list of all your Macros. Selecting any of these Macros by clicking on it will cause that Macro to be applied to the current project.

    Screenshot:

    Screenshot...

    string Path, (default:)

    enum CaptureWhat, (default:Window)

    • Window

    • FullWindow

    • WindowPlus

    A tool, mainly used in documentation, to capture screenshots of Audacity.

    Benchmark:

    Run Benchmark...

    none

    A tool for measuring the performance of one part of Audacity.

    NyquistPrompt:

    Nyquist Prompt...

    string Command, (default:)

    int Version, (default:3)

    Brings up a dialog where you can enter Nyquist commands. Nyquist is a programming language for generating, processing and analyzing audio. For more information see .

    NyquistPlug-inInstaller:

    Nyquist Plug-in Installer...

    string files, (default:)

    enum overwrite, (default:Disallow)

    • Disallow

    • Allow

    A Nyquist plugin that simplifies the installation of other Nyquist plugins.

    RegularIntervalLabels:

    Regular Interval Labels...

    enum mode, (default:Both)

    • Both

    • Number

    • Interval

    int totalnum, (default:0) double interval, (default:0) double region, (default:0) enum adjust, (default:No)

    Places labels in a long track so as to divide it into smaller, equally sized segments.

    SampleDataExport:

    Sample Data Export...

    int number, (default:0)

    enum units, (default:dB)

    • dB

    • Linear

    string filename, (default:) enum fileformat, (default:None)

    Reads the values of successive samples from the selected audio and prints this data to a plain text, CSV or HTML file.

    SampleDataImport:

    Sample Data Import...

    string filename, (default:)

    enum bad-data, (default:ThrowError)

    • ThrowError

    • ReadAsZero

    Reads numeric values from a plain ASCII text file and creates a PCM sample for each numeric value read.

    none

    Converts MP3.

    none

    Plays for one second centered on the current mouse pointer position (not from the current cursor position). See this page for an example.

    PlayToSelection:

    Play to Selection

    none

    Plays to or from the current mouse pointer position to or from the start or end of the selection, depending on the pointer position. See this page for more details.

    PlayBeforeSelectionStart:

    Play Before Selection Start

    none

    Plays a short period before the start of the selected audio, the period before shares the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayAfterSelectionStart:

    Play After Selection Start

    none

    Plays a short period after the start of the selected audio, the period after shares the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayBeforeSelectionEnd:

    Play Before Selection End

    none

    Plays a short period before the end of the selected audio, the period before shares the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayAfterSelectionEnd:

    Play After Selection End

    none

    Plays a short period after the end of the selected audio, the period after shares the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayBeforeAndAfterSelectionStart:

    Play Before and After Selection Start

    none

    Plays a short period before and after the start of the selected audio, the periods before and after share the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayBeforeAndAfterSelectionEnd:

    Play Before and After Selection End

    none

    Plays a short period before and after the end of the selected audio, the periods before and after share the setting of the cut preview.

    PlayCutPreview:

    Play Cut Preview

    none

    Plays audio excluding the selection

    none

    Chooses Draw tool.

    ZoomTool:

    Zoom Tool

    none

    Chooses Zoom tool.

    MultiTool:

    Multi Tool

    none

    Chooses the Multi-Tool

    PrevTool:

    Previous Tool

    none

    Cycles backwards through the tools, starting from the currently selected tool: starting from Selection, it would navigate to Multi-tool to Time Shift to Zoom to Draw to Envelope to Selection.

    NextTool:

    Next Tool

    none

    Cycles forwards through the tools, starting from the currently selected tool: starting from Selection, it would navigate to Envelope to Draw to Zoom to Time Shift to Multi-tool to Selection.

    none

    Each key press will decrease the playback volume by 0.1.

    InputGain:

    Adjust Recording Volume...

    none

    Displays the Recording Volume dialog. You can type a new value for the recording volume (between 0 and 1), or press Tab, then use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the slider.

    InputGainInc:

    Increase Recording Volume

    none

    Each key press will increase the recording volume by 0.1.

    InputGainDec:

    Decrease Recording Volume

    none

    Each key press will decrease the recording volume by 0.1.

    none

    Combines cut preview and play at speed

    SetPlaySpeed:

    Adjust Playback Speed...

    none

    Displays the Playback Speed dialog. You can type a new value for the playback volume (between 0 and 1), or press Tab, then use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the slider.

    PlaySpeedInc:

    Increase Playback Speed

    none

    Each key press will increase the playback speed by 0.1.

    PlaySpeedDec:

    Decrease Playback Speed

    none

    Each key press will decrease the playback speed by 0.1.

    MoveToPrevLabel:

    Move to Previous Label

    none

    Moves selection to the previous label

    MoveToNextLabel:

    Move to Next Label

    none

    Moves selection to the next label

    none

    Skips the playback cursor back 15 seconds by default.

    SeekRightLong:

    Long Seek Right During Playback

    none

    Skips the playback cursor forward 15 seconds by default.

    none

    Displays the Select Audio Host dialog for choosing the particular interface with which Audacity communicates with your chosen playback and recording devices.

    InputChannels:

    Change Recording Channels...

    none

    Displays the Select Recording Channels dialog for choosing the number of channels to be recorded by the chosen recording device.

    none

    Equivalent to setting the Snap To control in Selection Toolbar to "Prior".

    SelStart:

    Selection to Start

    none

    Select from cursor to start of track

    SelEnd:

    Selection to End

    none

    Select from cursor to end of track

    SelExtLeft:

    Selection Extend Left

    none

    Increases the size of the selection by extending it to the left. The amount of increase is dependent on the zoom level. If there is no selection one is created starting at the cursor position.

    SelExtRight:

    Selection Extend Right

    none

    Increases the size of the selection by extending it to the right. The amount of increase is dependent on the zoom level. If there is no selection one is created starting at the cursor position.

    SelSetExtLeft:

    Set (or Extend) Left Selection

    none

    Extend selection left a little (is this a duplicate?)

    SelSetExtRight:

    Set (or Extend) Right Selection

    none

    Extend selection right a litlle (is this a duplicate?)

    SelCntrLeft:

    Selection Contract Left

    none

    Decreases the size of the selection by contracting it from the right. The amount of decrease is dependent on the zoom level. If there is no selection no action is taken.

    SelCntrRight:

    Selection Contract Right

    none

    Decreases the size of the selection by contracting it from the left. The amount of decrease is dependent on the zoom level. If there is no selection no action is taken.

    none

    Focus one track up

    NextTrack:

    Move Focus to Next Track

    none

    Focus one track down

    FirstTrack:

    Move Focus to First Track

    none

    Focus on first track

    LastTrack:

    Move Focus to Last Track

    none

    Focus on last track

    ShiftUp:

    Move Focus to Previous and Select

    none

    Focus one track up and select it

    ShiftDown:

    Move Focus to Next and Select

    none

    Focus one track down and select it

    Toggle:

    Toggle Focused Track

    none

    Toggle focus on current track

    ToggleAlt:

    Toggle Focused Track

    none

    Toggle focus on current track

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor one second left by default. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor one second left by default. The default value can be changed by adjusting the "Short Period" under "Seek Time when playing" in Playback Preferences.

    CursorShortJumpRight:

    Cursor Short Jump Right

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor one second right by default. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor one second right by default. The default value can be changed by adjusting the "Short Period" under "Seek Time when playing" in Playback Preferences.

    CursorLongJumpLeft:

    Cursor Long Jump Left

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor 15 seconds left by default. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor 15 seconds left by default. The default value can be changed by adjusting the "Long Period" under "Seek Time when playing" in Playback Preferences.

    CursorLongJumpRight:

    Cursor Long Jump Right

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor 15 seconds right by default. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor 15 seconds right by default. The default value can be changed by adjusting the "Long Period" under "Seek Time when playing" in Playback Preferences.

    ClipLeft:

    Clip Left

    none

    Moves the currently focused audio track (or a separate clip in that track which contains the editing cursor or selection region) one screen pixel to left.

    ClipRight:

    Clip Right

    none

    Moves the currently focused audio track (or a separate clip in that track which contains the editing cursor or selection region) one screen pixel to right.

    none

    Controls the pan slider on the focused track. Each keypress changes the pan value by 10% right.

    TrackGain:

    Change Gain on Focused Track...

    none

    Brings up the Gain dialog for the focused track where you can enter a gain value, or use the slider for finer control of gain than is available when using the track pan slider.

    TrackGainInc:

    Increase Gain on Focused Track

    none

    Controls the gain slider on the focused track. Each keypress increases the gain value by 1 dB.

    TrackGainDec:

    Decrease Gain on Focused Track

    none

    Controls the gain slider on the focused track. Each keypress decreases the gain value by 1 dB.

    TrackMenu:

    Open Menu on Focused Track...

    none

    Opens the Audio Track Dropdown Menu on the focused audio track or other track type. In the audio track dropdown, use Up, and Down, arrow keys to navigate the menu and Enter, to select a menu item. Use Right, arrow to open the "Set Sample Format" and "Set Rate" choices or Left, arrow to leave those choices.

    TrackMute:

    Mute/Unmute Focused Track

    none

    Toggles the Mute button on the focused track.

    TrackSolo:

    Solo/Unsolo Focused Track

    none

    Toggles the Solo button on the focused track.

    TrackClose:

    Close Focused Track

    none

    Close (remove) the focused track only.

    TrackMoveUp:

    Move Focused Track Up

    none

    Moves the focused track up by one track and moves the focus there.

    TrackMoveDown:

    Move Focused Track Down

    none

    Moves the focused track down by one track and moves the focus there.

    TrackMoveTop:

    Move Focused Track to Top

    none

    Moves the focused track up to the top of the track table and moves the focus there.

    TrackMoveBottom:

    Move Focused Track to Bottom

    none

    Moves the focused track down to the bottom of the track table and moves the focus there.

    double Track, (default:unchanged)

    double TrackCount, (default:unchanged) enum Mode, (default:unchanged)

    • Set

    • Add

    • Remove

    Modifies which tracks are selected. First and Last are track numbers. High and Low are for spectral selection. The Mode parameter allows complex selections, e.g adding or removing tracks from the current selection.

    SetTrackStatus:

    Set Track Status...

    string Name, (default:unchanged)

    bool Selected, (default:unchanged) bool Focused, (default:unchanged)

    Sets properties for a track or channel (or both).Name is used to set the name. It is not used in choosing the track.

    SetTrackAudio:

    Set Track Audio...

    bool Mute, (default:unchanged)

    bool Solo, (default:unchanged) double Gain, (default:unchanged) double Pan, (default:unchanged)

    Sets properties for a track or channel (or both). Can set pan, gain, mute and solo.

    SetTrackVisuals:

    Set Track Visuals...

    int Height, (default:unchanged)

    enum Display, (default:unchanged)

    • Waveform

    • Spectrogram

    • Multi-view

    Sets visual properties for a track or channel (or both). SpectralPrefs=1 sets the track to use general preferences, SpectralPrefs=1 per track prefs. When using general preferences, SetPreferences can be used to change a preference and so affect display of the track.

    GetPreference:

    Get Preference...

    string Name, (default:)

    Gets a single preference setting.

    SetPreference:

    Set Preference...

    string Name, (default:)

    string Value, (default:) bool Reload, (default:False)

    Sets a single preference setting. Some settings such as them changes require a reload (use Reload=1), but this takes time and slows down a script.

    SetClip:

    Set Clip...

    double At, (default:unchanged)

    enum Color, (default:unchanged)

    • Color0

    • Color1

    • Color2

    Modify a clip by stating the track or channel a time within it. Color and start position can be set. Try to avoid overlapping clips, as Audacity will allow it, but does not like them.

    SetEnvelope:

    Set Envelope...

    double Time, (default:unchanged)

    double Value, (default:unchanged) bool Delete, (default:unchanged)

    Modify an envelope by specifying a track or channel and a time within it. You cannot yet delete individual envelope points, but can delete the whole envelope using Delete=1.

    SetLabel:

    Set Label...

    int Label, (default:0)

    string Text, (default:unchanged) double Start, (default:unchanged) double End, (default:unchanged) bool Selected, (default:unchanged)

    Modifies an existing label. You must give it the label number.

    SetProject:

    Set Project...

    string Name, (default:unchanged)

    double Rate, (default:unchanged) int X, (default:unchanged) int Y, (default:unchanged) int Width, (default:unchanged) int Height, (default:unchanged)

    Sets the project window to a particular location and size. Can also change the caption - but that is cosmetic and may be overwritten again later by Audacity.

    enum Type, (default:Commands)

    • Commands

    • Menus

    • Preferences

    Gets information in a list in one of three formats.

    Message:

    Message...

    string Text, (default:Some message)

    Used in testing. Sends the Text string back to you.

    Help:

    Help...

    string Command, (default:Help)

    enum Format, (default:JSON)

    • JSON

    • LISP

    • Brief

    This is an extract from GetInfo Commands, with just one command.

    Import2:

    Import...

    string Filename, (default:)

    Imports from a file. The automation command uses a text box to get the file name rather than a normal file-open dialog.

    Export2:

    Export...

    string Filename, (default:exported.wav)

    int NumChannels, (default:1)

    Exports selected audio to a named file. This version of export has the full set of export options. However, a current limitation is that the detailed option settings are always stored to and taken from saved preferences. The net effect is that for a given format, the most recently used options for that format will be used. In the current implementation, NumChannels should be 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo).

    OpenProject2:

    Open Project...

    string Filename, (default:test.aup3)

    bool AddToHistory, (default:false)

    Opens a project.

    SaveProject2:

    Save Project...

    string Filename, (default:name.aup3)

    bool AddToHistory, (default:False) bool Compress, (default:False)

    Saves a project.

    Drag:

    Move Mouse...

    int Id, (default:unchanged)

    string Window, (default:unchanged) double FromX, (default:unchanged) double FromY, (default:unchanged) double ToX, (default:unchanged) double ToY, (default:unchanged) enum RelativeTo, (default:unchanged)

    • Panel

    • App

    Experimental command (called Drag in scripting) that moves the mouse. An Id can be used to move the mouse into a button to get the hover effect. Window names can be used instead. If To is specified, the command does a drag, otherwise just a hover.

    CompareAudio:

    Compare Audio...

    float Threshold, (default:0)

    Compares selected range on two tracks. Reports on the differences and similarities.

    Screenshot:

    Screenshot (short format)...

    none

    A version of Tools -> Screenshot with a more minimal GUI. One of the most useful options is All_Tracks. The _Plus suffix includes the timeline.

    none

    Checks online to see if this is the latest version of Audacity.

    About:

    About Audacity...

    none

    Brings a dialog with information about Audacity, such as who wrote it, what features are enabled and the GNU GPL v2 license.

    none

    Launches the "Audacity Log" window, the log is largely a debugging aid, having timestamps for each entry

    CrashReport:

    Generate Support Data...

    none

    Selecting this will generate a Debug report which could be useful in aiding the developers to identify bugs in Audacity or in third-party plugins

    CheckDeps:

    Check Dependencies...

    none

    Lists any WAV or AIFF audio files that your project depends on, and allows you to copy these files into the project

    New:

    New

    none

    Creates a new empty project window, to start working on new or imported tracks.

    Open:

    Open...

    none

    Presents a standard dialog box where you can select either audio files, a list of files (.LOF) or an Audacity Project file to open.

    Close:

    Save:

    Save Project

    none

    Saves the current Audacity project .AUP3 file.

    SaveAs:

    Save Project As...

    none

    Same as "Save Project" above, but allows you to save a copy of an open project to a different name or location

    SaveCopy:

    ExportMp3:

    Export as MP3

    none

    Exports to an MP3 file

    ExportWav:

    Export as WAV

    none

    Exports to a WAV file

    ExportOgg:

    ImportAudio:

    Audio...

    none

    Similar to 'Open', except that the file is added as a new track to your existing project.

    ImportLabels:

    Labels...

    none

    Launches a file selection window where you can choose to import a single text file into the project containing point or region labels. For more information about the syntax for labels files, see Importing and Exporting Labels.

    ImportMIDI:

    Undo:

    Undo

    none

    Undoes the most recent editing action.

    Redo:

    Redo

    none

    Redoes the most recently undone editing action.

    Cut:

    SplitCut:

    Split Cut

    none

    Same as Cut, but none of the audio data or labels to right of the selection are shifted.

    SplitDelete:

    Split Delete

    none

    Same as Delete, but none of the audio data or labels to right of the selection are shifted.

    Silence:

    Split:

    Split

    none

    Splits the current clip into two clips at the cursor point, or into three clips at the selection boundaries.

    SplitNew:

    Split New

    none

    Does a Split Cut on the current selection in the current track, then creates a new track and pastes the selection into the new track.

    Join:

    EditLabels:

    Edit Labels...

    none

    Brings up a dialog box showing all of your labels in a keyboard-accessible tabular view. Handy buttons in the dialog let you insert or delete a label, or import and export labels to a file. See Labels Editor for more details.

    AddLabel:

    Add Label at Selection

    none

    Creates a new, empty label at the cursor or at the selection region.

    AddLabelPlaying:

    CutLabels:

    Cut

    none

    Same as the Cut command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    DeleteLabels:

    Delete

    none

    Same as the Delete command, but operates on labeled audio regions.

    SplitCutLabels:

    SelectAll:

    All

    none

    Selects all of the audio in all of the tracks.

    SelectNone:

    None

    none

    Deselects all of the audio in all of the tracks.

    SelCursorStoredCursor:

    SelAllTracks:

    In All Tracks

    none

    Extends the current selection up and/or down into all tracks in the project.

    SelSyncLockTracks:

    In All Sync-Locked Tracks

    none

    Extends the current selection up and/or down into all sync-locked tracks in the currently selected track group.

    SetLeftSelection:

    Left at Playback Position

    none

    When Audacity is playing, recording or paused, sets the left boundary of a potential selection by moving the cursor to the current position of the green playback cursor (or red recording cursor).

    Otherwise, opens the "Set Left Selection Boundary" dialog for adjusting the time position of the left-hand selection boundary. If there is no selection, moving the time digits backwards creates a selection ending at the former cursor position, and moving the time digits forwards provides a way to move the cursor forwards to an exact point.

    SetRightSelection:

    Right at Playback Position

    none

    When Audacity is playing, recording or paused, sets the right boundary of the selection, thus drawing the selection from the cursor position to the current position of the green playback cursor (or red recording cursor).

    Otherwise, opens the "Set Right Selection Boundary" dialog for adjusting the time position of the right-hand selection boundary. If there is no selection, moving the time digits forwards creates a selection starting at the former cursor position, and moving the time digits backwards provides a way to move the cursor backwards to an exact point.

    SelTrackStartToCursor:

    ToggleSpectralSelection:

    Toggle Spectral Selection

    none

    Changes between selecting a time range and selecting the last selected spectral selection in that time range. This command toggles the spectral selection even if not in Spectrogram view, but you must be in Spectrogram view to use the spectral selection in one of the Spectral edit effects.

    NextHigherPeakFrequency:

    Next Higher Peak Frequency

    none

    When in Spectrogram view, snaps the center frequency to the next higher frequency peak, moving the spectral selection upwards.

    NextLowerPeakFrequency:

    SelPrevClipBoundaryToCursor:

    Previous Clip Boundary to Cursor

    none

    Selects from the current cursor position back to the right-hand edge of the previous clip.

    SelCursorToNextClipBoundary:

    Cursor to Next Clip Boundary

    none

    Selects from the current cursor position forward to the left-hand edge of the next clip.

    SelPrevClip:

    UndoHistory:

    History...

    none

    Brings up the History window which can then be left open while using Audacity normally. History lists all undoable actions performed in the current project, including importing.

    Karaoke:

    Karaoke...

    none

    Brings up the Karaoke window, which displays the labels in a "bouncing ball" scrolling display

    MixerBoard:

    ZoomIn:

    Zoom In

    none

    Zooms in on the horizontal axis of the audio displaying more detail over a shorter length of time.

    ZoomNormal:

    Zoom Normal

    none

    Zooms to the default view which displays about one inch per second.

    ZoomOut:

    FitInWindow:

    Fit to Width

    none

    Zooms out until the entire project just fits in the window.

    FitV:

    Fit to Height

    none

    Adjusts the height of all the tracks until they fit in the project window.

    CollapseAllTracks:

    SkipSelStart:

    Selection Start

    none

    When there is a selection, moves the cursor to the start of the selection and removes the selection.

    SkipSelEnd:

    Selection End

    none

    When there is a selection, moves the cursor to the end of the selection and removes the selection.

    ResetToolbars:

    Reset Toolbars

    none

    Using this command positions all toolbars in default location and size as they were when Audacity was first installed

    ShowTransportTB:

    Transport Toolbar

    none

    Controls playback and recording and skips to start or end of project when neither playing or recording

    ShowToolsTB:

    RescanDevices:

    Rescan Audio Devices

    none

    Rescan for audio devices connected to your computer, and update the playback and recording dropdown menus in Device Toolbar

    PlayStop:

    Play/Stop

    none

    Starts and stops playback or stops a recording (stopping does not change the restart position). Therefore using any play or record command after stopping with "Play/Stop" will start playback or recording from the same Timeline position it last started from. You can also assign separate shortcuts for Play and Stop.

    PlayStopSelect:

    Play/Stop and Set Cursor

    none

    Starts playback like "Play/Stop", but stopping playback sets the restart position to the stop point. When stopped, this command is the same as "Play/Stop". When playing, this command stops playback and moves the cursor (or the start of the selection) to the position where playback stopped.

    Pause:

    Record1stChoice:

    Record

    none

    Starts recording at the end of the currently selected track(s).

    Record2ndChoice:

    Record New Track

    none

    Recording begins on a new track at either the current cursor location or at the beginning of the current selection.

    TimerRecord:

    Scrub:

    Scrub

    none

    Scrubbing is the action of moving the mouse pointer right or left so as to adjust the position, speed or direction of playback, listening to the audio at the same time.

    Seek:

    Seek

    none

    Seeking is similar to Scrubbing except that it is playback with skips, similar to using the seek button on a CD player.

    ToggleScrubRuler:

    CursSelStart:

    Selection Start

    none

    Moves the left edge of the current selection to the center of the screen, without changing the zoom level.

    CursSelEnd:

    Selection End

    none

    Moves the right edge of the current selection to the center of the screen, without changing the zoom level.

    CursTrackStart:

    SoundActivationLevel:

    Sound Activation Level...

    none

    Sets the activation level above which Sound Activated Recording will record.

    SoundActivation:

    Sound Activated Recording (on/off)

    none

    Toggles on and off the Sound Activated Recording option.

    PinnedHead:

    Resample:

    Resample...

    none

    Allows you to resample the selected track(s) to a new sample rate for use in the project

    RemoveTracks:

    Remove Tracks

    none

    Removes the selected track(s) from the project. Even if only part of a track is selected, the entire track is removed.

    SyncLock:

    NewMonoTrack:

    Mono Track

    none

    Creates a new empty mono audio track.

    NewStereoTrack:

    Stereo Track

    none

    Adds an empty stereo track to the project

    NewLabelTrack:

    Stereo to Mono:

    Mix Stereo Down to Mono

    none

    Converts the selected stereo track(s) into the same number of mono tracks, combining left and right channels equally by averaging the volume of both channels.

    MixAndRender:

    Mix and Render

    none

    Mixes down all selected tracks to a single mono or stereo track, rendering to the waveform all real-time transformations that had been applied (such as track gain, panning, amplitude envelopes or a change in project rate).

    MixAndRenderToNewTrack:

    MuteAllTracks:

    Mute All Tracks

    none

    Mutes all the audio tracks in the project as if you had used the mute buttons from the Track Control Panel on each track.

    UnmuteAllTracks:

    Unmute All Tracks

    none

    Unmutes all the audio tracks in the project as if you had released the mute buttons from the Track Control Panel on each track.

    MuteTracks:

    PanLeft:

    Left

    none

    Pan selected audio to left speaker

    PanRight:

    Right

    none

    Pan selected audio centrally.

    PanCenter:

    Align_EndToEnd:

    Align End to End

    none

    Aligns the selected tracks one after the other, based on their top-to-bottom order in the project window.

    Align_Together:

    Align Together

    none

    Align the selected tracks so that they start at the same (averaged) start time.

    Align_StartToZero:

    SortByTime:

    By Start Time

    none

    Sort tracks in order of start time.

    SortByName:

    By Name

    none

    Sort tracks in order by name.

    ManageGenerators:

    Plugin Manager

    none

    Selecting this option from the Effect Menu (or the Generate Menu or Analyze Menu) takes you to a dialog where you can enable or disable particular Effects, Generators and Analyzers in Audacity. Even if you do not add any third-party plugins, you can use this to make the Effect menu shorter or longer as required. For details see Plugin Manager.

    Built-in:

    Built-in

    none

    Shows the list of available Audacity built-in effects but only if the user has effects "Grouped by Type" in Effects Preferences.

    Nyquist:

    Chirp:

    Chirp...

    double StartFreq, (default:440)

    double EndFreq, (default:1320) double StartAmp, (default:0.8) double EndAmp, (default:0.1) enum Waveform, (default:Sine)

    • Sine

    • Square

    • Sawtooth

    • Square, no alias

    enum Interpolation, (default:Linear)

    • Linear

    • Logarithmic

    Generates four different types of tone waveforms like the Tone Generator, but additionally allows setting of the starting and ending amplitude and frequency.

    DtmfTones:

    DTMF Tones...

    string Sequence, (default:audacity)

    double Duty Cycle, (default:55) double Amplitude, (default:0.8)

    Generates dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones like those produced by the keypad on telephones.

    Noise:

    Pluck:

    Pluck...

    int pitch, (default:0)

    enum fade, (default:Abrupt)

    • Abrupt

    • Gradual

    double dur, (default:0)

    A synthesized pluck tone with abrupt or gradual fade-out, and selectable pitch corresponding to a MIDI note.

    RhythmTrack:

    Rhythm Track...

    double tempo, (default:0)

    int timesig, (default:0) double swing, (default:0) int bars, (default:0) double click-track-dur, (default:0) double offset, (default:0) enum click-type, (default:Metronome)

    • Metronome

    • Ping (short)

    • Ping (long)

    • Cowbell

    • ResonantNoise

    • NoiseClick

    • Drip (short)

    • Drip (long)

    int high, (default:0) int low, (default:0)

    Generates a track with regularly spaced sounds at a specified tempo and number of beats per measure (bar).

    RissetDrum:

    ManageEffects:

    Plugin Manager

    none

    Selecting this option from the Effect Menu (or the Generate Menu or Analyze Menu) takes you to a dialog where you can enable or disable particular Effects, Generators and Analyzers in Audacity. Even if you do not add any third-party plugins, you can use this to make the Effect menu shorter or longer as required. For details see Plugin Manager.

    RepeatLastEffect:

    Repeat Last Effect

    none

    Repeats the last used effect at its last used settings and without displaying any dialog.

    LADSPA:

    Amplify:

    Amplify...

    float Ratio, (default:0.9)

    bool AllowClipping, (default:False)

    Increases or decreases the volume of the audio you have selected.

    AutoDuck:

    Auto Duck...

    double DuckAmountDb, (default:-12)

    double InnerFadeDownLen, (default:0) double InnerFadeUpLen, (default:0) double OuterFadeDownLen, (default:0.5) double OuterFadeUpLen, (default:0.5) double ThresholdDb, (default:-30) double MaximumPause, (default:1)

    Reduces (ducks) the volume of one or more tracks whenever the volume of a specified "control" track reaches a particular level. Typically used to make a music track softer whenever speech in a commentary track is heard.

    BassAndTreble:

    AdjustableFade:

    Adjustable Fade...

    enum type, (default:Up)

    • Up

    • Down

    • SCurveUp

    • SCurveDown

    double curve, (default:0) enum units, (default:Percent)

    • Percent

    • dB

    double gain0, (default:0) double gain1, (default:0) enum preset, (default:None)

    • None

    • LinearIn

    • LinearOut

    • ExponentialIn

    enables you to control the shape of the fade (non-linear fading) to be applied by adjusting various parameters; allows partial (that is not from or to zero) fades up or down.

    ClipFix:

    Clip Fix...

    double threshold, (default:0)

    double gain, (default:0)

    Clip Fix attempts to reconstruct clipped regions by interpolating the lost signal.

    CrossfadeClips:

    ManageAnalyzers:

    Plugin Manager

    none

    Selecting this option from the Effect Menu (or the Generate Menu or Analyze Menu) takes you to a dialog where you can enable or disable particular Effects, Generators and Analyzers in Audacity. Even if you do not add any third-party plugins, you can use this to make the Effect menu shorter or longer as required. For details see Plugin Manager.

    ContrastAnalyser:

    Contrast...

    none

    Analyzes a single mono or stereo speech track to determine the average RMS difference in volume (contrast) between foreground speech and background music, audience noise or similar. The purpose is to determine if the speech will be intelligible to the hard of hearing.

    PlotSpectrum:

    BeatFinder:

    Beat Finder...

    int thresval, (default:0)

    Attempts to place labels at beats which are much louder than the surrounding audio. It's a fairly rough and ready tool, and will not necessarily work well on a typical modern pop music track with compressed dynamic range. If you do not get enough beats detected, try reducing the "Threshold Percentage" setting.

    LabelSounds:

    Label Sounds...

    double threshold, (default:0)

    enum measurement, (default:peak)

    • peak

    • avg

    • rms

    double sil-dur, (default:0) double snd-dur, (default:0) enum type, (default:before)

    • before

    • after

    • around

    • between

    double pre-offset, (default:0) double post-offset, (default:0) string text, (default:"")

    Divides up a track by placing labels for areas of sound that are separated by silence.

    ManageTools:

    Plugin Manager

    none

    Selecting this option from the Effect Menu (or the Generate Menu or Analyze Menu) takes you to a dialog where you can enable or disable particular Effects, Generators and Analyzers in Audacity. Even if you do not add any third-party plugins, you can use this to make the Effect menu shorter or longer as required. For details see Plugin Manager.

    ManageMacros:

    Macros...

    none

    Creates a new macro or edits an existing macro.

    Apply Macro:

    ApplyMacrosPalette:

    Palette...

    none

    Displays a menu with list of all your Macros which can be applied to the current project or to audio files..

    Macro_FadeEnds:

    Fade Ends

    none

    Fades in the first second and fades out the last second of a track.

    Macro_MP3Conversion:

    PlayAtSpeed:

    Play-at-Speed

    none

    Extra commands related to play at speed

    FullScreenOnOff:

    Full Screen (on/off)

    none

    Toggle full screen mode with no title bar

    Play:

    Play

    none

    Play (or stop) audio

    Stop:

    Stop

    none

    Stop audio

    PlayOneSec:

    SelectTool:

    Selection Tool

    none

    Chooses Selection tool.

    EnvelopeTool:

    Envelope Tool

    none

    Chooses Envelope tool.

    DrawTool:

    OutputGain:

    Adjust Playback Volume...

    none

    Displays the Playback Volume dialog. You can type a new value for the playback volume (between 0 and 1), or press Tab, then use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the slider.

    OutputGainInc:

    Increase Playback Volume

    none

    Each key press will increase the playback volume by 0.1.

    OutputGainDec:

    DeleteKey:

    Delete Key

    none

    Deletes the selection. When focus is in Selection Toolbar, BACKSPACE is not a shortcut but navigates back to the previous digit and sets it to zero.

    DeleteKey2:

    Delete Key2

    none

    Deletes the selection.

    PlayAtSpeed:

    Normal Play-at-Speed

    none

    Play audio at a faster or slower speed

    PlayAtSpeedLooped:

    Loop Play-at-Speed

    none

    Combines looped play and play at speed

    PlayAtSpeedCutPreview:

    SeekLeftShort:

    Short Seek Left During Playback

    none

    Skips the playback cursor back one second by default.

    SeekRightShort:

    Short Seek Right During Playback

    none

    Skips the playback cursor forward one second by default.

    SeekLeftLong:

    InputDevice:

    Change Recording Device...

    none

    Displays the Select recording Device dialog for choosing the recording device, but only if the "Recording Device" dropdown menu in Device Toolbar has entries for devices. Otherwise, an recording error message will be displayed.

    OutputDevice:

    Change Playback Device...

    none

    Displays the Select Playback Device dialog for choosing the playback device, but only if the "Playback Device" dropdown menu in Device Toolbar has entries for devices. Otherwise, an error message will be displayed.

    AudioHost:

    SnapToOff:

    Snap-To Off

    none

    Equivalent to setting the Snap To control in Selection Toolbar to "Off".

    SnapToNearest:

    Snap-To Nearest

    none

    Equivalent to setting the Snap To control in Selection Toolbar to "Nearest".

    SnapToPrior:

    PrevFrame:

    Move Backward from Toolbars to Tracks

    none

    Move backward through currently focused toolbar in Upper Toolbar dock area, Track View and currently focused toolbar in Lower Toolbar dock area. Each use moves the keyboard focus as indicated.

    NextFrame:

    Move Forward from Toolbars to Tracks

    none

    Move forward through currently focused toolbar in Upper Toolbar dock area, Track View and currently focused toolbar in Lower Toolbar dock area. Each use moves the keyboard focus as indicated.

    PrevTrack:

    CursorLeft:

    Cursor Left

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor one screen pixel to left. When a Snap To option is chosen, moves the cursor to the preceding unit of time as determined by the current selection format. If the key is held down, the cursor speed depends on the length of the tracks. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor as described at "Cursor Short Jump Left"

    CursorRight:

    Cursor Right

    none

    When not playing audio, moves the editing cursor one screen pixel to right. When a Snap To option is chosen, moves the cursor to the following unit of time as determined by the current selection format. If the key is held down, the cursor speed depends on the length of the tracks. When playing audio, moves the playback cursor as described at "Cursor Short Jump Right"

    CursorShortJumpLeft:

    TrackPan:

    Change Pan on Focused Track...

    none

    Brings up the Pan dialog for the focused track where you can enter a pan value, or use the slider for finer control of panning than is available when using the track pan slider.

    TrackPanLeft:

    Pan Left on Focused Track

    none

    Controls the pan slider on the focused track. Each keypress changes the pan value by 10% left.

    TrackPanRight:

    SelectTime:

    Select Time...

    double Start, (default:unchanged)

    double End, (default:unchanged) enum RelativeTo, (default:unchanged)

    • ProjectStart

    • Project

    • ProjectEnd

    • SelectionStart

    • Selection

    • SelectionEnd

    Modifies the temporal selection. Start and End are time. FromEnd allows selection from the end, which is handy to fade in and fade out a track.

    SelectFrequencies:

    Select Frequencies...

    double High, (default:unchanged)

    double Low, (default:unchanged)

    Modifies what frequencies are selected. High and Low are for spectral selection.

    SelectTracks:

    Select:

    Select...

    double Start, (default:unchanged)

    double End, (default:unchanged) enum RelativeTo, (default:unchanged)

    • ProjectStart

    • Project

    • ProjectEnd

    • SelectionStart

    • Selection

    • SelectionEnd

    double High, (default:unchanged) double Low, (default:unchanged) double Track, (default:unchanged) double TrackCount, (default:unchanged) enum Mode, (default:unchanged)

    • Set

    • Add

    • Remove

    Selects audio. Start and End are time. First and Last are track numbers. High and Low are for spectral selection. FromEnd allows selection from the end, which is handy to fade in and fade out a track. The Mode parameter allows complex selections, e.g adding or removing tracks from the current selection.

    SetTrack:

    Set Track...

    string Name, (default:unchanged)

    bool Selected, (default:unchanged) bool Focused, (default:unchanged) bool Mute, (default:unchanged) bool Solo, (default:unchanged) double Gain, (default:unchanged) double Pan, (default:unchanged) int Height, (default:unchanged) enum Display, (default:unchanged)

    • Waveform

    • Spectrogram

    enum Scale, (default:unchanged)

    • Linear

    • dB

    enum Color, (default:unchanged)

    • Color0

    • Color1

    • Color2

    • Color3

    enum VZoom, (default:unchanged)

    • Reset

    • Times2

    • HalfWave

    double VZoomHigh, (default:unchanged) double VZoomLow, (default:unchanged) bool SpecPrefs, (default:unchanged) bool SpectralSel, (default:unchanged) bool GrayScale, (default:unchanged)

    Sets properties for a track or channel (or both). Setting one channel of a stereo track can lead to interesting results. That's most used when setting relative sizing of the two channels. SpectralPrefs=1 sets the track to use general preferences, SpectralPrefs=1 per track prefs. When using general preferences, SetPreferences can be used to change a preference and so affect display of the track. Name is used to set the name. It is not used in choosing the track.

    GetInfo:

    QuickHelp:

    Quick Help...

    none

    A brief version of help with some of the most essential information.

    Manual:

    Manual...

    none

    Opens the manual in the default browser.

    Updates:

    DeviceInfo:

    Audio Device Info...

    none

    Shows technical information about your detected audio device(s).

    MidiDeviceInfo:

    MIDI Device Info...

    none

    Shows technical information about your detected MIDI device(s).

    Log:

    PrevWindow:

    Previous Window

    none

    Navigates to the previous window.

    NextWindow:

    Next Window

    none

    Navigates to the next window.

    Close

    Save Lossless Copy of Project...

    Export as OGG

    MIDI...

    Cut

    Silence Audio

    Join

    Add Label at Playback Position

    Split Cut

    Cursor to Stored Cursor Position

    Track Start to Cursor

    Next Lower Peak Frequency

    Previous Clip

    Mixer Board...

    Zoom Out

    Collapse All Tracks

    Tools Toolbar

    Pause

    Timer Record...

    Scrub Ruler

    Track Start

    Pinned Play/Record Head (on/off)

    Sync-Lock Tracks (on/off)

    Label Track

    Mix and Render to New Track

    Mute Tracks

    Center

    Start to Zero

    Nyquist

    Noise...

    Risset Drum...

    LADSPA

    Bass and Treble...

    Crossfade Clips

    Plot Spectrum...

    Apply Macro

    MP3 Conversion

    Play One Second

    Draw Tool

    Decrease Playback Volume

    Play Cut Preview-at-Speed

    Long Seek Left During Playback

    Change Audio Host...

    Snap-To Prior

    Move Focus to Previous Track

    Cursor Short Jump Left

    Pan Right on Focused Track

    Select Tracks...

    Get Info...

    Check for Updates...

    Show Log...

    ExponentialOut

  • LogarithmicIn

  • LogarithmicOut

  • RoundedIn

  • RoundedOut

  • CosineIn

  • CosineOut

  • SCurveIn

  • SCurveOut

  • Square, no alias

    enum Interpolation, (default:Linear)

    • Linear

    • Logarithmic

    Medium Overdrive
  • Hard Overdrive

  • Cubic Curve (odd harmonics)

  • Even Harmonics

  • Expand and Compress

  • Leveller

  • Rectifier Distortion

  • Hard Limiter 1413

  • bool DC Block, (default:False) double Threshold dB, (default:-6) double Noise Floor, (default:-70) double Parameter 1, (default:50) double Parameter 2, (default:50) int Repeats, (default:1)

    double f0, (default:0) double v0, (default:0)
    double f0, (default:0) double v0, (default:0)
    CustomCurve

    double curve, (default:0) enum direction, (default:Automatic)

    • Automatic

    • OutIn

    • InOut

    • PitchTempo

    • LQPitchShift

    double shift, (default:0) int number, (default:0) enum constrain, (default:Yes)

    • Yes

    • No

    dB36

  • dB48

  • HardClip

    double gain-L, (default:0) double gain-R, (default:0) double thresh, (default:0) double hold, (default:0) enum makeup, (default:No)

    • No

    • Yes

    dB36

  • dB48

  • InverseSawtooth
  • Square

  • int phase, (default:0) int wet, (default:0) double lfo, (default:0)

    IsolateInvert
  • RemoveCenterToMono

  • RemoveCenter

  • IsolateCenter

  • IsolateCenterInvert

  • Analyze

  • double strength, (default:0) double low-transition, (default:0) double high-transition, (default:0)

    Fullscreen

  • Toolbars

  • Effects

  • Scriptables

  • Preferences

  • Selectionbar

  • SpectralSelection

  • Timer

  • Tools

  • Transport

  • Mixer

  • Meter

  • PlayMeter

  • RecordMeter

  • Edit

  • Device

  • Scrub

  • Play-at-Speed

  • Trackpanel

  • Ruler

  • Tracks

  • FirstTrack

  • FirstTwoTracks

  • FirstThreeTracks

  • FirstFourTracks

  • SecondTrack

  • TracksPlus

  • FirstTrackPlus

  • AllTracks

  • AllTracksPlus

  • enum Background, (default:None)

    • Blue

    • White

    • None

    bool ToTop, (default:True)

    • No

    • Yes

    string labeltext, (default:) enum zeros, (default:TextOnly)

    • TextOnly

    • OneBefore

    • TwoBefore

    • ThreeBefore

    • OneAfter

    • TwoAfter

    • ThreeAfter

    int firstnum, (default:0) enum verbose, (default:Details)

    • Details

    • Warnings

    • None

    None

  • Count

  • Time

  • enum header, (default:None)

    • None

    • Minimal

    • Standard

    • All

    string optext, (default:) enum channel-layout, (default:SameLine)

    • SameLine

    • Alternate

    • LFirst

    enum messages, (default:Yes)

    • Yes

    • Errors

    • None

    enum Scale, (default:unchanged)
    • Linear

    • dB

    enum Color, (default:unchanged)

    • Color0

    • Color1

    • Color2

    • Color3

    enum VZoom, (default:unchanged)

    • Reset

    • Times2

    • HalfWave

    double VZoomHigh, (default:unchanged) double VZoomLow, (default:unchanged) bool SpecPrefs, (default:unchanged) bool SpectralSel, (default:unchanged) enum Scheme, (default:unchanged)

    • Color (default)

    • Color (classic)

    • Grayscale

    • Inverse Grayscale

    Color3

    double Start, (default:unchanged)

    Tracks
  • Clips

  • Envelopes

  • Labels

  • Boxes

  • enum Format, (default:JSON)

    • JSON

    • LISP

    • Brief

    Track0

  • Track1

  • waveshaper
    Nyquist Plugins Reference

    Playback equalization for 78 rpm shellacs and early 33⅓ LPs

    The audio on almost every phonograph record is not the same as that originally performed. For technical reasons the signal's frequencies need to be modified when cutting the disc. Playback equalization (EQ or de-emphasis) is necessary to restore the signal's original frequencies. Only thus can music lovers enjoy the original sound of the music performed long ago from their rare discs.

    Usage

    The most relevant EQ curves are presented as Table 1:

    • You can download some of them from the section of this page, and import them into Audacity using or

    • You can generate any curve yourself with the plugin

    • You can set the sliders of any digital or analog graphic equalizer manually

    • You can determine appropriate settings for any adjustable analog pre-amplifier.

    Which EQ curve will be needed for a specific record label is answered:

    • for 78 rpm shellacs in

    • for early LPs in

    Using EQ curves in Audacity

    Once , you can import the curve in the Filter Curve EQ or Graphic EQ effects, by clicking Presets & settings -> Import....

    Equalization (EQ) Curves explained

    When phonograph records are made, the sound being recorded is deliberately distorted by reducing the volume of the low frequencies and increasing the volume of the high frequencies. This process, known as 'pre-emphasis', allows the low frequencies to be accommodated in the limitations of the record groove and reduces the effect of high frequency surface noise. If pre-emphasis was not carried out, the bass notes in the music would create a groove in the record that oscillated so wildly that the stylus could jump out of it on playback, and the treble notes would be drowned out by the surface noise of the stylus in the groove.

    On playback, the pre-emphasis must be reversed in order to restore the original sound. This is known as 'de-emphasis' or equalization (EQ).

    Modern vinyl records use a method of pre-emphasis and de-emphasis adopted by the Recording Industry Association of America (RIAA) in the 1950's, and the EQ curve used is known as the RIAA curve. However, before the RIAA curve was adopted, each record label used its own EQ curve for recording and, for these records (78rpm and early vinyl), the correct EQ curve must be used for playback.

    Each EQ curve is a combination of two filter characteristics; a bass boost curve, defined by a 'Bass Turnover' (or 3dB) frequency, and a treble cut curve, defined by a '10 kHz Gain Roll-off' parameter, i.e. a defined level of treble cut at 10 kHz.

    As an example, Figure 1 below shows the characteristic of the bass boost curve defined by a 500Hz Bass Turnover, and Figure 2 shows the characteristic of the treble cut curve defined by a 10 kHz Gain Roll-off of -13.7dB. These two curves, when combined, give the characteristic shown in Figure 3.\

    The EQ curve may also include a Low Frequency Shelving filter, (although it is absent from the definition of most 78 rpm EQ curves). This addition reduces the effect of the bass boost at very low frequencies (typically 50 or 100 Hz) in order to attenuate low-frequency noise such as turntable rumble. Figure 4 shows the effect of a 50 Hz LF shelving filter being added to the curve in Figure 3. This is in fact the RIAA standard EQ curve.

    Acoustically recorded (pre-electric) 78 rpm records have a completely different characteristic because they were cut with a different type of cutter (For more details see: Acoustic recordings). In some early EQ curves of electrically recorded shellacs, while there is a bass boost curve, there is no treble cut necessary – i.e. the 10 kHz gain roll-off is zero.

    Note that in the combined EQ curve, the gains at the Bass Turnover frequency and at 10 kHz may be different from those specified by the parameters. This is not an error, but is due to fact that the gains of the bass boost and treble cut curves are simply added together.

    Because 78 rpm EQ curves were non-standard and, in many cases, accurate records were not kept to show what EQ curves were used when recording 78s, there is a degree of uncertainty about what is the correct playback EQ for many record labels. The tables below have been obtained from websites which, in their turn, have compiled data from a number of sources and should prove reasonably accurate. However, the ear of the listener is the final arbiter - if it doesn't sound right, it isn't right!

    According to NAB standards, the nominal speed of a 78 rpm record is precisely 78.26 rpm +/- 0.3% (for North America and other countries with an utility frequency of 60 Hz). According to British Standards Institution it is 77.92 rpm +/- 0.5% (for Britain, Europe and other countries with a mains frequency of 50 Hz).

    EQ Curves

    Pre-equalization of most records – especially of shellacs – was always determined by the cutter head used and often by internal regulations of the record company. Both left quite some room for the recording engineer to make changes to improve the sound. Also if Graumann uses 250 Hz in playback of an EMI disc and Copeland votes for 300 Hz this is not a contradiction. Both mean the same EQ curve but have different opinions on what sounds best. This should encourage you to try both versions and take the one which sounds right to your ears.

    Please do not worry about fractions of a dB! Still in the 1960s an accuracy of a curve of +/- 2 dB was considered to be standard. In the 1950s +/- 3 dB were a very fine result and nobody will ever know if recording engineers in the 1940s or 1930s applied their curves correctly (or if they applied them at all!) So the spread in pre-equalization during recording will outnumber any bias in playback equalization by far.

    Table of EQ Curves

    The most relevant EQ curves are presented in Table 1. All curves are described from the point of view of a playback or de-emphasis curve, where bass / low frequencies must be amplified / boosted and where treble / high frequencies must be attenuated / cut in order to achieve the original sound that had been recorded. The corresponding pre-emphasis curve used for cutting the master disk is inverse.

    When comparing with lists provided by the manufacturers of equalizer pre-amps it should be considered that those may be misleading, as they might not quote the correct parameters of the curve but rather the next-best possible settings of these devices. For example the Conductart OWL 1 Sound Restoration Module – a renowned pre-amp of the 1980s – offered settings of flat/ 250/ 375/ 500/ 750/ 1000/ RIAA for turnover and flat/ 5/ 8.5/ 12/ 14/ 16/ RIAA for roll-off. Thus for the widely used standard “AES 400N-12” settings of 375 Hz and -12 dB were listed; for the “Bartok 629C-16” curve it was 750 Hz and -16 dB and for “LONDON LP 500C-10.5” it was 500 Hz and -8.5 dB. These recommendations were quoted or copied by other authors and three “new characteristics” had come to existence.

    Table 1 gives the three parameters to characterize any EQ curve: the turnover frequency f1 for bass shelf, f2 for bass boost and f3 for treble cut (or alternatively the three corresponding time constants τ1, τ2 and τ3). These are the necessary conditions to compute and plot any EQ curve, determine the correct settings of a digital equalizer or to solder an electronic filter circuit.

    The gain at two typical frequencies will give you a rough impression of what the curve does to the audio from the record. The frequencies are:

    • 50 Hz, where usually the bass shelf becomes effective

    • 10 kHz, because the treble curve is often indicated by roll-off at 10,000 Hz

    The very descriptive “code” is a good tool to avoid misunderstanding when EQ curves come under various alias names (what they do too often).

    • The first 3-digit number indicates the turnover frequency of bass boost (f2)

    • The letter in the middle is N … (“None”) if no bass shelving is applied, or R … 20 dB (named R after RCA or RIAA) B … 18 dB A … 16 dB C … 14 dB (named C after Columbia LP curve) X … 12 dB

    • The last number shows the reduction or roll-off of treble at 10 kHz and is always preceded by a minus sign. Please mind that this is only a code and that the exact value – after normalization to 0 dB at 1000 Hz – might be different.

    This code can be used to find the correct settings of most equalizer pre-amps.

    (Example: “RIAA 500R-13.7” means for the RIAA curve that bass must be boosted below 500 Hz, but no more than + 20 dB and that treble must be cut at 10,000 Hz to – 13.7 dB)

    The geographic region and the time period are added to allow a qualified guess for the required EQ should a record label not be listed. In general, American recording curves were more deliberate in cutting bass and boosting treble. The British and Europeans tended to apply only the necessary minimum of bass attenuation and often no treble boost at all, that means they had a “flat” treble curve. Early pre-emphasis curves were simply built and rather soft. In the late years (after 1945) curves became highly sophisticated, with the third turnover frequency f1 added to manage the bass shelving and also with gain ranging from -20 dB to + 20dB.

    Table 1: Playback Equalization Curves

    Region
    Timeperiod
    Curve Name, alias names
    Time constants
    Time constants
    Turnover frequencies
    Turnover frequencies
    Turnover frequencies
    Bass shelf
    Bass boost
    Treble cut
    Citations

    Table 1 is mostly based on Tab. 2a of: Heinz O. Graumann, Schallplatten-Schneidkennlinien und ihre Entzerrung, in: FUNKSCHAU 1958 / Heft 15, pp 359 ff* computed frequencies to get 6 or 8 dB @ 10 kHz

    [1] CCIR used by Deutsche Grammophon modified with 50 Hz bass shelving => IEC N78 [Brice]

    [2] Used by British Decca and for London releases in US and UK, mostly M33. Cf.: Wolfgang Leister, The London Curve, in ARSC Journal, vol.48:2, Fall 2017, p.163

    [3] Gary A. Galo, The Columbia LP Equalization Curve, ARSC conference March 2008; Gary A. Galo, Disc Recording Equalization Demystified, in ARSC Journal Fall 1996

    [4] Old RCA is one of the original RCA curves for shellacs. It continued to be used for 33⅓ LPs by RCA-Victor, Brunswick, Concert Hall, Coral, Decca (Amer.) and Westminster. The turnover f3 and the time constants are computed values for an equalizer set at 800N-8.

    78 rpm EQ Curve Generator

    EQ Curves for Audacity can be generated from these Frequency and Roll-off values using the experimental Nyquist plugin "78 RPM EQ Curve Generator". This plugin is obtainable from the top of this and requires Audacity 1.3.13 or later. Please give feedback on this plug-in, or ask for help if you need it, by replying to that Forum topic.

    1. Extract 78EQCurveGen.ny from the zip file downloaded from the above Forum topic.

    2. Place 78EQCurveGen.ny in the "Plug-Ins" folder inside the Audacity installation folder, then launch or restart Audacity. For more help installing the .ny file to the correct location, click here.

    3. Click . You can find help inside the plugin by choosing one of the Help options in "Select Function or Help".

    EQ Curves Library

    Here you can find some useful EQ curves for download to Audacity for use in Effect -> EQ and Filters -> Graphic EQ and Filter Curve EQ. (Curves are in TXT file format, as required in current Audacity and compatible down to version 2.4.0).

    78 rpm shellacs

    EQ Curve file
    Description

    pre-RIAA 33⅓ LPs

    EQ curve files
    Description

    Individual fine tuning

    In some cases it will be not enough to apply the correct EQ to get the desired result. According to the condition of the record and to personal listening preferences you might consider one of the following methods:

    • The 250-or-300-Hz dilemma: To use “European250” or “Blumlein300” EQ seems to be not a question of right or wrong but of personal listening preferences. In general, Continental European authors prefer 250 Hz (derived from the original Western Electric recommendation) for Decca (Brit. and Europ.), Brunswick, Cetra, Columbia (Brit.), EMI-HMV and Parlophone. Englishman Copeland favors 300 Hz (derived from the recording characteristic of the Blumlein cutter) for British EMI, His Master’s Voice and Columbia and also for Odeon. Copeland puts it like this: “[…] but when I’m not sure I use 300 Hz.” [Copeland, Manual, p 129]. Being derived from the previous 250-or-300-Hz curve the same applies to “DECCA78” which was used from 1944 for shellacs with the ffrr system. So you should also feel free to decide the 250-or-300-Hz question according to your own listening preference: 300 Hz will give an extra amplification of bass in play back (ca 1.5 dB at 50 Hz).

    • To remove low frequency noise Robinson (MidiMagic) recommends a low cut filter at 100 Hz with just 6 dB/octave. (Especially for many acoustic recordings which have only noise below 150 Hz or for the “long-playing” shellacs of RCA Victor of 1931/32). This filter will do exactly the same as the “C”-type bass shelf of Columbia LP curve.

    Remarks for Analog Purists

    • Hiss and high frequency scratch due to old worn records: When digitizing such recordings Audacity’s will do a good job to improve the sound once and for all. Those who prefer entirely analog replay with an adjustable pre-amplifier will have the opportunity to improve the sound every time they replay. They can cut / attenuate the frequency range most affected by the noise. A higher value for roll-off at 10 kHz than the “correct” EQ will usually give a better result than a simple treble filter – but: at the expense of the high frequencies of the audio itself.

    • Dull, lifeless sound: If you improve poor bass on discs of any speed by choosing a higher bass turnover frequency than the “correct” EQ, there will be the welcome side effect of moderately amplifying midrange frequencies. This will bring life to the core octaves of a piece of music by improving instrument and vocal characteristics.

    Acoustic recordings and Broadcast Transcription Discs

    Acoustic recordings (before 1926) are beyond the scope of this page. In these pioneer years speeds varied from 70 to 90 rpm, groove modulation could be lateral, vertical or diagonal and some records were even cut outward with the audio starting at the center. A special turntable and a range of styli / needles are needed to replay.

    All acoustics were recorded without any pre-equalization, simply because a modification of the audio was impossible before electric microphones and amplifiers came into use. Nonetheless there are conflicting opinions as to the result:

    According to various authors the acoustical recording process had an "inherent mechanical equalization", which results – within the limited frequency range of approx. 150 to 4000 Hz – in a constant velocity characteristic one would only expect from a magnetic cutter. With a magnetic cartridge this would command to be replayed “flat”. Please note that the acoustical recording characteristic is not equalized at all.

    According to Robinson an acoustical recording must have a constant-amplitude characteristic which will be correctly reproduced by playing back with a gramophone needle or a piezoelectric crystal pickup. A magnetic cartridge will – by its constant velocity characteristic – double the amplitude whenever the frequency doubles. To compensate for the magnetic pickup MidiMagic recommends an “800N-16” EQ curve, which comes close to the theoretical characteristic of a constant velocity device. Some more information is here on and on . Please note that the acoustical recording characteristic is not equalized at all.

    Kolkowski’s results of a of an acoustic recording session show that bass needs heavy equalization if the losses in the recording horn (here below 400 Hz) shall be compensated for. Parametric equalization may be used at resonant frequencies. Treble should be amplified (!) to compensate for the high-frequency roll-off of the recorder. Due to the individual properties (defects) of recording horns and recorders there will be no “general characteristic” of acoustics and therefore no general EQ.

    gives useful information on vintage labels as Edison, Berliner, Pathé or Zonophone and playback EQ recommendations.

    Scientific help regarding valuable historic recordings can be found at (International Association of Sound and Audiovisual Archives) and at (Association for Recorded Sound Collections).

    Broadcast Transcription Discs are not in the focus of this page either. Those were recordable lacquer discs, mostly 16 inch in diameter, played at 33⅓ or 78 rpm. They were professionally used by radio broadcasters. Some more information is in .

    In America many of these discs were recorded under the standard of the National Association of Broadcasters (NAB) of 1942. The very same recording curve had been used by NBC under the name “Orthacoustic” since mid 1930s. This “NAB Transcription (1942)” playback EQ setting can be downloaded here.

    The British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC) used a rather exotic curve as a house standard. The version in use after 1949 has been reconstructed from Longford-Smith’s publication of 1952 as an Audacity EQ setting “BBC Transcription (1949)” and can be downloaded here.

    78 rpm shellac labels and their EQ

    This page is about electrical recordings since 1925 on 78 rpm discs made of shellac! The invention of the Electrical Recording System by Bell Laboratories / Western Electric which was licensed to industry leaders Columbia Records and Victor set some de-facto standards: speed is always 78 rpm, cut is always lateral (same as later mono LPs) and the groove type is always Normal Groove (also named coarse groove). Therefore shellacs are sometimes referred to as N78 (which stands for normal groove discs, played at 78 rpm).

    A turntable capable of 78 rpm will be useful. You will need a MONO stylus with 2.5 mil (64 μm), for early electricals possibly one with 3 mil (76 μm) and this Audacity Wiki!

    It is assumed that you replay your discs “flat” (without any analog de-equalization) and apply the necessary EQ after digitizing with Audacity . If it is necessary to play the record through a system that applies modern RIAA equalization, select the "RIAA" curve in Audacity's Filter Curve EQ effect and use the Invert button to invert and thus remove the incorrect RIAA equalization before applying the appropriate equalization to the recording.

    In case sources did not agree on one EQ curve, their different opinions are listed and you will have to trust your ears.

    Table 2: 78 rpm Shellac Labels and Their EQ

    Remarks
    • [Bc] ... Due to changes in the setup of the Blumlein cutter the characteristic of the recordings could vary between 180 Hz-FLAT and 500 Hz-FLAT, resulting in +/- 4 dB at 50 Hz. Copeland suggests 300 Hz as an average value.

    • [CAP]... used its own “Capitol curve” 400N-12.7. Play back with “AES” 400N-12.3!

    Early 33⅓ LP labels and their EQ

    After the launch of the “long-playing record 33⅓ rpm” by Columbia in 1948 (which used vinyl discs and a narrower groove width – microgroove records or M33) record producers experimented a lot to fully exploit the potential of the new medium. Bass shelving came into use to limit the necessary bass boost in playback and – as a consequence of the extended frequency range – necessary gain reached values as high as +/- 20 dB. So recording characteristics varied considerably!

    The “poor sound quality” of some early LPs is nowadays considered to be mostly a result of the wrong EQ in playback.

    Standardization was reached with the “New Orthophonic” curve of RCA which was to become the world standard by the name of RIAA. In America most labels switched to RIAA around 1955 – Europe followed by 1962.

    How to identify RIAA recordings:

    • “ORTHOphonic” or “New Orthophonic” (after August 1952), “NARTB” or “New NARTB” (after June 1953) or “New AES” (after 1954) indicate RIAA equalization.

    • The following labels should have used only RIAA all the time: Argo, Bethlehem, Classic Editions, Chess, Clef, Composer Recordings, McIntosh, Montilla, New Jazz, Norgram, Prestige, Romany, Roulette, Savoy, Vocalion and Walden [High Fidelity Magazine, MidiMagic].

    In case that sources did not agree on one EQ curve, their different opinions are listed and you will have to trust your ears.

    Table 3: Early 33⅓ LP Labels And Their EQ

    Remarks
    • [1]... This EQ can be traced back to Langford-Smith (1952), who vaguely describes a “London LP curve (Jan. 1951)”. Powell reads this as 300Hz (wrong!) and -14 dB (correct!). Copeland judges evidence “to be very defective.” No evidence of usage.

    • [CAP]... used its own “Capitol curve” 400N-12.7. Play back with “AES” 400N-12.3!

    Sources, links and reading references

    Sources of tables 2 and 3:
    • AT ... AudacityTeam own research

    • ES ... and the updated EQ list from the of their re-equalizer pre-amp in which they also have very useful tips how to identify LPs by their matrix number (British London / Decca, American Decca, American Columbia, RCA Victor). Please mind that they quote settings of their device which have to be translated back into parameters of EQ curves.

    Recommended analog reference

    • James R. Powell, Jr. and Randall G. Stehle, "Playback Equalizer Settings for 78 RPM Recordings", Third Edition, Gramophone Adventures, Portage, MI, 1993, 2002, 2007. A compilation of Powell’s subjective recommendations of Owl 1 settings for approx. 1800 discs / 400 labels (mostly American and Jazz). Reprint of 3rd edition available at .

    • Fritz Langford-Smith, Radiotron Designer's Handbook, Wireless Press, Sydney, Fourth edition, 1952.

    • James Moir, High Quality Sound Reproduction, Chapman & Hall Ltd., London, 1958

    τ1 [μs]

    τ2 [μs]

    τ3 [μs]

    f1 [Hz]

    f2 [Hz]

    f3 [Hz]

    [dB]

    @ 50Hz [dB]

    @10kHz [dB]

    Normal Groove, 78 rpm

    Eur., Brit.

    1926 - 1946

    "European 78", Old Europ.,250,EMI 78

    636

    250 [5]

    + 14,4

    0 (flat)

    250N-0

    Eur., Brit.

    1927 - 1946

    "Blumlein 300"

    531

    300 [5]

    + 16

    0 (flat)

    300N-0

    Brit., Amer.

    1926 - 1950

    "500-FLAT", Blumlein500, Europ.500

    318

    500

    + 19

    0 (flat)

    500N-0

    America

    1926 - 1951

    "American 78"

    636

    250

    5900*

    + 14

    - 6

    250N-6

    America

    1926 - 1951

    "American 78"

    636

    250

    4400*

    + 14

    - 8

    250N-8

    Amer.(CBS)

    1938 - 1948

    "Columbia 78"

    530

    100

    300

    1592

    + 16,7

    - 15,0

    300N-16

    Amer.(RCA)

    1941 - 1947

    "Old RCA" [4]

    199

    36,7

    800

    4340

    + 22,2

    -9,9

    800N-8

    Eur., Brit.

    1944 - 1956

    "DECCA 78", FFRR 78, London ffrr 78

    531

    25

    300 [5]

    6366

    + 15,4

    - 5,7

    300N-5.5

    Germany

    1952 - 1955

    "CCIR 78", Recomm. No.134 (1953) [1]

    450

    50

    354

    3183

    + 17,0

    - 10,5

    350N-10.5

    Eur., Brit.

    1955 - end

    "IEC N78" = "B.S.1928" for N78 only

    3180

    450

    50

    50

    354

    3183

    + 16

    + 14,0

    - 10,5

    350A-10.5

    Microgroove, 33⅓ and 45 rpm

    America

    1942 - 1949

    NAB (broadcast transcriptions, 1942)

    318

    100

    500

    1592

    + 20,5

    - 15,6

    500N-16

    America

    6/1948 - 1956

    "Columbia LP", Col. M33, "LP" [3]

    1590

    318

    100

    100

    500

    1592

    + 14,5

    + 13,6

    - 15,5

    500C-16

    America

    4/1949 - 1958

    "NAB", NARTB (standard 1949) [3]

    3180

    318

    100

    50

    500

    1592

    + 20

    + 17,5

    - 15,6

    500"B"-16

    America

    1/1951 - 1958

    "AES" (standard 1951)

    398

    63,7

    400

    2500

    + 18,1

    - 12,3

    400N-12.3

    Amer.(RCA)

    1947 - 8/1952

    "RCA 45" (45 rpm) [6]

    200

    75

    796

    2122

    + 22,6

    - 13.7

    800N-13.7

    Amer.(RCA)

    1947 - 8/1952

    "RCA Old Orthophonic" (33⅓ LPs) [6]

    318

    75

    500

    2122

    + 19,7

    - 13.7

    500N-13.7

    Amer.(RCA)

    8/1952 - pres.

    "RCA New Orthophonic"

    3180

    318

    75

    50,05

    500,5

    2122

    + 19,5

    + 16,9

    - 13,7

    500R-13.7

    Amer. (all)

    ca.1956 - pres.

    = "RIAA" (US-standard since 1955)

    Europe

    ca.1962 - pres.

    = IEC No.98 (1955) = B.S.1928 (1955)

    Amer., Brit.

    1949 - 1956

    "LONDON LP" [2]

    1590

    318

    50

    100

    500

    3183

    + 13,8

    + 12,5

    - 10,9

    500C-10.5

    Germany

    1955 - 1962(?)

    TELDEC (as proposed 1957 for DIN)

    3180

    318

    50

    50

    500

    3183

    + 19,3

    + 16,5

    - 10,9

    500R-11

    [5] 250 Hz or 300 Hz seem to be a question of personal listening preference, as explained in Individual fine tuning

    [6] Robert C. Moyer, Evolution of a Recording Curve; in: Audio Engineering, vol.37, no.7, July 1953; pp 19-22, 53-54. Roll-off is frequently listed as between 10 and 12 dB, but this “flattening off” to ca 10 dB at 10 kHz was an intentional high cut which must not be compensated for in playback. Thus a setting of 13.7 dB is correct!

    Choose the curve you want from one of the lists.
  • Enter the values for your chosen curve for

    • "Bass Turnover Frequency (Hz)"

    • "10 kHz Gain Roll-off (dB)"

    • "LF Shelving Frequency (Hz)" (if a value is given)

    in the equivalent boxes in the plugin dialog.

  • Click "OK" in the plugin to save the .xml file to your chosen location.

  • Use the EQ XML to TXT Converter Tool to convert your XML file to a TXT text file (suitable for Audacity 2.4.0 and later)

  • Select some audio and choose .

  • Choose "Manage".

  • Choose "Import...", navigate to the location where you saved the .txt file.

  • Click "Open".

  • Decca_78_3.2.2.txt

    Decca 78 – 300N-5.5: For Decca and London shellacs featuring the ffrr (full frequency range recording) system. Here in the version of Copeland/The British Library Sound Archive

    European_78_3.2.2.txt

    European 78 - 250N-0 is a common setting for European shellacs (1926 – ca. 1944), especially for Columbia and His Master’s Voice produced by EMI (UK), Cetra and Cetra-Soria.

    European_78_3.2.2.txt

    Telefunken 400N-0: used by European Ultraphon, Supraphon and Turicaphon from 1929. Also used by Telefunken – after the takeover of Ultraphon – until mid 1950s.

    Western_Electric_3.2.2.txt

    Western Electric: Very early Columbia and Victor recordings (1926) used a bass turnover frequency of 250 or 300 Hz but their treble is described as “flat”. The perceived treble amplification was possibly only the result of resonant peaks of the early Western Electric condenser microphones used in recording. The above download is an experimental replay EQ curve for this microphone / pre-emphasis combination. Additional background information is given in .

    RIAA.txt

    RIAA = RCA New Orthophonic – 500R-13.7

    RCA_Old_Orthophonic_3.2.2.txt

    RCA Old Orthophonic – 500N-13.7: RCA’s curve for 33⅓ LPs (1950 – August 1952) and for LPs mastered by RCA for other labels. Possibly identical with “MGM curve” 500N-12 used by MGM.

    Vadlyd uses a variable low cut filter for American Victor, early British Decca, EMI, His Master’s Voice and Columbia at frequencies between 40 and 70 Hz. This is very similar to the recommendation of Phonomuseum.org. In Audacity you can experiment with different settings for “Frequency” and “Roll-off” in Effect -> High Pass Filter (a different word for Low Cut Filter) and listen to the result with “Preview”.

  • All bass shelf settings on analog equalizers (R-B-A-C-X) can also be used to remove low frequency noise (especially from acoustics and early shellacs). This is why the extra positions X and A were provided [MidiMagic]

  • A known trick of recording engineers was to increase bass t/o frequency on very long recordings. Thus bass attenuation was increased and bass amplitude and necessary groove width were reduced. So the given duration of the audio could be squeezed into the given space on the disc. If a disc is filled with grooves as can be a higher bass turnover frequency can be necessary to restore the original sound. Example: Colosseum [ES]

  • To improve the weak bass on some 45s (especially on EPs – Extended Play) Esoteric Sound uses a higher turnover frequency for bass in replay than in pre-equalization. For example 700 Hz instead of the “correct” 500 Hz. This will give a smooth, extra bass amplification of roughly 4 dB at 50 Hz.

  • To reduce surface noise of early American Columbia, Victor and RCA-Victor iasa recommends an additional high cut (= low pass) filter set to 5500 or 5200 Hz with 6 dB/octave. This will reduce treble by 3 dB at around 5000 Hz and by 9 dB at 10000 Hz – and hopefully most of the noise.

  • ES

    _Electrical 78's (general)

    1932-1938, mid 30s

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    ia,ES,JP,RF

    _Electrical 78's (general)

    1938-1946

    300 or 500

    0 or -5

    ES

    _Electrical 78's (general)

    1947-1954

    300 or 500

    -16

    ES

    Aco

    1926 - 1933, British, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Aeolian-Vocalion

    1926 - 1933, British, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    ARC

    American Record Corporation = Cameo + Pathé + Plaza Group; 1929 - 1930

    500

    0 or -5

    PC,JP

    ARC

    American Record Corporation; 1930 - 1939 (some early also 500-5)

    500

    -8.5

    JP

    Argo

    American 78

    250N-6

    250

    -6

    mm

    Ariel

    1925 - 1931, British, with Δ after matrix no. or with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Artist

    500

    -16

    ES

    Audiophile

    1952 - 1955, 78 rpm microgroove (!) records, up to AP-30; may also be replayed with "flat" treble

    Audiophile78

    300N-8

    300

    -8

    RH,Mc,AT

    Autograph

    Marsh Laboratories, ca. 1924 - 1926

    1000

    0

    ES,JP

    Banner

    1926 - 1929, an ARC label from 1929

    500

    0

    JP

    Balkan

    500

    -5

    ES

    Beltona

    1926 - 1933, from cat. 1194 to 1282, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Beltona

    1944 - 1955, ffrr, prod. by Decca UK,

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC

    Bluebird

    sublabel of RCA, see: RCA-Victor

    Bluebird

    1925 - 1931, with VE in an oval or "Orthophonic Recording" or with Δ after matrix no. (recorded in Europe)

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Broadcast (American)

    American 78

    250N-6

    250

    -6

    mm

    Broadcast (American)

    1940s

    500

    -12

    JP

    Broadcast (British)

    1926 - 1933, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Brunswick (American)

    1925 - 1930

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    ia,JP,RF,PC

    Brunswick (American)

    1929 - 1935, an ARC label from Dec 1931 to 1940

    500

    -5

    JP

    Brunswick (American)

    1935 - 1939

    500

    -8.5

    JP

    Brunswick (American)

    1946 - 1951 or 1954, a Decca (Amer.) label since 1941

    630N-?

    629

    -8 or -12

    ES,mm

    Brunswick (British)

    1925 - 1944, a Decca label since 1932; see: Decca (Brit.)

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ES,GH

    Cameo

    1926 - 1929, probably W.E.; an ARC label from 1929

    [W.E.]

    250

    0/W.E.

    JP

    Capitol

    earliest 78s

    1000

    PC

    Capitol

    1942 - 1953; Capitol founded in 1942; since 1954 => RIAA

    Capitol [CAP]

    400N-12.7

    400

    -12.7

    ia,ES,mil,JP,Mc

    Capitol

    1942 - 1951

    American 78

    250N-8

    250

    -8

    mm

    Capitol

    to 1954

    800

    -10

    ES

    Capitol / Capitol Cetra

    1951-1955

    Capitol [CAP]

    400N-12.7

    400

    -12.7

    mm

    Capitol - Telefunken

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    ES,mil

    Capitol (British)

    1944 - 1955, "ffrr", prod. by Decca UK, matrix prefix DCAP

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC,JP

    Cetra

    founded 1930s by RAI, Italy

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    GH

    Cetra-Soria

    founded 1949, Cetra prod. in US

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    mm

    Chappell

    1931 - 1944, British, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Coliseum

    1926 - 1933, British, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Columbia (American)

    1925 - 1931 (some -1934)

    [W.E.]

    200 - 250

    -5 / W.E.

    AT,ES,mil,ia,JP

    Columbia (American)

    1931 - 1937

    American 78

    250N-8

    250

    -8

    AT,mm,JP

    Columbia (American)

    1939 - 1956; "Columbia Rec." a CBS label since 1938; from 1955 change to RIAA

    Columbia 78

    300N-16

    300

    -16

    ia,GH,ES,mil,mm, JP,Mc,AT

    Columbia (British)

    1925 - 1931, with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Columbia (British)

    1931 - 1953, an EMI UK label from 1931

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ia,GH,ES,JP,RF

    Columbia (British)

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Columbia (British)

    1932 - 1949, with W in a circle or matrix prefix W (US COL/OKeh reissues)

    500-FLAT

    500

    0, later -12

    PC

    Columbia (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, EMI UK, matrix nos. from CA22600 to CA22610, and at CAX11932

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    PC

    Concert Hall

    500

    -5

    ES

    Coral

    1948 - 1954

    629

    -12

    ES

    Coral

    1948 - 1953, sublabel of Decca US; from 1953 => RIAA

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    -12.3

    JP

    Decca (American)

    1934 - 1937, (Decca US established in 1934)

    American 78

    250N-8

    250

    -8.5

    JP

    Decca (American)

    1937 - 1946 ca

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    -12.3

    ia,JP,RF

    Decca (American)

    pre 1946, imports from Britain?

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    ES

    Decca (American)

    very few, to try a combination of 500Hz / 6300 Hz

    500N-5.5

    500

    -5,5

    mm

    Decca (American)

    1946 - 1951, if labeled "ffrr"

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    mm

    Decca (American)

    1946 - 1954 (??? 629 Hz ???)

    629

    -12

    ES

    Decca (American)

    1951 - 1953, from 1953 => RIAA

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    -12.3

    mm

    Decca (British)

    1929 - 1944

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ES,mm

    Decca (British)

    1935 - 1944, matrix up to DR8485-2; test disc: Decca EXP55 or Z718

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Decca (British)

    1944 - 1955, ffrr, cat. nos. from F.8440, K.1032, M.569 and X.281 (some exceptions); matrix nos. 8486 to 18000; test disc: Decca K.1802, London T.4996

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC,ES,mm,JP

    Decca (British)

    some 1949-1956

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10,5

    mm

    Decca (European)

    to 1944

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    mm

    Decca (European)

    1944-1950

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    ES,mm

    Decca (European)

    1950-1954, (Telefunken + Decca UK = TELDEC since 1950)

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    mm

    Decca (European)

    some 1954-1962

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    354

    -10,5

    mm

    Deutsche Grammophon

    alias "DGG", taken over by Telefunken 1937

    300

    -5

    ES,mil

    Deutsche Grammophon

    1944 ca. - 1953 ca. (???)

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    PC

    Dial

    78s used same EQ as 33⅓ and 45s

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil

    Domino

    1926 - 1929, an ARC label from 1929

    500

    -5

    JP

    Dot

    to 1958

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    -12.3

    mm

    Electrola

    800

    -10

    ES,mil

    EMI-HMV (British)

    some, re-releases of acoustics mastered 1909-1926

    800N-12

    800

    -12

    mm

    EMI-HMV (British)

    1927 - 1953

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    GH,ES,mil,mm

    EMI-HMV (British)

    1931 - 1944, with □ after matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    EMI-HMV (British)

    1931 - 1949, with ◊ after matrix no.

    500-FLAT

    500

    0, later -12

    PC

    EMI-HMV (British)

    1931 - 1953, (test disc HMV DB4037)

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ia,ES,mil,JP,PC

    EMI-HMV (British)

    11/1943 - 7/1953, matrix nos. from 2EA17501 to 0EA17576

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    PC

    EMI-HMV (British)

    1955 - end, test disc: EMI JGS812, BBC DOM86

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    354

    -10,5

    PC

    Exclusive

    1944 - 1949

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    mm

    Gramophone Company

    1925 - 1931 UK, with Δ after matrix no.

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Gramophone Company

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    ES,mil

    Harmony

    1929 - 1931

    250

    -5

    JP

    His Master's Voice (Brit.)

    some, re-releases of acoustics mastered 1909-1926

    800N-12

    800

    -12

    mm

    His Master's Voice (Brit.)

    1925 - 1931 British, with Δ after matrix no.

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    His Master's Voice (Brit.)

    1931 - 1953, prod. by EMI(UK)

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ia,GH,mm,JP,RF

    His Master's Voice (Brit.)

    1932 - 1949, with ◊ after matrix no.

    500-FLAT

    500

    0, later -12

    PC

    His Master's Voice (Brit.)

    11/1943 - 7/1953, EMI UK, matrix nos. from 2EA17501 to 0EA17576

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    PC

    Hispanophone

    1926 - 1931 , with Δ after matrix no.

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Hit of the Week

    1930 - 1932

    500

    -5 or -8.5

    ES,mil,JP

    Homochord

    1926 - 1928, matrix no. HH, JJ, HR, JR, Ee (made by Gramophone Co.)

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Hugophone

    1925 - 1931, with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Hugophone

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Jewel

    1926 - 1929, an ARC label from 1929

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    JP

    Keynote

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    ES

    Keynote

    1940s

    500

    -12

    JP

    King

    1946 - 1953, since 1953 => RIAA

    500

    -8.5 or -16

    ES,mil,JP

    Lincoln

    sublabel of Cameo, 1926 - 1929, probably W.E.

    [W.E.]

    250

    -5 / W.E.

    JP

    Linguaphone

    1926 - 1933, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Linguaphone

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    ES,mil

    L'Oiseau-Lyre

    1944 - 1955, ffrr, prod. by Decca UK,

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC

    London

    1948 - 1955, ffrr, prod. by Decca UK,

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC,mil,JP

    MacGregor

    1930 - 1950s, a Hollywood recording studio; produced by Brunswick, ARC, Capitol,...; various EQs (250-5, 250-8, 400-12.7, 500-12)

    mm,JP,AT

    Majestic

    1942 - 1948

    500

    -16

    ES,JP

    Marsh Laboratories

    (electrical)

    1000

    0

    ES

    Melotone

    1931 - 1938, a Brunswick budget label; see Brunswick (Amer.)

    Mercury

    1945 - 1953; approx. to matrix YB9700; since late 1953 => RIAA

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    -12.3

    ia,ES,mm,JP,Mc

    MGM (American)

    founded 1946; up to E3071

    MGM [MGM]

    500N-12

    500

    -12

    ia,ES,mil,JP,RF

    MGM (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, matrix no. 0SM420

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    PC

    Musicraft

    ??? RCA Old Ortho.???

    700-800

    -13.7

    ES,mil

    Musicraft

    500

    -8.5 or -12

    JP

    Nat. Gramophonic Soc.

    1926 - 1933, with M in a circle, cat. HHH to TTT and NGS.65 to NGS.102

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Nixa

    1950 - ?, Britain, shellacs produced by Decca UK

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5.7

    ris

    Octacros

    1931 - ?, Britain, a Synchrophone label

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Odeon

    some early electricals

    800

    0

    ES,mil

    Odeon

    1925 - 1928, with W in a circle (a Lindström label)

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Odeon

    1928 - 1936, matrix with ₤ in a circle ( a Lindström label); bass shelf at 100Hz

    400

    C

    0

    PC

    Odeon

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Odeon

    to 1953, (1926 sub. of Brit. Columbia , 1931 sub. of EMI)

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    ES,mil

    OKeh

    1926 - 1935, a Columbia label since 1926

    [W.E.]

    250

    -5 / W.E.

    AT,JP,mm

    OKeh

    1931 - 1935, some; probably American78

    American 78

    250N-8

    250-300

    0 or -8.5

    ES,mil

    OKeh

    1940 - 1945 and 1951 - 1955; since 1955 => RIAA

    Columbia 78

    300N-16

    300

    -16

    AT,JP

    Oriole

    1926 - 1929, an ARC label from 1926

    500

    -5

    JP

    Parlophone (Amer.,Brit.)

    1925 - 1931, with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    -5 / W.E.

    PC,JP

    Parlophone (British)

    1925 - 1953

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    GH,ES

    Parlophone (British)

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Parlophone (British)

    1932 - 1949, with W in a circle or matrix prefix W (US COL/OKeh re-issues for UK)

    500-FLAT

    500

    0, later -12

    PC

    Parlophone (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, EMI UK, matrix nos. from CE14643 to CE14689

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    ia,PC,JP,RF

    Parlophone-Odeon

    1925 - 1928, Odeon in Brit.; with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Parlophone-Odeon

    1928/29, Odeon in Brit.; matrix with ₤ in a circle, bass shelf at 100Hz

    400

    C

    0

    PC

    Pathé (American)

    1926 - 1929, probably W.E., some 500-5; an ARC label from 1929

    [W.E.]

    250

    -5 / W.E.

    JP

    Pathé (French)

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Perfect

    1926 - 1929, probably W.E., sublabel of Pathé (Amer.)

    [W.E.]

    250

    -5 / W.E.

    JP

    Philips

    to 1953

    Philips

    400N-6

    400

    -6

    mm

    Polydor

    sub-label of Deutsche Grammophon

    300

    -10

    ES,mil

    Radiofunken

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    mil

    RCA Victor

    12/1931 - 2/1932 "long-playing" shellacs, N-groove, played at 33⅓ rpm

    ≈Old Ortho.

    500N-13.7

    500 or up

    -13.7

    RM,PC

    RCA Victor

    1931 ca., test disc Victor 84522 without treble pre-emphasis

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500-600

    0

    PC,ES

    RCA Victor

    1931 - 1938, used high cut at 5500 Hz [R-B]

    ≈Old Ortho.

    500N-13.7

    500 or up

    -13.7

    RM,PC

    RCA Victor

    1938 - 1947, used High Cut at 8500 Hz, [R-C]

    Old Ortho.

    500N-13.7

    500

    -13.7

    RM,PC,ia,JP,ES, mil

    RCA Victor

    1941 - 1947 (some to 1952)

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    -8

    mm

    RCA Victor

    1947 - 1951 [R-D]

    RCA 45

    800N-13.7

    800

    -13.7

    mm

    RCA Victor

    1947 - Aug 1952 [R-D]

    Old Ortho.

    500N-13.7

    500

    -13.7

    RM,ia,mm,JP,RF

    RCA Victor

    since Aug 1952 => "New Orthophonic" = RIAA, from matrix E2RP4094

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    RM,ES

    RCA Victor (British)

    1931 - ?, with swastika after matrix no., re-issued by EMI UK

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    PC

    RCA Victor (British)

    1931 - 1944, with □ after matrix no., re-issued by EMI UK, [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    RCA Victor (European)

    1930 - 1950

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ES

    Regal (American)

    1926 - 1929, an ARC label from 1929

    500

    -5

    JP

    Regal (British)

    1925 - 1931, with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Regal Zonophone (Brit.)

    budget label of EMI/Columbia

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ES,mil

    Regal Zonophone (Brit.)

    1925 - 1931 UK, with Δ after matrix no. or with W in a circle

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Regal Zonophone (Brit.)

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Regal Zonophone (Brit.)

    1932 - 1949, with W in a circle or matrix prefix W (US COL/OKeh reissues for UK)

    500-FLAT

    500

    0, later -12

    PC

    Regal Zonophone (Brit.)

    1949 - 7/1953, matrix no. CAR6800

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    0

    JP

    Romeo

    1926 - 1929, sublabel of Cameo; probably W.E.

    [W.E.]

    250

    0 / W.E.

    JP

    Scala

    1926 - 1933, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Schirmer

    1000

    -24

    mil

    Supraphone

    Czech, since 1932, a subsid.of Ultraphon

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    ES,mil

    Synchrophone

    1931 - ?, Britain

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Technichord

    American, all N78 from 1938 [TCH]

    Technichord

    800N-12

    800

    -12

    ES,mil,mm

    Telefunken

    1944 - 1955, ffrr, prod. by Decca UK,

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    mm,PC

    Telefunken

    1951-1953, (Telefunken + Decca UK = TELDEC since 1950)

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    mm

    Tempo (American)

    Tempo Record Co. of America, Hollywood, CA; ca 1947 - late 1950s

    500

    -12

    JP

    Tempo (American)

    400N-6

    400

    -6

    mm

    Theme

    sublabel of Tempo (Amer.)

    500

    -12

    JP

    Theme

    all N78

    American 78

    250N-6

    250

    -6

    mm

    Turicaphon

    Switzerland, 1930 - , a subsid.of Ultraphon

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    Ultraphon

    Europe 1929-1932, taken over by Telefunken

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    0

    ES,mil

    Unison

    1926 - 1933, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Victor

    1925 - 1931, Western Electric System

    [W.E.]

    200 - 300

    0 to -7

    ia,JP,ES,mil,mm

    Victor

    Victor was taken over by RCA in 1930; see: RCA-Victor

    Victor / Victrola

    1925 - 1931, with VE in an oval or "Orthophonic Recording" or with Δ after matrix no. (recorded in Europe)

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Vocalion (American)

    a Brunswick label since 1924; see: Brunswick (Amer.)

    Vocalion (British)

    1926 - 1940; a Brunswick and since 1932 a Decca UK label

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    ES,mil

    Vocalion (British)

    1926 - 1933, to cat. X10029 A.0269 and K05312, with M in a circle

    BBC 2dB/oct.

    PC

    Vocalion (British)

    1944 - 1955, "ffrr", prod. by Decca UK, including V1000 series

    Decca 78

    300N-5.5

    300

    -5,7

    PC

    Voice of the Stars

    1931 - 1944, with © before matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    Zonophone

    1925 - 1931 UK, with Δ after matrix no.

    [W.E.]

    250

    W.E.mike

    PC

    Zonophone

    1931 - ?, with swastika after matrix no.

    European 78

    250N-0

    250

    0

    PC

    Zonophone

    1931 - 1944, with □ after matrix no., [Bc]

    Blumlein300

    300N-0

    300

    0

    PC

    [MGM] ... used a special “MGM curve” 500N-12. Play back with “RCA Old Orthophonic” 500N-13.7!

  • [R-D] ... Roll-off is frequently listed as between 10 and 12 dB. But this “flattening off” to ca 10 dB at 10 kHz was an intentional high cut which must not be compensated for in playback. Thus a setting of 13.7 dB is correct!

  • [R-C] ... RCA recommends replaying with “Old Ortho.”. High frequencies were cut off more deliberately at 8,500 Hz (with no effect on playback EQ!) than in later years. [cf. Moyer]

  • [R-B] ... From c. 1931 to 1938 high frequencies were even cut off at 5,500 Hz! The bass curve is “subject to some question, however,” since it was extensively modified by electronic filters and mechanical damping. But RCA found 500 Hz to be the best average characteristic and used this in re-recording pre-1938 masters. So in principle: “Old Ortho.” for playback again! [cf. Moyer]

  • [TCH] ... Technichord used its own “Technichord curve” 800N-12. Play back with “RCA 45” 800N-13.7!

  • [W.E.] ... Very early Columbia and Victor recordings (1926) used a bass turnover frequency of 250 or 300 Hz but their treble is described as “flat”. The perceived treble amplification was possibly only the result of resonant peaks of the early Western Electric condenser microphones used in recording. Background information is given in this PDF. An experimental replay EQ curve for this microphone / pre-emphasis combination can be downloaded ‎here.

  • A “HIFi+” sticker on American Columbias or the catalogue number written in an inverted triangle on German records (like Deutsche Grammophon) is a symbol for RIAA.

  • Later recordings on the labels listed below should all be RIAA.

  • ES

    Allied

    to 1958

    NAB or Col.LP

    500?-16

    500

    B/C

    -16

    JP,Hi,ES,mil,mm

    American Recording Society

    to matrix E2KP9607, mastered by RCA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES,Mc

    American Recording Society

    to 1958

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,mm,JP

    Angel

    (2XEA213-392/XAX561-817)(1N,2N)

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    ES

    Angel

    to 1952; to 35022

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    mil,mm,RF,Mc

    Arizona

    to Sept(?) 1955

    Capitol [CAP]

    400N-12.7

    400

    N

    -12,7

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Artist

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    GH,mil

    Atlantic

    to 1953, produced by MGM

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,JP,Mc

    Audio Fidelity

    no. 901-903

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    ES,mm,JP,RF

    Audiophile

    1952 - 1976 (!); regular 33⅓ LPs up to AP-125; may also be replayed with "flat" treble; probably never used RIAA

    Audiophile33

    600N-10

    600

    N

    -10.3

    RH,AT

    Bach Guild

    sublabel of Vanguard; BG-501 to 529 (1950 to 52)

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    GH,ES,Hk,Hi,AT

    Banner

    to 10002

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    to 1952

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mm

    Bartók

    1952-1953

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm

    Bartók

    no. 301-307, 309, 906-920

    Bartok

    630C-16

    629

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,JP,Mc

    Bartók

    no. 308, 310-11, 901-05 and from 921

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13,7

    Hi

    Blue Note

    to Sept(?) 1955, 33⅓ and 45s

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, Hk,Mc

    Bluebird

    Bluebird Classic (BC), a sublabel of RCA, see: RCA-Victor

    Boston

    to 1958, up to B202

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, RF

    Brunswick

    to matrix MG4400; with raised matrix**

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8

    ES

    Brunswick

    1951-1955

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm

    Caedmon (American)

    founded 1952, TC1002 - TC1022 (1955)

    Bartok

    630N-16

    629

    N

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Caedmon (American)

    629

    -11 or -12

    ES,Mc

    Caedmon (British)

    early LPs "made in England", from 1953

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    350

    N

    -10,5

    PC

    Canyon

    to C6160

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, Hk,Mc

    Capitol / Capitol-Cetra

    1949 - 1955 (sold to EMI-UK in 1955); 33⅓,

    Capitol [CAP]

    400N-12.7

    400

    N

    -12,7

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,RF, Hk,Mc

    Capitol / Capitol-Cetra

    1949 - 1954; 45 rpm

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    GH,mm

    Capitol

    to 1954, weak bass on 45 rpm can be improved (+ 4.5 dB) by 800 Hz t/o

    500

    -12

    ES,Mc

    Cetra-Soria

    Am. releases of Cetra, 1948-1953 (Cetra-Soria sold to Capitol)

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,GH,ES,mm,JP, RF

    Colosseum

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    ES,mil,RF,Mc

    Colosseum

    to Jan 1954

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,mm,JP,RF

    Colosseum

    some long operas

    1000

    -5

    ES

    Columbia (American)

    1947-1955; to matrix ML4895, XLP3200

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,GH,ES,mil,mm, JP,RF,Hk

    Columbia (American)

    1948 - 1953; 45 rpm

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    ES,mm,Mc

    Columbia (American)

    45 rpm

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    JP

    Columbia (American)

    1955 - ; after matrix XLP3200 or with "HiFi+" sticker

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    ES

    Columbia (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, matrix nos. LPs: from XA561 to XAX817; XRX12; EPs: 7TCA 7, 7TCO 6; SPs: 7XCA185, 7XCO 87

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    PC,ES

    Concert Hall (American)

    most! 1948-1954, XTV matrix to 20383 (low take nos) produced by COL

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,RF

    Concert Hall

    E0 matrix, mastered by RCA, ca. 1950/51

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8

    ES

    Concert Hall

    E1KP/E2KP matrix, mastered by RCA, ca. 1951/53

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES

    Concert Hall

    marked AES,

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mil,mm,RF,Mc

    Concert Hall

    CH matrix?

    500

    -10

    ES

    Concert Hall

    matrix E2RP from 4095 / E2KP from 9607

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13,7

    ES

    Concert Hall (British)

    to 1956 (or 1954)

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    Hi,mm,JP

    Contemporary

    2001-02, 2501-02, 2505, 2507, 3501

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,Mc

    Contemporary

    2504

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm

    Contemporary

    after matrix AP121

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    ES

    Cook

    to 1958(?), regular mono records

    Cook

    500

    N

    var. -12 to -15

    ES,mm

    Cook

    Cook Laboratories

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    JP

    Cook (binaural)

    inside band -0 roll-off, outs.-11 dB

    500

    0 ins./-11 outs.

    Hi,ES,mil,mm

    Coral

    sublabel of Decca (Amer.), est. 1949, up to MG4400, with raised matrix

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8

    ES

    Coral

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    JP,Mc

    Coral

    to 1958(?)

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,mm,JP

    Decca (American)

    up to MG4400, with raised matrix

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8

    ES

    Decca (American)

    1949-1951

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    mm

    Decca (American)

    1953, 33⅓ and 45 rpm

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm,JP,RF

    Decca (American)

    1953 - Nov 1955, 33⅓ and 45 rpm

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,mm,JP,RF

    Decca (British)

    1950-1956

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    mm

    Decca (British)

    ffrr (from ARL1186-1B)***

    ???London

    500

    -10

    ES

    Decca (British)

    ffrr (after 6/50)***

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    ES

    Decca (British)

    ffrr (from ARL2530-2A)

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    ES

    Decca (European)

    1949 - 1954, (Telefunken + Decca UK = TELDEC since 1950)

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    N

    0

    mm

    Decca (European)

    some 1954-1962

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    350

    N

    -10.5

    mm

    Decca (European)

    most from 1954

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    mm

    Decca ffrr

    1951 [Disputed!][1]

    300

    -14

    JP,RF

    Deutsche Grammophon

    alias "DGG"

    LP

    -10

    ES

    Deutsche Grammophon

    1952 - 1955, early LPs, cat. no in a rectangle, bass shelf 50 Hz

    IEC N78

    350A-10.5

    350

    A

    -10.5

    PC,GH,RB

    Deutsche Grammophon

    cat. no. in an inverted triangle (RIAA symbol)

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    PC

    Deutsche Grammophon

    1957, test disc DG 99105, possibly the only disc to DIN 45533

    TELDEC

    500R-11

    500

    R

    -11

    PC

    Dial

    1948 - 1954, 33⅓ and 45 rpm, bass of EP 45s can be improved by 700Hz t/o

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,JP

    Dot

    to 1958, 33⅓ and 45 rpm

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm

    Ducretet Thomson

    10/1954 - 1958, British releases issued by London/Decca UK

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    RF

    Elektra

    EKL 2-15, 18-20, 24-26 (rel. 1952-55)

    Bartok

    630N-16

    629

    N

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,Mc

    Elektra

    EKL 17, 22 (released 1954)

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mm,JP

    Elektra

    EKL 16, 21, 23 (rel. 1955) and from 27 up

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    Hi,ES,mm

    EMI-Angel

    to 1952, Deutsche Grammophon releases in US

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    mm

    EMI-HMV

    1949 - 1953; matrix 2XEA213-392/XAX561-817 (1N,2N) 33⅓ and 45 rpm

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    ES

    EMI-HMV

    1951 - 1954

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    mm

    EMI-HMV

    1954 - 1958?

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm,JP

    EMI-HMV

    since July 1953

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    ES,PC

    EMS

    1951 - 1956

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, RF,Hk,Mc

    Epic

    1948 - 1954, a Columbia sublabel

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,JP,RF

    Esoteric

    ES 500,517 and EST 5,6

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Esoteric

    to matrix E2KP 9607, mastered by RCA; from ES 533 => RIAA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES,Mc

    Festival

    to 1955

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    1948 - 1955; all

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,RF

    Fraternity Records

    up to F-1013

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    ES

    Good-Time Jazz

    1, 5-8

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP

    Good-Time Jazz

    3, 9-19

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,Mc

    Good-Time Jazz

    2, 4, 20 and up; since Oct 1955 => RIAA

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    Hi,mm

    Handel Society

    sublabel of Concert Hall, mostly produced by COL, 1951-1954; others see Concert Hall

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    Haydn Society

    sublabel of Urania; to matrix XTV20383, mastered by COL; to cat. HS-3062, HSL-84; 1949 to 1954

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, Hk,AT

    His Master's Voice (Amer.)

    sublabel of RCA; to 1952; since Aug 1952 => "New Ortho." = RIAA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES,GH,RM

    His Master's Voice (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, EMI-UK, matrix nos. LPs: 2XEA213 - 392 and 0XAV145; EPs: 7TEA 19, 7TAV 28; SPs: 7XBA14 - 21 and 7XCS 23, 7XLA 2, 7XRA 30, 7XSB 6, 7XVH 70, 7XEA688, 7XAV227

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    PC,ES

    His Master's Voice (British)

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    GH,JP,RF

    Kapp

    no. 100-103, 1000-1001

    Kapp

    800N-16

    800

    N

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Kendall

    to 1958(?)

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    L'Oiseau-Lyre

    to 1954, to matrix OL50018, prod. by Decca

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    London

    first few

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm

    London

    ffrr; after 6/1950***; to matrix ARL1186-1B

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    ES

    London

    ffrr; to LL-846; to matrix ARL2530-2A

    London LP

    500C-10.5

    500

    C

    -10.5

    Hi,mil,mm,ES

    1948 - 1951, XTV matrix, mastered by COL

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mil,mm,JP,RF,ES

    Lyrichord

    1951 - 1957(?)

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,mm

    Lyrichord

    1950 - 1952, mastered by RCA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    PC

    Lyrichord

    400

    -16

    mil,JP,RF

    Lyrichord

    before 1953, (E0-E3 matrix)

    ???AES

    400

    -12

    ES

    Lyrichord

    if labeled "629"

    Bartok

    630C-16

    629

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,JP,Mc

    Mercury

    1948 - 1952, marked "2000Hz/3dB p.octave", MG10000 series

    500

    -7 (3 dB/oct.)

    PC,ES

    Mercury

    1953 - Oct 1954, 33⅓ and 45s, to matrix MG50026, 7000

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, PC,Hk,Mc

    MGM

    to 1952

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    GH,mm

    MGM

    to 1953; to matrix M-G-M E3071; 33⅓ and 45 rpm; bass of 45s can be improved by 700 Hz

    MGM [MGM]

    500N-12

    500

    N

    -12

    ES,mm,JP,Hk,AT, Mc

    MGM (British)

    1949 - 7/1953, matrix nos. SPs: 7XSM203

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    PC

    Music Treasures

    all

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm

    New Records

    to 1954

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    New Records

    mastered by RCA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES

    Nixa (British)

    1950 (founded) to 1955, US matrixes from Westminster

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm,PC

    Nixa (British)

    to 1955, if labeled AES

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm

    Nixa (British)

    to 1955, if labeled NAB

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    mm

    Nixa (British)

    US matrixes from Polymusic or Urania; mastered by RCA Victor

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    PC

    Nixa (British)

    US matrixes from Lyrichord; see: Lyrichord

    PC

    Nocturne

    LP1-LP3 ,LP5; XP1-XP10

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Oceanic

    to 1958; to matrix XTV20383, low take nos.

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, Hk

    Odeon

    300

    -10

    ES

    Overtone

    nos. 1-5 produced by COL; from no. 6 => RIAA

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,TP,AT

    Oxford

    to 1958?

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Pacific Jazz

    to 1953

    Pacific Jazz

    500C-12

    500

    C

    -12

    mm

    Pacific Jazz

    PJLP 1-13; 10" LPs issued in 1953/54

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Parlophone

    1947-1954

    300

    -10

    ES

    Parlophone

    1949 - 7/1953, EMI UK, matrix nos. LPs: XEX 60; SPs: 7XCE135; (EPs were probably all RIAA)

    500-FLAT

    500N-0

    500

    N

    0

    PC,ES

    Period

    1949-1953; up to 576

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,Mc

    Philharmonia

    to 1958?

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, Hk,Mc

    Philips

    to 1953, 33⅓ and 45s

    Philips

    400N-6

    400

    N

    -6

    mm

    Philips (British)

    1953 - ?, LPs with re-issues of 78s masters

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    350

    N

    -10.5

    PC,RB

    Polydor

    sub-label of Deutsche Grammophon

    300

    -10

    ES,mil

    Polymusic

    to 1958 (regular mono records)

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    ES,mil,mm,JP,RF

    Polymusic (binaural)

    inside band -0 roll-off, outs.-11 dB (Cook system)

    500

    0 ins./-11 outs.

    Hi,ES,mil,mm

    Rachmaninoff Society

    to 1958?

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    RCA Victor

    1949 - 1950, some 33⅓ and 45s; matrix from D9 to E0LRC3980

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8 or -10

    ES,mm,Mc

    RCA Victor

    1949 - 8/1952, first 45 rpm discs (also some 33⅓)

    RCA 45 [R-D]

    800N-13.7

    800

    N

    -13.7

    RM,mm,PC

    RCA Victor

    1950 - 8/1952, 33⅓ only; matrix from E0LRC3981

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    RM,ES,mm,JP,PC, Hk

    RCA Victor

    since Aug. 1952: "New Orthophonic"; all LM,WDM,DM cat. from 1701; LCT,WCT from 1112; all LHMV,WHMV,LBC,WBC and Extended Play 45s; (from E2RP4094)

    RIAA

    500R-13.7

    500

    R

    -13.7

    RM,Hi,GH,ES,PC

    Remington

    to 1958(?); to matrix 199-135

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP,Mc

    Renaissance

    1949 - 1952

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm

    Renaissance

    1952 - 1954

    Pacific Jazz

    500C-12

    500

    C

    -12

    ES,mil,mm,Mc

    Riverside

    to Sept (?) 1955

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP

    Stradivari

    to 1958

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    ES,mil,mm

    Telefunken

    1951 - 1953, (Telefunken + Decca UK = TELDEC since 1950)

    Telefunken

    400N-0

    400

    N

    0

    mil,mm

    Telefunken

    1954 - 1962

    CCIR 78

    350N-10.5

    350

    N

    -10.5

    mm,RB

    Tempo

    1948 - 1953

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    mm

    Tempo

    1954 - 1958(?)

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,GH,ES,mm,JP

    Transradio

    to 1958(?)

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mm,JP

    Urania

    most; to matrix XTV20383 (low take nos), mastered by COL; 1949 to 1954; since 1953 change to RIAA

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,mil,mm,ES,Hk, AT

    Urania

    Cat. nos. URLP 224, 603, 7059, 7063, 7065, 7066, 7069; ca 1952/53

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,mm,JP,Mc,AT

    Urania

    to matrix E2KP9243, mastered by RCA; 1950 to 1953

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    PC,ES,AT

    Vanguard

    VRS 411-42, 6000-18, up to XTV20386; VRS 7001-11, 8001-04; since 1954 RIAA

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,JP,GH,Hk AT

    Vox

    1948 - 1954; up to matrix XTV20386, PL8400 or labeled "Lp"; mastered by COL

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    GH,mil,mm,JP,ES, PC,Hk

    Vox

    labeled AES

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    mm

    Vox

    1951 - Oct 1954

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    Hi,mil,mm,JP,RF

    Westminster

    1948 - Oct 1955, to matrix XTV20383 low take nos.; mastered by Columbia

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    -16

    Hi,ES,mil,mm,JP, PC

    Westminster

    EO matrix

    Old RCA

    800N-8

    800

    N

    -8

    ES

    Westminster

    to matrix E2KP9607, mastered by RCA

    Old Ortho. [R-D]

    500N-13.7

    500

    N

    13.7

    ES

    Westminster

    labeled AES

    AES

    400N-12.3

    400

    N

    -12.3

    Hi,mil,mm,JP,RF

    Westminster

    labeled NARTB

    NAB

    500B-16

    500

    B

    -16

    GH,JP

    [MGM] ... used a special “MGM curve” 500N-12. Play back with “RCA Old Orthophonic” 500N-12.3!

  • [R-D] ... Roll-off is frequently listed as between 10 and 12 dB. But this “flattening off” to ca 10 dB at 10 kHz was an intentional high cut which must not be compensated for in playback. Thus a setting of 13.7 dB is correct!

  • [R-C] ... RCA recommends replaying with “Old Ortho.”. High frequencies were cut off more deliberately at 8,500 Hz (with no effect on playback EQ!) than in later years. [cf. Moyer]

  • [R-B] ... From c. 1931 to 1938 high frequencies were even cut off at 5,500 Hz! The bass curve is “subject to some question, however,” since it was extensively modified by electronic filters and mechanical damping. But RCA found 500 Hz to be the best average characteristic and used this in re-recording pre-1938 masters. So in principle: “Old Ortho.” for playback again! [cf. Moyer]

  • GH ... Graumann, Heinz; Schallplatten-Schneidkennlinien und ihre Entzerrung, in: FUNKSCHAU 1958, Heft 15, pp 359 ff

  • Hi ... High Fidelity Magazine, October 1955 with revised “Dialing Your Disks” table.

  • Hk ... Heathkit; Pre-amplifier WA-P2 manual; Heath Comp., Benton Harbor, Michigan; 1954

  • ia ... iasa – International Association of Sound and Audiovisual Archives: replay EQ

  • JP ... James R. Powell Jr., “Audiophile’s Guide to Phonorecord Playback Equalizer Settings”, in: ARSC Journal 20-1, Spring 1989, pp 14-23

  • Mc ... McIntosh Audio Compensator C-8 manual (1956). Please note that McIntosh lists all labels using "Columbia LP" curve with 750 Hz in error.

  • mil ... Millennia Music and Media Systems manufacturer of LOCi pre-ampand other high end professional audio recording products. Their EQ chart was initially part of the manual of the LPE-2 pre-amp. A revised version was released in 2010 as “MM Legacy Recordings“ chart.

  • mm ... MidiMagic is probably the most comprehensive and reliable websource. Data were researched in the 1970s and are based on publications of the 1950s.

  • PC ...Peter Copeland, Manual of Analogue Sound Restoration Techniques, The British Library, 2014

  • RB ... Richard Brice in PspatialAudio

  • RF ... Russell Fisher / W.A.M.S.

  • RM ... Robert C. Moyer, Evolution of a Recording Curve; in: Audio Engineering, vol.37, no.7, July 1953; pp 19-22, 53-54. (about "New Orthophonic" and previous RCA curves)

  • TP ... Tom Packard of Packburn Electronics, Inc. Personal correspondence re Overtone.

  • Discographical information about catalogue numbers, matrix numbers and release dates is based on Both Sides Now, The Online Discographical Project, 45worlds (who also show 78 rpm and LPs), Decca Classical discography by Philip Stuart (July 2009 edition], Record Information Services (post-war UK labels), Yale University, Music Cataloging, Grammophon-Platten.de (German/European labels) and Discogs (database and trading platform) as well as some discographies specialized on specific labels.

  • 500-FLAT 500N-0 was used by British Columbia, EMI, His Master’s Voice, MGM and Parlophone between 1931 and 1953. Later releases have modified treble.

    ‎American 78 – 250N-6/250N-8: Common setting for many American shellacs. This curve here is a compromise between both varieties with -7 dB roll-off.

    BBC 2dB/octave: used by smaller British labels (Aco, Broadcast, Linguaphone, Vocalion, …) from 1926 to 1933, which had their recordings mastered by BBC with the Marconi system.

    Blumlein300 - 300N-0: A British traditional for Gramophone Company, Decca, Columbia and EMI (1930s – 1944).

    ‎Columbia 78 – 300N-16 is the right one for American CBS-Columbia shellacs (1938 - 1948).

    ‎AES – 400N-12.3: Intended by AES (Audio Engineering Society) as a replay standard for many American shellacs of the 1930s and 1940s. Also used by many record producers as a recording curve for N78 and M33 between 1951 and 1958. Also to replay Capitol and Capitol-Cetra recordings with “Capitol curve” 400N-12.7 (1951 – 1955).

    Columbia LP – 500C-16: For Columbia and many other labels, mostly 33⅓ LPs (M33).

    London LP – 500C-10.5: Used for British Decca and for London / Decca releases in the US featuring the ffrr (full frequency range recording) system. Mostly 33⅓ LPs (1949 – 1956)

    NAB – 500B-16: A widely adopted standard of NAB / NARTB (National Association of Radio and Television Broadcasters) requiring ca. 6 dB more bass boost than Columbia LP

    RCA 45 – 800N-13.7: RCA’s curve for their 45 rpm discs (1949 – August 1952). Possibly identical with Technichord’s “Technichord curve” 800N-12 already used since 1938 for their 78s.

    Label

    Remarks

    Curve Name

    Code

    turnover bass [Hz]

    bass shelf

    treble roll-off [dB @ 10kHz]

    Source

    _Electrical 78's (general)

    1925-1938

    300

    Label

    Remarks

    Curve Name

    Code

    turnover bass [Hz]

    bass shelf

    treble roll-off [dB @ 10kHz]

    Source

    Allegro

    1948 - 1956

    Columbia LP

    500C-16

    500

    C

    EQ Curves Library
    convert them to a TXT file with EQ XML to TXT Converter
    78 rpm EQ Curve Generator
    Table 2
    Table 3
    converted to txt
    Forum topic
    record labels
    technical background
    reenactment
    MidiMagic
    IASA
    ARSC
    this PDF
    9KB
    Western_Electric_2.1.2.XML
    Open
    Esoteric Sound
    manual
    Nauck’s
    Figure 1. Bass Boost curve: 3dB at 500 Hz
    Figure 2. Treble Cut curve: -13.7 dB at 10 kHz
    Figure 3. Combined Bass Boost and Treble Cut curve
    Figure 4. Combined Bass Boost, Treble Cut and 50 Hz LF Shelving curve
    500-FLAT_3.2.2.txt
    American_78_3.2.2.txt
    BBC_Transcription_(1949)_3.2.2.txt
    Blumlein300_3.2.2.txt
    Columbia_78_3.2.2.txt
    AES_(1951)_3.2.2.txt
    Columbia_LP_3.2.2.txt
    London_LP_3.2.2.txt
    NAB_(1949)_3.2.2.txt
    RCA_45_3.2.2.txt

    0

    -16

    this PDF
    Bartók
    Folkways
    Lyrichord